Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

"The true mind can weather all the lies and illusions without being lost.

The true heart can touch the poison of hatred without being harmed.

Since beginning less time, darkness thrives in the void, but always yields to purifying light."

There was a time when Zuko truly believed that he would never be happy.

When capturing The Avatar and returning home seemed like an impossible feat. When he was adrift on the ocean or starving in the desert or sweeping the floors of a dank tea shop in the slums of Ba Sing Se. When his face was burned by the same hand that used to gently stroke his head and he was banished from his homeland at thirteen. 

And even years later, after returning home and getting everything he thought he had ever wanted, somehow everything was still wrong, and happiness eluded him. He felt like an imposter in his own skin, putting on robes that were no longer meant for him. The guilt had bubbled up from inside him until he was a raging volcano, spewing self-hatred outward in every direction. It wasn’t until adulthood, after he had done his best to right the wrongs of his nation and learned the true meaning of honor, that he became truly happy. 

At first, the emotion felt almost foreign, and it startled him because he had been living in fear and anger for so long that he knew no other way to be. But slowly, gently, he let the light fill him up, seeping into his bones and allowing him to become the ruler his uncle always knew he could be. He learned to enjoy peace and to rule with both decisive strength and steadfast compassion. Life no longer seemed like a turbulent storm of emotions, disasters, and unresolved angst. The storms had cleared.

This was the first day of the new year, three years after the end of the war. The Fire Nation and the rest of the world were finally, truly at peace. His people were happy and, at such an auspicious time, there were many reasons to rejoice. Zuko finally felt like a Fire Lord in his own right. An emperor. He wore silks of red and black and no longer felt like he was playing dress-up in his father’s robes.

The New Year celebration was a grand affair, with guests in attendance from all the nations, and certainly the most impressive festival that he and his friends had ever experienced in their lifetimes. The whole imperial courtyard glowed under the warm light of dragon lanterns. All around them was red and gold, the city full of energy despite the winter season. Confetti and fireworks filled the sky, raining on and on throughout the night. When he looked over at his dear friends and his beloved fiancée, Zuko smiled from his throne, truly content. Many of his closest allies were in attendance, finishing their meals. Zuko had scraped his plate clean much earlier and his table had been taken away. There was nothing to do but relax on his throne with a glass of lychee wine and enjoy the show. Dancers moved rhythmically in front of the dais to the beat of the music, twirling red and gold ribbons. Their synchronized display was as beautiful as it was entertaining, and, for a few minutes, everyone focused on their routine. 

But then, just beyond the dancers, in the crowd, Zuko caught a glimpse of someone. Someone he thought he knew.

The hooded figure approached, weaving their way through the throng of people. Immediately, Zuko’s paranoia took over, and it felt like a memory, or perhaps a dream. He shot up from the throne, stepping to the edge of the dais to see who it could be. The dancers and the musicians all suddenly stopped, everyone looking up at their Fire Lord in confusion. In a few moments, all the other sounds and movements in the crowd died down, and everyone grew silent, trying to see what their young Fire Lord was doing. Or rather, who he was staring at. His imperial guards automatically stood on alert, raising their weapons and stepping forward to protect their emperor.

The shadowy figure, followed closely by another, much smaller one, stepped forward into the empty space before the royal dais.

"Halt!" A guard shouted.

Zuko’s breathing stopped. His eyes blew wide. And the mysterious party guest pulled down her hood, revealing a face Zuko had never been expecting to see again.

Chapter Text

“It is according to the dictate of time and fate that we have resolved to pave the way for a grand peace for all the generations to come by enduring the unendurable and suffering what is insufferable.”

-Hirohito, “Gyokuon-hōsō” Radio Broadcast

Winter, 101AG, Fire Nation Capital 

          “You’re not listening to me, Councilman Yang. I know this is only temporary, but we’ll be able to survive the winter, and by next summer we'll—”

          “By next summer so many of our people will be dead, jobless, or homeless that we won’t even have a country anymore! Do you understand that?" The man shouted, the anger in his voice reverberating through the chamber, and he stood up suddenly, fists clenched at his side as he glared up at the throne. "We’ll only have anarchy! "

          Zuko’s flames in front of the dais rose with his frustration.

          “Don’t interrupt me. Sit down,” he warned slowly, his patience tested and his body tense, like a coil wound too tight, “Your Fire Lord speaks.”

          The old politician sat, slowly, and eventually forced himself to speak words of contrition, completely devoid of sincerity.

          “My apologies, Your Majesty.” 

          Zuko was not usually one to stand on ceremony or use his title to get what he wanted, but the brazen lack of respect from Councilman Yang was not something he could ignore. Still, he sighed, because the situation was dire indeed, and the man had a reason for getting upset. 

          “I understand that you’re frustrated. We’re all frustrated. But unless you have a constructive suggestion, be silent. We will make it through this. Don’t infect us with your anxiety. This is a place for solutions.”

          Councilman Yang avoided his eyesight, withholding some choice words. Another councilman turned to speak.

          “Will you permit me, Your Majesty?”

          “Yes, Councilman Tanaka.”

          “It’s my opinion that we need to ask for more aid from the other nations, or request for additional trade at this time. My district will not have enough food to survive until spring. My people are suffering, too.”

          A councilman at the far end of the table responded to him, irritated.

          “The Earth Kingdom has largely refused our request for additional trade, Councilman Tanaka. If we ask now, they are only going to deny us again, and this time it will make us look weak and susceptible to foreign interference or invasion.”

          “No one is going to invade us, Councilman Lang. And you’re right, Tanaka. We need to make another trade. Our best bet is still the water tribes. They’re our most valuable trading partners right now. I have a good relationship with the Southern Tribe, and I’m sure I can figure something out. We— we can trade our ships and weapons in exchange for food. Or anything else we have enough of. Furniture. Silks. Books. Those things are in short supply there. It’ll give our people enough food to last through the end of the winter. And then we can work on a more permanent solution. And securing better trading deals with the Earth Kingdom. I can improve my relationship with King Kuei as soon as the decolonization process is completed. When that’s over, I can start getting him to trust me. To trust the Fire Nation enough for trade. It’s not going to happen overnight. My father tried to burn down their country. They’re not paranoid. We’ve been fighting them for a hundred years. Of course they don’t trust us. And the Avatar is doing most of that work himself, so as soon as he’s finished with the decolonization, the three of us will work something out… For now, let’s try to make a deal with the water tribes. The Southern Water Tribe, to start.”

          “Respectfully, Your Majesty, the Southern Water Tribe is nothing more than a conglomeration of ice huts and snow. The people there don’t even exceed two hundred. What makes you think they’ll be able to help us?”

          “I know what the Southern Water Tribe is, Minister Lang. I’ve been there several times. Have you?” He challenged.

          Lang paled a bit, always fearful of his liege’s temper. “No, Your Majesty.”

          “Then don’t speak about things you don’t understand. True, the Southern Water Tribe is not very well populated, which is our country’s fault in the first place, but they have more than enough fish in their sea to help feed our people. You devalue the tribe’s worth. They have penguin-seals and whale-sharks and other types of food… Arctic hen, I think. And something called sea prunes.”

          The council members exchanged skeptical glances at that. 

          “Also, they’re experts in fishing and trapping. It’s not food that we’re used to, but it is food and it’ll help solve this problem for now. I’m sure I can work something out with Chief Hakoda,” he turned to his scribe, “Draft a letter after the meeting, please.”

          “Yes, Your Majesty.” The scribe scribbled down a note and another minister spoke up.

          “I understand that their oceans are filled with fish, sire, but are they really able to collect such a large amount of food at once with so few people in their tribe? I don’t know if you’re aware of the amount of manpower it would take to collect so many fish or, ah, penguin-seals,” he fumbled, completely unfamiliar with the animal as a source of food. “They may not be able to, even if they would agree. We have hundreds of thousands of hungry citizens. That’s— that’s a lot of fish.”

          “Yeah, it’s a lot of fish. But that can be work for part of our unemployed population. We can create a new administration, or some sort of task force. At least for the winter. It solves more than one problem at once.”

          Some of the councilmen exchanged looks in silent judgment, but none dared to speak up against it. Zuko sighed. He knew the main reason they were against his plan; they didn’t want to sign any sort of deal with the other nations at all, let alone with the Southern Water Tribe members who they deemed brute savages. 

          “Listen, I know that none of you are used to dealing with other nations like this. But these are good people. They’re not barbarians. The people of the Southern Water Tribe are brave and kind. They will help each other through anything instead of tearing each other to shreds to get a step ahead, like we do. Needless to say, we have a lot to learn from them. If the Fire Nation is going to recover from losing the war, which we will, then we’re going to have to work together. And get along with everyone. Everyone. Including tribesmen.”

          More silence. Some of the ministers looked up at him with strange expressions. Fire Lord Zuko suddenly seemed so different from his father, and generations before him. 

          “With that being said, does anyone here object to my plan?”

          Silence hung heavy in the air, the crackling of fire being the only discernible sound.

          “Then you can go. We’ll reconvene tomorrow afternoon.”

          “Yes, Firelord Zuko,” they answered in unison, but on the way out Zuko could swear he saw them give side glances to one another, silently dissenting.

          He tried not to let himself be bothered by their disrespect, but it was difficult. Especially with his friends gone and his uncle so far away in Ba Sing Se. When the court scribe approached the throne, bowing deeply as custom, Zuko stared harshly at the closed curtains that led into the hall. He could just barely hear his ministers talking with one another, and he doubted they were saying anything about him that was good. The sting of being criticized through whispers felt like daggers in his sides.

          “Come with me, Cheng. I need you to draft a letter to Chief Hakoda and Katara of the Southern Water Tribe.”

Later that evening…

          Zuko opened the door to his personal chambers with a sigh of relief. He had quickly discovered that being the Firelord was even harder than he had imagined. From sunrise until long after dusk there were endless committee meetings, strategy meetings, consultations, and letters to write. Citizen requests and food shortages and rebellions to quench. It took everything out of him until he felt like he couldn’t speak another word and his body was composed entirely of knots. But Mai was waiting for him in the antechamber, and as soon as Zuko saw her he was reminded that the hard part of his day was over. From dawn until he returned to his rooms he was the Fire Lord, but when the sky grew thick with stars, he was just hers. Just a seventeen year old boy with too much stress and too much to do. 

          “Hey, babe,” she greeted, getting up from the stylish chabudai to kiss him on the lips, which made him smile a little. 

          “Hi, Mai. Oh, I’m sorry. Babe.” 

          The whole “babe” thing started as a joke. One of their sarcastic we-hate-everyone-else-and-like-to-make-fun-of-them charades, but pretty quickly after the end of the war, the way she said it was no longer a mockery of other couples. Just a small declaration of love for her boyfriend spoken in private. He took off his outer robes as quickly as he could each evening, preferring to be out of them and into comfortable loungewear as soon as possible. It was a physical difference between the time he was “Firelord Zuko” and the time when he was simply “Zuko”. 

          He passed through the elegant antechamber and his expansive bedroom, making his way to the large polished wood dresser and walk-in closet beside it. When he assumed the throne, he immediately chose to make changes to the royal palace. The first of which was remodeling what used to be the Fire Lady’s chambers into his chambers, thus creating a microcosm of rooms for himself (and Mai) in the safest part of the palace. He couldn’t sleep in his own childhood bedroom. There were too many unpleasant memories there. And he certainly couldn’t sleep in his father’s old chambers. Something new was much appreciated and it helped him feel like the person he was becoming instead of the person he was.

          The rooms were dark and simplistic, all mahogany wood and shades of burgundy and black. He didn’t like gold glinting at him from every surface. After living such a simple life for so many years, it felt too extravagant. And besides, he preferred dark, sleek wood and plain silks. It felt more relaxing anyway. While he changed inside the large closet, Mai called out to him.

          “I just opened a bottle of wine. Do you want some?”

          “Sure,” he answered back, sighing at the feeling of loose, lightweight clothes on his body instead of the heavy royal regalia. “You know what, Mai? I think I’m going to stop wearing those fucking robes everyday.”

          “Well, there’s another tradition out the window,” Mai droned in her usual manner. “What is that, the hundredth one you’re getting rid of? You should get a free cup of tea or something.”

          Zuko had been tradition-defying since day one of his reign. No more executions. No more agni-kais. No more propaganda. Treating people with kindness. The citizens were very shocked, indeed.

          “I’m serious. Why do I have to wear those every day? Just ‘cause it’s a tradition? Screw that. I’m gonna call my tailor on Sunday. I want something lighter.”

          He came back into his bedroom and Mai approached him. 

          “In winter?”

          “I’m always hot,” he muttered in reply, and Mai stepped in close, rubbing a hand up his chest, feeling the hardness of his body and the warmth underneath.

          “Oh, right… you are.”

          The suggestive gleam in her eyes made him groan.

          “Argh. How cringy are we gonna get?” He rolled his eyes and went for the bottle of wine. 

          “I was just trying to—” flirt, Mai thought to herself, but Zuko didn’t always pick up on flirting, or he simply wasn’t in the mood, she couldn't tell. “Nevermind. How are you?”

          Zuko focused on pouring the wine first and took a long drink in silence. Then he poured himself another.

          “Bad day?” She asked, raising a perfectly-plucked brow.

          “You have no idea. I think I’m going to just scrape by. Barely,” he sighed and took another sip, “Like I always do. I guess that’s just— just how my life is always going to be. Even now that I’m the Firelord.”

          “What do you mean, ‘scraping by’?”

          “There’s not enough food. You know, we used to collect tons and tons of food from the Earth Kingdom, but we can’t do that anymore, obviously, and they don’t want to sell anymore to us. They’re pissed off. It’s their way of retribution. They don’t have to sell to us so they don’t. We need more help. People are going hungry, Mai. Really hungry. Like, selling-off-family-heirlooms-and-kimonos-to-feed-their-kids-hungry. The yakuza are having a damn feeding frenzy. And my ministers are trying to fight me or ridicule me or undercut me at every turn. I think they’re this close to full on rebellion,” he gesticulated with his fingers. “And they probably would have overthrown me months ago if they weren’t worried about getting their bending taken away by Aang and being thrown in prison to rot.”

          “I’m so sorry, Zuko. That sounds terrible,” she sighed, rubbing his shoulder affectionately. “Can’t we just buy more food from someone else? Other parts of the Earth Kingdom? Independent states?”

          “Maybe... but it’ll be hard. Trading is better now. The banks aren’t so solid, you know that. My plan is to trade some more of our valuables, you know, ships, technology, et cetera— with the Southern Water Tribe. Because they need that stuff. They have too many fish and they live in those tiny ice huts.”

          “You mean igloos?” She asked sardonically.

          “We can send them building supplies or ships or furniture or whatever it is they want, and our people can just get used to eating… Whale meat? Seal jerky? Whatever it is that they eat. Sea prunes. Some kind of food. I think it’s food.”

          “Is it, though?” Mai lounged back with her glass of wine, relatively pleased to be spending time with her boyfriend regardless of the shaky state of the nation. “Sounds terrible.” 

          “Yeah, I think I had seal jerky once. With Sokka. Anyway, I hope it works. Just to hold us off for a while. Feed the people that are going hungry. I’m glad, at least, that I have such a strong relationship with Katara and Sokka right now. Earth King Kuei is still... well, you know.” 

          “Mm, yeah, I know. It sounds like a good plan…” she drifted off, enjoying her wine, before a thought popped into her head. “I can help, if you want. If you need me to help.”

          “You would?” He turned to look at her.

          She stared at his scar for a moment, distracted.

          “Yeah. Well, I feel like I’m not doing enough to help here anyway. I mostly just mess around all day waiting for you to back. Gods, I sound like my mother,” she complained comically, “and that is not what I want. I need to get out. Do something useful. Can I help with this?”

          “Sorry you’re feeling useless, Mai. You know you're not. Coming home to you is what makes my stress go away. Honestly, you’re what gets me through the day pretty much every day. Just knowing I get to see you when all my meetings are over—” 

          “I love you,” she interrupted him, catching her boyfriend off guard.

          Zuko kissed her tenderly, exhaling in relief as he did so. They kissed for a while in the silence of his chambers, and then Mai rested her head on his shoulder as he wrapped an arm around her lithe form, settling in.

          “That’s great. But still, I don’t want to be some useless, boring housewife. I want to go do something. I can help with this. Not that picking up fish is really that exciting, but it’s important. I could, you know, manage it or something. I don’t know. Whatever you need. And I can escort Katara and Sokka back here if they’re coming to visit.”

          “I hope so. I miss them. But I’m not sure. Hakoda might come, he might not. I dunno if Katara and Sokka are still there, or if they’re with Aang.”

          “Okay.”

          “Thanks for offering to go. It’s a good idea. I need to add to the letter I wrote before I send it. Why don’t you head the— the task force, or whatever you want to call it?” 

          “The task force? The give-me-all-your-fish-you-watertribe-peasant task force?” She teased, mocking his voice.

          Zuko huffed at her and got up, walking to his bed. He wanted to collapse into the silky sheets and forget about fish and his past misdeeds all together.

          “I resent that.” 

          “I was joking!” Mai followed him over to the bed and moved to sit next to him. “She told me you used to call her that.”

          “Shit. Yeah, I did.”

          “And ‘little waterbender bitch’, but I couldn’t tell if she was joking about that one or not.”

          “Ughh,” he groaned loudly, but it was muffled because his face was smushed into the silk bedding. “Fuck me. Seriously.” 

          “Okay,” Mai smirked mischievously and pushed his shoulder. “Roll over.”

One week later, Southern Water Tribe

          “Aaa-rgh. I can’t believe I ate so much. Katara-aa, I’m gonna die,” Sokka groaned comically, playing it up.

          He was sprawled out on the caribou-bear pelt on the ground in front of the fire, comfortably relaxed in the privacy of home. 

          His sister just rolled her eyes at his antics and moved a piece on the The Arctic Hunt game that was set out between them, although neither of them were paying much attention to it. The winter festival had just concluded in the Southern Water Tribe. A proper festival, for once, with the men all staying at home. The celebrations were both fun and heartfelt, especially considering the remaining members of the tribe hadn’t gathered for it in one place for many, many years. It was a continued celebration of the end of the Hundred Year War, dragged on from the fall. People had been rejoicing for months.

          Hakoda, finally the officially elected Head Chieftain, had been overjoyed to preside over the celebrations and bring his tribe, as well as their visitors from the Northern Tribe, closer together. In song and in spirit. Everyone had been feasting, playing games, partying, and worshiping together for a week.

          Sokka was technically full of leftovers from the final night of the festival, but, as he explained it, he wanted to eat as much of them as he could so they ‘didn’t go bad ’. Katara, along with most of the tribe, felt content, but was going through a post-celebration slump. Her mood had been high for so many days, during tug-of-war competitions and tribal dances and great meals, but afterward it naturally fell and she felt sluggish and low.  

          “You’re not going to die, Sokka. It’s not my fault you ate so much. And so quickly.”

          “I feel pregnant,” he joked, purposefully extending his stomach and rubbing the bulge there.

          Katara laughed at his joke as their father entered the igloo through the entrance tunnel, quickly closing the interior animal-skin door behind him. He looked around for a moment. The particular igloo they were in was Katara’s. She liked her privacy at times and there was plenty of snow to go around, so she enjoyed having her own space.

          A single wooden pole was affixed to the back of the igloo, with a beautiful tapestry hanging from it. It was a gift from Master Pakku when he had arrived in the South Pole. Katara’s simple bed consisted of a wooden frame, a luxury in their tribe reserved for the Chief and his children, adorned with a few layers of stitched-together furs and topped by a lovely blue woven blanket passed down from her mother. On her bedside table, there were two prints she had taken back home, one of her with Aang and one of a very recently crowned Firelord Zuko. Her box of letters sat beside them.

          On the other side of the igloo there was a fireplace. Sokka and her father were both very good at designing the igloos and so when she asked to have an adjoining fireplace they accepted the challenge. The fireplace had a small air vent which let out the smoke, but the heat from the fire filled the inside, making it cozy in her room despite the frigid air out in the tundra. 

          “Hey, Dad. What’s up?”

          Hakoda had something under his arm but it was hard to tell what it was underneath all of the furs he was wearing. 

          “Sokka, what are you doing?”

          The Chieftain laughed at his son playfully, who was laying on a thick fur on the floor and rubbing his bloated belly.

          “Oh, Sokka’s pregnant, in case you didn’t know,” Katara joked, and they both laughed, “With eel-fish soup, I guess.”

          “Gods." He smiled. "Here, Katara, these are for you. We got deliveries by messenger hawk. They look like Fire Lord Zuko’s and Avatar Aang’s.”

          Hakoda handed her the letters and warmed his hands in front of the fire.

          “Finally! ” She smiled, her mood perking up, “It’s been so long since I’ve gotten a letter.” 

          “It’s only been like a week or two,” Sokka mumbled. "Aang writes you all the time."

          Hakoda sat on the floor next to his son, peeling off his outer layer.

          “So, who sent them?”

          “Aang and Zuko!”

          “What do they say?” Sokka peeked up at her, over his stomach, but he didn’t bother to sit up all the way. The young waterbender smiled as she read the letter from her long-distance boyfriend.

          “This is Aang’s. He says: Dear Katara, Hello, beautiful. I miss you so much. I hope you’re doing well. Did you enjoy New Year’s and the winter festival? Toph and I celebrated with the Earth King. He threw a big party and we danced a lot. It was really nice, but I missed you and your family, of course. Momo ate too many moon pies. How is your family doing? I hope you’re all doing well and enjoying the festival. Right now I’m very busy with Toph working on decolonization. This is probably the second most difficult job I’ve had as Avatar so far.”

          “Remind me again,” Sokka cut in, rather rudely, “Why is Aang the leader of the Decolonization Movement and not Zuko?”

          “Because keeping peace and balance between the four nations is the Avatar’s duty. Zuko didn’t set up any of the colonies. They’re not his. It’s not considered his land— or the Fire Nation’s land anymore. It’s all considered Earth Kingdom territory now that the war is over. And so Aang is helping all the Fire Nation people there relocate back to Fire Nation, or to become Earth Kingdom citizens if they want to under special conditions. But they have to apply for citizenship and stuff. And the Earth King doesn’t really want them becoming citizens of his country, but Aang forced him to make it an option, because some of the people there have lived there for generations and they’re earthbenders. It’s complicated. Earthbenders and firebenders have been living in the colonies together for a long time, and there are a lot of mixed families there. And they all have to decide whether they want to stay in the Earth Kingdom and give up their Fire Nation citizenship, or go to the Fire Nation and leave behind the people they know. It’s a mess.”

          “Yeah, it sounds like it.”

          “And Zuko is working really hard to find places for all of the colonials to live,” Katara explained, going to sit on her bed, “Suki and the Kyoshi warriors are helping with that, too. They’re making new districts and places for the colonials. It’s a lot of work. And it costs a lot, obviously. Zuko told me in an old letter that they’re using some weird places to house people... like old weapons factories and military lodgings that aren’t being used anymore.”

          “It’s kinda like what’s going on here. With all the people coming back, I mean,” Sokka muttered. 

          “Sort of. People are going back where they were supposed to be before the war began.”

          She read the remainder of Aang’s letter to herself because it got a bit romantic at the end. 

          “Okay, I’m going to read Zuko’s letter now.”

          Unlike Aang’s simple parchment letter, Zuko’s was composed on the finest stationery and stamped shut with the golden seal of the Firelord. She picked it open and looked it over. The characters were written in fluid, elegant brush strokes. Much more elegant than Aang’s. But, of course, Aang was raised as a simple monk and Zuko was raised as Fire Nation royalty. She cleared her throat and read aloud for them.

          “Dearest Friends of the Southern Water Tribe, I hope this letter finds you in good health. Thank you for responding to my last letter so quickly. I apologize for writing to you with official business, but I must. Surely you know the decolonization and demilitarization processes are proving difficult, but as we move farther into winter it is becoming clear that they are nearly impossible for my people to withstand.

          The Fire Nation never planned to give up the colonies, or to lose the war, so there was no backup plan in place. The Fire Nation always expected to receive food and grain from the Earth Kingdom. So now there is simply not enough food for my people, and I’m at an impasse. We’ve negotiated with the Earth Kingdom as much as we can, but they are not exactly inclined to offer my country any additional kindness right now, as I’m sure you understand. The Northern Water Tribe is also reluctant to work with us, of course. And we don’t have enough food stores to last through the winter. 

          Very humbly, and with great…” Katara stopped for a moment, scowling, “ah, I don’t know that character, sorry— I ask your tribe for help. There would be no greater kindness for my people at this moment in time than to offer to trade with us. I’m certainly not an expert on fishing or trapping, as I’m sure you remember, but I know your people are experts, and with all the men returned to your village, perhaps capable to help us in this endeavor. 

          I’m willing to offer all manner of ships and other goods to trade for whatever food you may have or be able to acquire. There’s an airship here with Sokka’s name on it, if he wants it. 

          On a separate sheet you will find a list of all of the goods and properties I can trade. We obviously have an excess of warships, weapons, catapults, and other war materials. There are several battleships and airships I would be willing to trade if that is something your people are interested in. If you have no interest in ships, there are many other things available. I’m willing to barter with just about anything we have: steel, lumber, metal, gems, ceramics, fabrics, fine silks, leather goods, clothing, I don’t know that character, washi paper, home goods, fine art, furniture, and more.

          My people are on the verge of starvation. In some places, they have already reached a state of desperation. I’m dealing with price gouging and political upheaval across the countryside. Farms have been raided. Controlling the— ugh, what do these characters mean? Dad, can you help?”

          She showed him the letter and pointed to the characters she was struggling to understand. Hakoda was very well read himself and was able to translate it.

          “It’s, er, organized crime syndicates. In the Fire Nation they call them the yakuza. They’re very dangerous gangs that operate outside of government control. When the first Fire Lord took control of the country a long time ago, some of the warlords and other kings in the Fire Nation went underground, so to speak, and created gangs to secretly hold power.”

          “Thanks. Okay, so— controlling the yakuza grows more difficult by the day, and they’re practically in control of some of my cities because they have most of the food in some places at the moment. They saw an opportunity and took it, and they think the government here is too busy worrying about decolonization and demilitarization to care about what they’re doing. But I do care. The Fire Nation is overflowing with priceless artifacts and material goods but sorely lacking anything edible. My people are exchanging family kimonos for a bag of rice. 

          Mai informs me that she would be honored to help with this trade, seeing as I am too tied to my duties here to be able to leave the Capitol for any extended period of time. Should you accept, she can bring everything to the Southern Water Tribe by airship and assist you with the trade. If you would like to trade here instead, that can be arranged as well. I could send a ship or airship to the Southern Water Tribe to carry your goods and you could take the goods you want back with you and keep the ship as a thank you.

          I understand that the labor involved in this trade, if accepted, will be significant, and so I am willing to send as many of my people as you need to help. So many of my citizens are unemployed now because of the reduction in the size of our military and the,” Katara sighed, “Dad, can you read the rest, please? I don’t know all of these characters.”

          “Of course. Don’t worry about it, Katara. He has more education than you do. ‘So many of my citizens are unemployed now because of the reduction in the size of our military and the cessation of operations in our factories and shipyards. There is a surplus of unemployed workers and manpower in general. Of course, you are busy rebuilding your city, which I fully understand. I would be more than willing to send qualified workers and builders to your tribe, should you desire them to come. If you need assistance with construction, craftsmanship, shipbuilding, architectural planning, or anything along those lines, let me know, and I can send qualified people to your tribe to assist you with whatever you want. 

          Please inform me of your decision at your soonest convenience by way of messenger hawk. And thank you.

          Especially relaying for your information,

          His Royal Majesty, Fire Lord Zuko, Imperial Sovereign.”

          “Well he sure knows how to write a letter,” Sokka laughed, “I didn’t even know what some of those words meant. I’m surprised you can even read them.”

          “I’m a lot older than you, Sokka," Hakoda responded.

          “Here, Dad, look,” she offered, handing him the sheet with a list of goods for trade.

          He looked it over in front of the fire, squinting a bit.

          “This is... interesting,” Hakoda mumbled, “He must be pretty desperate to be willing to trade these valuables for fish. I think this character here means precious gemstones."

          He pointed for Katara to see.

          “Yeah. Well, his people are starving. And people’s lives are worth more than diamonds and some fancy furniture,” Katara added, “I mean, Zuko’s certainly had issues with moral decision making, but I’m sure he wouldn’t let anyone starve if he could help it. He’s not that low. I’m sure he cares about his people’s well being.”

          “Of course,” Hakoda hummed, stroking his short beard and mulling it over.

          Eventually he set down the letter and stared into the fire.

          “What are you thinking?” Katara asked, rolling up the letter and setting it on her bedside table. 

          “I... I’m willing to trade with him. There are plenty of fish in the sea.”

          Sokka laughed from the floor.

          “I know the earthbenders and our northern brothers don’t feel like trading with him after everything that happened, but— we have to move on. That was the whole point of ending the war. Firelord Zuko says he isn’t going to treat us the way his father and grandfather did, and we have to give him a chance. We have to give his countrymen a chance to change, too. Otherwise the war will stretch on even after it’s ended. But I don’t know how I feel about having a bunch of firebending soldiers coming back here. Or even civilians. There are just too many painful memories for our people. Seeing a bunch of armored Fire Nation soldiers march off one of their huge ships and walk through our village is not something I want right now. And I don’t think the rest of the tribes or the elders would want that, either. Not yet, anyway. Not so soon after the end of the war. There’s too much— tension, still. You know that.” 

          Katara nodded solemnly.

          During the winter festival there were definitely some not-so-polite conversations about the people of the Fire Nation and lots of rejoicing over their loss of the war and subsequent humiliation. Sokka re-told the story of Aang winning the fight on the day of Sozin’s Comet and taking away Fire Lord Ozai’s bending about a hundred times, and he never left out the part where he put the handcuffs on Ozai and hauled him onto the airship himself. Katara almost wondered if he was lying about some of the things he said. She had never seen the fight herself. 

          “I agree,” Sokka chimed in, “We’re finally back together. As a tribe. We shouldn’t have a bunch of firebenders come here yet. It’s too early for that. They might be… a little fired up, ya know?” he raised his eyebrows when he said that, and Hakoda chuckled, “I dunno. They’re firebenders. They’re hungry. They want fish, and we have the fish, but they don’t know how to fish down here. That would mean that they would have to listen to us, and I’m not super sure these guys want to listen to us. They think we’re savages. Zuko told me he was taught in school that our people don’t even know how to read or write. And we grunt like cavemen or something. Having a bunch of them come down here now might be asking for trouble. I’m a little worried a fight would break out.”

          “Yeah… Regardless, I’ll trade with him, that’s for sure. Now that all the men are back, and our friends from the Northern Tribe are here, we have plenty of fishermen and hunters.”

          “True.”

          “Come on, let’s go into the main hut and let everyone know what’s going on. I need to know how the tribe feels about this.” Hakoda started slipping his parka over his head.

          “We have to help him,” Katara insisted emphatically, “I mean, we have to find a way to bring them some sort of food. People are starving.”

          Hakoda pulled the hood up over his head, nodding slowly.

          “Firebenders.”

          It was a simple answer, and a correct one, but it was heavily loaded with meaning. They were just starting to put their tribe back together after near obliteration at the hands of the Fire Nation. Sokka sighed. He finally got up and reached for his own parka.

          “They’re still people, dad. We’ve been in the Fire Nation. There are lots of good people there. Civilians. Women and children. Nonbenders. Goofy dads like you.”

          “Of course.” He blinked, face solemn.

          Deep down, Hakoda was not a cruel or bitter man. He was loving and kind inside. Katara knew that.

          She touched his broad shoulder.

          “I know you’re used to dealing with Fire Nation soldiers and prison wardens, but, there are lots of good firebenders. It was hard for me to believe that at first. Really hard. Trust me.”

          Their blue eyes met and Hakoda smiled softly.

          “But there are.”

          “Yes, I know that, Katara. Don’t think I would ever forget that Zuko sacrificed his life to save yours. It shows what kind of man he really is deep down. What kind of man he’s going to be, if he keeps on this path. And someone who would do something so compassionate, and for a foreign girl at that, is a man worth standing beside. I’ll help him and his people. I don’t want anyone to starve. We can help them.”

          She smiled, her eyes full of emotion, remembering Zuko’s bravery and sacrifice. Holding him in her arms, cradling his head. Healing his wounds in the royal palace and watching the scar in his stomach slowly fade away, forgotten. It was one of her most tender memories.

          “What kinds of things are we going to ask for in return, dad? This is a long list.” Sokka had picked it up and began reading it through.

          Katara put on her own parka and tucked in her hair loops.

          “Hmm. Well, steel and lumber are some things we could definitely use. We’ll need them to construct some larger, sturdier buildings. Rope, fishing nets, and barrels would be useful. The other things, well, I don’t care much about them. What do you think, son?” 

          “I would love to have a ship. That way I could get around the world even when I’m not with Aang. Or an airship, but they’re kind of dangerous. And I don’t know how to fly one.”

          “You don’t know how to drive a Fire Nation warship, either, Sokka, but if you want to ask him for a ship, go ahead. He’ll probably send a crew and a captain along with it. But I’m going to specify that it’s your request and not mine.”

          “Well, from his letter, it sounds like he wants to give Sokka a ship.”

          “Yes! I’m so excited. Ooh, and silks! We should get silks, dad. They have the best silk pajamas there. We wore them when we stayed at the palace after the war ended. And, oh—! ” He jumped, literally, buzzing with excitement. “Did you know they have silk purses in the Fire Nation?”

          Hakoda laughed heartily at his son’s strange antics.

          “Sokka does love his purses,” Katara chuckled.

          “Sure, I suppose you can ask for some silks, Sokka, but you’re going to have to write that in your own letter. Separately.”

          “Yeah, sure. I can catch some penguin-seals for him and make them into jerky. Then I can get some silks. Ooh, and sake! Yeah. Yeah, let’s get some of that.” He bounced on his heels and rubbed his hands together, like he was coming up with some great plan.

          Hakoda made a face at him.

          “Sokka,” Katara droned. “Come on.”

          “I’m serious. They have some really good alcohol over there. Like soju! Aahh, it’s so good. Let’s ask for some of that, too. And those little lychee candies.”

          Hakoda didn’t seem thrilled about the idea.

          “I don’t know, son. I’m not sure that I want our tribe to start drinking that stuff. Alcohol can be very dangerous. It’s like opium. Maybe it’s best that we don’t have it here at all.”

          The people of the water tribes did not produce any alcohol themselves, considering they had nothing to make it out of anyway, and they usually did not purchase it or drink it at all. But Sokka had grown fond of rice wine and sake during his travels and he missed it.

          “Really, Dad?” He groaned, remembering the pleasurable warmth that had spread through his body after a couple glasses of soju or sake. 

          “No, he’s making a good point, Sokka. There’s no real benefit to importing alcohol and there are a lot of downsides,” Katara agreed, “He has to do what’s best for the tribe.”

          “People have accidents when they’re drunk, too. I’ve seen some men do things they’ve regretted horribly the next day. Drunk people fall off of boats because they lose their balance. Down here that’s a serious problem. Let’s not ask for any alcohol. I’m sure the elders will agree with me. We need to focus on things the tribe needs, like lumber and other construction materials. Maybe some furniture and paper for writing letters.”

          “Aw,” the teenager moaned, clearly disappointed, “Okay. I guess I’ll just wait until we go to visit Zuko next time.”

          “Sure.”

          “Hey, wait, why don’t we go back with Mai! When she comes to pick up the food, let’s go back with her,” he transitioned mid-sentence from goofy teenager to serious delegate, “and meet with the diplomats and the representatives. We can discuss our trade deals with the other nations. We need to get this place back on the map! Plus, I want to pick up Suki while we're there.”

          “We are expecting another reparation payment soon,” Katara added, “At the beginning of Spring. We could pick it up in person. And, I mean, of course, it would be great to see Zuko and Suki again.” 

          After the end of the war, when they were signing the peace treaties, one of the agreements made was that the Fire Nation would make reparations to the other nations. They had essentially stolen and demanded money from the people of the water tribes and the Earth Kingdom for a hundred years. The Earth Kingdom had asked for millions in reparations, while the water tribes asked for far less. They were much smaller, anyway. Of course, that was partly due to the genocides committed by the Fire Nation. 

          Many tears had been shed, but the Southern Tribe had decided, after giving proper tribute to their fallen, that they wanted to focus on moving forward and rebuilding. Katara’s father had given a very heartfelt, evocative speech on the first night of the festival. One of the things he had pushed for, which was barely veiled by a comedic euphemism, was that they all needed to work on having as many children as they could. That way they could rebuild their population to, if not exactly what it was before the war, at least enough to get by and create a prosperous nation. Everyone had laughed uncontrollably, but they knew he was right. It was time to repopulate.

          “For sure. I miss that grump. Well, he was in better spirits after the war ended…” Sokka made a face, “slightly.”

          “Yeah.” Katara remembered seeing a gentle smile grace his lips before they parted ways, after their final hug, something she was unaccustomed to, and definitely not used to enjoying, but for some reason it stuck with her. When he smiled his eyes seemed kinder and softer than they ever did before. She saw a glimpse of a human being standing before her, not an enemy. A friend, not a soldier. It was like that time in the catacombs of Ba Sing Se when she touched him for the first time.

          Katara supposed it was because the war had finally ended, and through peace even the hardest people could become softened. But she knew it wasn’t just the end of the war that brought it on. He had hugged her the night after they found Yon Rha. And she had relaxed against the warmth of his body when they were on Appa coming back, felt his hand stroke her hair, touching her softly. They never spoke of it. Those gentle touches between them were something she never would have imagined before, but after the war, would find herself missing regularly. 

          “And you could write to Aang and let him know we’re going to be in the Capital City soon. Hopefully he can meet us there!”

          Sokka’s comment brought her back to reality. Aang. Her boyfriend. She sighed into a smile. Her boyfriend. Sweet and kind and always eager to see her. 

          “Oh, yeah! Of course. I’ll let Aang know. He said he should be done with the decolonization movement soon. Gods, it’s been months. Let me— Well, I’ll go to the meeting, and after that I’ll let Aang know what the plan is.”

          “Sounds good.”

          Sokka grabbed his empty cup and took it with him, opening the animal skin door and climbing out the entry tunnel. Hakoda looked back at her before he stepped out of the igloo. She looked at him with interest, because she had seen that look in his eyes that meant he was about to say something important and inspiring. 

          “Good things are coming, Katara. The future is bright, not just for our tribe, but for the whole world… The war is over,” he sighed, relaxation filling him, “Thank the gods. The Avatar is back. We’re going to be alright. All of us. Even your friends in the Fire Nation. Don’t worry too much. We survived the war. Everything else is child’s play.”

          “Yeah,” she exhaled, looking down, “you’re right.”

          “I can sense your nervousness. That’s why I’m telling you this. Your mother would get nervous, too. You get the same expression on your face.”

          “I know. I’m happy! I just— I worry about everything. About all these changes— the Northerners coming down here, and decolonization, and the Fire Nation. I know that sounds strange. But I do. I worry about Zuko. He has so much to deal with right now. And he’s trying to be a good person now, but he’s really up against it there— in the Capital, I mean. The people there are used to being selfish and racist and manipulative. It’s hard to change so much so quickly. He has a lot to deal with.”

          “Yes, he does,” Hakoda nodded, and he reached for Katara, resting his hands on her shoulders, “and if you want, you can leave to go and help him. Anytime.”

          “What?” Her blue eyes went wide.

          “If you want to leave, then you can go. I know I can’t expect to have you here with me forever. It’s your life, Katara. You’re a young woman now. Marrying-age. And I don’t want to keep you here if you want to go. I know you don’t want to get married yet, and Aang doesn’t know our customs anyway, so— go, if you want. Explore while you’re young. Help people.”

          “Where’s this coming from?”

          “I don’t know, I just feel your restlessness sometimes. You look at ships leaving the harbor with longing. I know you missed me so much when I was gone, and all you wanted was to have everyone together again and the war to be over. But it’s been six months. We’ve spent a lot of time together as a family. I know you’re eager to see Aang and Firelord Zuko. And Sokka misses his girlfriend and your friend Toph. They’re all in the Fire Nation and the Earth Kingdom. It’s very inconvenient for them to come here. So I understand if you want to go and stay with them for a while. It won’t break my heart, dear. Just make sure to visit me sometimes. For the holidays, at least.”

          “Dad,” she softened and hugged him tightly, “thank you. Really. You’re so good to me. And you’re right, I do miss my friends. I’d love to go see them. At least for a little while.”

          “Then go.”

Chapter Text

"Home is where one starts from. As we grow older / The world becomes stranger, the pattern more complicated / Of dead and living. Not the intense moment / Isolated, with no before and after, / But a lifetime burning in every moment / And not the lifetime of one man only / But of old stones that cannot be deciphered. / There is a time for the evening under starlight, / A time for the evening under lamplight (The evening with the photograph album). / Love is most nearly itself / When here and now cease to matter. / Old men ought to be explorers / Here or there does not matter / We must be still and still moving / Into another intensity / For a further union, a deeper communion / Through the dark cold and the empty desolation, / The wave cry, the wind cry, the vast waters / Of the petrel and the porpoise. In my end is my beginning." 

—T. S. Eliot, "Four Quartets"

Southern Water Tribe, Great Hall

“So, what’s the plan?” Hakoda asked, leaning against one of the carved main beams of the Great Hall, newly reconstructed.

Katara kneeled on the floor, beginning to pack things in a leather bag. She reached for a water canteen, stuffing it inside at the bottom.

“We’re all going to the palace now. I thought it was just going to be us and Suki, but it’s actually going to be everyone. It’s like a reunion. Aang, Toph, Suki, and the other Kyoshi warriors are all coming... And Zuko, of course.”

“It feels like so long since we’ve all been together. It’s like we’re gettin’ the family back together again! Well, our other family,” Sokka added after a side-eye from his grandmother, who was stirring soup by the fire. “Our weird little friend-family of misfits and runaways.”

“It’s gonna be great. I’m so excited to see everyone again!”

Her eyes sparked with excitement. It was the beginning of another adventure, and a happier one this time.

“I bet you are,” Hakoda muttered, looking away from his children and turning his face towards the crackling fire in the center of the hall.

His expression was very different from hers. Katara noticed the way his eyes glazed over, his mind clearly somewhere else. She went to stand by him, gently touching his arm.

“We’re not going to be gone for long, Dad. We promise. We’ll miss you too much.”

Hakoda locked eyes with her, smiling warmly. "Good."

"I promise we’ll come back home soon. I can’t miss the hunts!” Sokka’s enthusiasm was evident. “Real hunts. Not just me showing a bunch of four-year-old boys how to catch a penguin-seal.”

Katara nearly rolled her eyes. "You just went hunting."

“I’ll understand if you can’t come home too soon, but—” Hakoda paused, exhaling, “remember to write. I’ll miss you every day you’re gone.”

“We will. Well, I will—” Katara emphasized, making a face at her older brother. "Can’t promise that he will.”

“Of course I’ll write," Sokka groaned. "I'll miss you all like crazy, you know that."

“You’re leaving tomorrow?” Kanna asked softly.

She sat down next to her grandson, leaving the soup to boil in the pot for a while.

“If everything goes well with the trade, then yes," Katara said with a smile, feeling newly invigorated. She closed up the bag, pulling the leather string taut. “I’m sure it will, though. I’m not worried about it.”

“We caught a lot of fish. And caribou-bear. More than I’ve ever seen in my life. And a lot of other meat. They’ll be happy with it.”

“I hope so,” Hakoda chimed in, joining them by the fire. “I don’t think we can hunt anymore without upsetting the balance of nature.”

“Dad, are you sure you don’t need me to come back right away, so I can help out with re-building and everything?”

Hakoda shook his head. There were enough able bodied men and women to build in his absence. 

“No, you don’t need to do that. Go and have fun with your friends, both of you.” 

And as much as Katara wanted to do just that, she could see the pain of separation evident in her father’s expression, which tugged at her heartstrings because she knew that feeling so well. 

“Maybe we should make a plan for when we’ll come back,” she offered, “That way Dad and gran-gran don't have to just wait forever for us to come back home, with no end in sight.”

“You mean not do what I did when I left?” Hakoda’ blue eyes reflected the firelight, his expression muddled.

It was clearly meant to be a jest, Katara knew that much, but deep down, she knew he was feeling regret for being gone for so long. 

“You were fighting a war! There was no end in sight,” Sokka responded lightheartedly. He was re-doing his ponytail, pulling it taut before tying it up. “But, yeah, we can try to set a date. How about before the end of spring?”

“That’s so far away, Sokka. What makes you think we’ll be there for that long?”

He shrugged. “I don’t know, I’m just thinking that things usually don’t run super smoothly for our little group. How long did it take us to get to the Northern Water Tribe? And Ba Sing Se? We ran into like a hundred obstacles. How many little towns did we stop to help along the way? You really think there’s not a chance that we’re gonna need to help out with decolonization or something? I think I might need to help Suki with the housing thing if they’re not done yet. Sounds like they're not done yet.”

“Well, I—”

“It’s fine, Katara," Hakoda interrupted, as she was clearly struggling. "If you can come back earlier, great. If not, then Sokka’s plan works. Come back before the end of the spring thaw.”

“There’s no spring thaw in the Fire Nation, Dad. At least, not in the Capital. I think you mean ‘before the summer swelters,’ but sure. We’ll just use a calendar.”

“Okay.”

“But probably before that.” 

“Hakoda,” Kanna said simply, handing him some water to drink. 

“Thanks. And Sokka, there’s something else I want to talk to you about.”

“What?”

“By the time you come back, I think you need to have... made up your mind about Suki.”

Sokka raised an eyebrow at that. “What do you mean?”

“You need to decide whether you’re marrying her or not,” he stated, like it was obvious. “You need to decide if you’re serious about her. If you are, you should bring her back here and get married. Properly. If not, let her go.”

“Gods, Dad, you want to ease off the pressure a little?” Katara tried to stick up for her brother.

“I’m already breaking our traditions by letting you marry an Earth Kingdom girl. And that doesn’t really bother me at all. She’ll become one of us when you get married. If you get married. But I want you to decide by the time you come back here in the spring. Either marry her or— let her go. Stop dating her. You don’t have to live here with her if you don’t want to, but you have to get married here. Under our customs.”

“Why are you putting so much pressure on him? He’s only seventeen. Shouldn’t he—”

“It’s alright, Katara. It’s fine. They’re our customs.” Sokka turned to face his father. “I promise, Dad. I’ll—” He paused, clearing his throat, “if we’re still going together by the time I come back, then I’ll propose to her before I leave.”

“Good,” he exhaled in relief at that, smiling. “Good. It’ll make me so happy to see you get married, son.”

Sokka stared at him for a moment longer. “It really doesn’t bother you that she’s not water-tribe?”

“No. Not at all,” he shook his head. “She’s a beautiful girl, and she seems very kind and talented. She’s a good match… you better lock her in before some other guy proposes to her.”

“I want to meet this girl,” Kanna muttered comically, returning to the pot on the fire.

“Hah! ” Sokka laughed.

"At least bring me a drawing of her if you don't bring her back here," she requested. "The way Hakoda and Katara talk about her, you'd think she was the prettiest girl in the whole Earth Kingdom."

"Well, she might just be," Sokka sort of swooned, thinking about her face.

He didn't have a picture of her. They hadn't had time to get one before they left, and it hadn't occurred to him then.

“She might’ve gotten offers while you’ve been gone, for all you know.”

“Dad. Come on. You’re scaring him,” Katara got after him lightly. 

“I’m not scared! Not a bit. Suki loves me. She’s waiting for me.”

Hakoda sighed. “Of course, she is. I didn’t mean anything bad, Sokka. It just came to my mind.”

“I know."

“Dinner’s ready! ” Kanna called out abruptly, so the men on the other side of the large room would hear her. 

“We’re coming,” Bato answered, and he, Pakku, and other men of the tribe came to sit around the fire. Kanna began scooping up bowls of walrus-whale soup from the large pot on the fire. 

“Katara, help me, dear.” Kanna handed her a bowl of soup and she gave it to Sokka.

“They’re going to the Fire Nation, Pakku,” the old woman muttered, to which her husband made a confused expression.

“Whatever are they going to do that for?”

Hakoda answered. “Katara is going to meet The Avatar there—” 

“Her boyfriend,” Sokka teased.

She rolled her eyes, trying not to blush as men of the tribe looked at her, wondering how their own dear Katara was dating The Avatar of all people.

“Yes, her boyfriend,” Hakoda continued, "and Sokka’s going to meet up with his girlfriend and his other friends. They'll touch base with Firelord Zuko.”

“We’ll make sure everything goes smoothly with the food delivery and we’ll pick up the reparations while we’re there.”

“You’re trusting teenagers to deal with the money? ” Pakku criticized, scowling at Hakoda. 

“They traveled all around the world and helped the Avatar win the war, Pakku. I think they can handle it. But that coin purse better still be heavy when you get back here!” He jested, pointing at his kids.

“Oh, I’ll keep Sokka away from it. He’s the spender, not me.”

“Hey, I’m good with money!”

“No, you’re not. You’re always shopping. You see a new belt and you’re like, ah— I’ve got to have that, right now!” 

“Be nice to your brother, Katara.” 

“I’m just teasing him, gran-gran.” She passed out another bowl of soup.

“You’re too mean.”

“Gran-gran! I’m kidding.”

“Mmm,” Kanna hummed. “I don’t think so.”

“It’s fine, she’s right. I do need to calm it down with the shopping— and if you’re referring to the Earth Rumble Six belt, that was a gift."

“Oh, right, I guess I forgot," she played along, making her dad laugh on the other side of the fire.

“I wish I still had that bag,” Sokka muttered, blowing on his too-hot soup.

“Are you going to be staying with Firelord Zuko while you’re there?” Pakku asked, turning to his left to look at Sokka. 

“Yeah, that’s the idea.”

“He invited us," Katara responded. "There are lots of rooms in the palace. More than enough for all of us.”

“Still, I can’t imagine staying there. At the heart of the Fire Nation,” Pakku murmured under his breath, taking a sip of soup. “I don’t think I could sleep.”

“Actually, the beds are surprisingly comfortable, believe it or not,” Sokka protested, and only Hakoda chuckled while the rest of the group simply looked at him. His smile fell. “That was supposed to be a joke. Yeah, I know what you guys are talking about. It’s a little weird, but it’s not bad. I—” he shrugged, “I try not to think about it.”

“Imagine the things that have gone on in that place,” Pakku went on, his voice barely loud enough to hear.

Kanna shook her head disapprovingly at the thought of it. "I don't even want to know."

“Well, I guess I try to think about it differently,” Katara added. “I think about it like— it’s the beginning of a different Fire Nation. One where people of all kinds can stay at the palace."

“You sound more and more like a diplomat every day, Katara.”

Katara shook her head in the negative. "I'm just optimistic."

She smiled, though, taking it to heart.

Fire Nation, Royal Palace

Zuko had never had an office before.

It was a trivial notion, really. No one needs an office. By the age of sixteen, Zuko had already done more in many ways than an entrenched bureaucrat would do in a lifetime. But to Zuko himself, it meant something. Stepping into that office felt much like taking his seat on the throne. He could sense his own power. And it was still new and uncomfortable, although the discomfort was fading with time. 

Some of the first few mornings he spent as Firelord were so daunting he almost didn’t want to enter the office. It still seemed like his father’s. A place he was rarely ever allowed to enter. Really, it was just a simple room. Four dark walls and a desk in the center, facing the door. A leather desk chair, two bookshelves in the back corners, and a window between them. Nothing shocking or intimidating, by any sense. But, to Zuko, it felt strange to be in such a place. To be in such an important room and have it be his own. 

He remembered entering the office for the first time after the war. After his father had been dragged to prison and the whole city was reeling from the news, unable to believe that Ozai, of all people, had lost. Unable to believe the kid-Avatar and a sixteen-year old Firelord were in charge.

When he had entered the room, he held his breath. A feeling of nervousness had filled his body, as well as some self-doubt, because it was not a space he felt confident in, by any means. He had stepped inside only a handful of times before. A few times as a child, and once as a teenager. Each time he had felt intimidated by the presence of his father, so immaculately put together, sitting at his desk, writing with elegant strokes. Never faltering. Never indecisive. It was always immaculate, like the rest of his father’s spaces. 

The desk was black lacquer, mother of pearl, and trimmed with gold. A desk for a Firelord. As he had picked up papers on his desk and rummaged through his father’s drawers, he had almost felt like he was going to get into trouble for it. Even after the war, it felt like Ozai was always lurking in the palace.

It was a ridiculous feeling; Zuko knew where his father was, and it wasn't the palace, but that didn’t stop the feelings that crept up sometimes when he was alone. For so many years, fear of his father had driven him and pushed him down at the same time. He had felt that in the palace he was always near, always watching, always knowledgeable. An omnipresent figure lurking over his shoulder at all times. Even something as mundane as snooping through his dad’s drawers would cause him anxiety when he was younger. 

Coming back to reality, Zuko took in a breath and stepped towards his desk, reminding himself that this one truly was his. He had ordered another for himself, a less gaudy one, without the gold. It was composed of simple dark wood, some kind that Zuko didn’t remember, with an undecorated flat surface and two drawers. It suited him better, he thought. He sat down at his desk chair and lit the lamp.

A myriad of documents laid on the table’s shiny, dark surface. The latest draft of a new tax policy, plans for the new education system, Justice Department memos, letters from the Fire Sages, and updates on the relocation process for the colonials all awaited his response or comments. He picked up the latest update on decolonization, but before he could read more than a few characters, there was a knock on the door.

“Come in.”

Zuko was slightly surprised to see his Chief Administrator standing in his doorway at such a late hour. Kai was a young man compared to the elected representatives Zuko often had to deal with in court, and he liked that about him. It was nice to interact with someone younger and less cynical. Hiring him had been a great choice, and it was a relief to know he had at least done that right in his first year as Firelord. Kai was a kind, clever person, the type that Zuko always looked up to, like his mother, or his uncle, but Kai was much more reserved. He kept everything neat, polished, and refined. His jet-black hair was always pulled into a perfect topknot, not one hair out of place. Zuko looked down and saw his work bag in hand, noticing that he was clearly on his way out.

“Sire, is there anything else you need from me?”

Kai took a step inside and came into the lamplight, his smooth face coming into full view. At work, he always kept his face expressionless or perfectly polite. Zuko could never dream of having such an excellent tatemae. He looked down at the papers on his desk briefly.

“Ah, no. No, you can go, Kai. Have a good evening.” 

“Thank you, sire. I’ll be in early tomorrow if you need me.”

“Okay. Thanks for sticking up for me in the meeting earlier, by the way.”

They locked eyes and Kai smiled, for once, ever so slightly, breaking the facade. It was clearly a real smile, not just a work smile.

“You’re welcome. You were right. They’re just being stubborn. They’ll come around eventually.”

Zuko nodded, thinking back on the meeting.

“Goodnight, Kai.”

“Goodnight, sire.”

Once Kai had gone home (to his wife and three adorable children), Zuko truly felt alone.

The palace was oddly quiet. 

He walked the halls slowly, dreading returning to his rooms during Mai’s absence. It made the whole after-work routine feel disappointing, and after a few minutes, the loneliness would begin to seep in. It was a stark difference from the loud, busy routine of his daytime, with endless meetings and one-on-ones. In the evening, without Mai, there was only stillness and silence. And his own thoughts, which, in a way, he dreaded more than anything.

He entered his rooms slowly, tired and reserving his remaining energy. The lamps were already lit for him, and a bath drawn as he liked it. The servants were familiar with his routine and knew he didn’t like to have any of them in his private chambers in the evening. An odd thing, for a Firelord, but Zuko wasn’t the most typical ruler. He pulled off his outer robe and walked into his closet.

In the mirror, he removed the royal headpiece from his topknot and let his hair fall down. Once the rest of his clothes were off he went to his bathroom, the sleek tiles cool under his bare feet, and he stepped into the sunken bathtub. It was still warm but Zuko heated it a bit more with his firebending. After scrubbing clean and washing his hair he simply rested in the tub for a while, letting his head tilt back and rest on the tile. He looked up at the high ceiling, watching light from the lanterns cast interesting patterns in the darkness. 

A small sound broke him out of his reverie, and he shot up in the bath, disturbing the water. He listened, trying to make out any strange sounds, but nothing else came. Probably just a servant. In his first month as Firelord, two assassination attempts were made on his life, but both failed before they could come near him, and after a while, the threats on his life died down. That didn’t stop Zuko from feeling paranoid on a regular basis, however, alert to every unnatural sound and movement. He sighed and dipped down, dunking his hair in the hot water. Relax. He tried taking some deep breaths, meditating the way Uncle had shown him. It worked for the first minute, and then the thoughts came back, like they always did. 

It began the same way, for some reason. With stupid things he did and said. The humiliation of defeat. The guilt of past misdeeds. Rotten memories playing on an internal loop. The words he said - words he regretted, playing through his mind like actors rehearsing for a play of his life. Then the thought of the play at Ember Island came to mind, and that only made it all the worse.

You sicken me. 

I hate you, Uncle. You smell, and I hate you for all time! 

The ridiculous lines didn’t help lessen the sting in Zuko’s chest when he recounted that memory. Another one began, a real one, of him insulting his uncle at the Western Air Temple, and then at Ba Sing Se, and on his ship, and in the colonies. Again, and again, and again. He stood up and walked out of the bath, dripping all over the floor as he went to grab a towel. 

What else would I expect from the laziest man in the Fire Nation? 

Good things that are happening for you. Have you ever thought that I want more from life than a nice apartment and a job serving tea?

You barely even bend anymore. When’s the last time you were in a real fight? Years ago?

I think you’re exactly what you seem: a lazy, mistrustful, shallow old man who’s always been jealous of his brother! 

“Urgh! ” He grunted into the towel as he dried his face, trying to shake the memory off. It was always difficult, but when he was at home alone it was worse than usual. I’m such an asshole. I'm such— an asshole... Even in the darkness of his room his expression was dismal, though there was no one there to see. He cursed himself and cursed the past. He recalled seeing his Uncle’s face falling, sadness sweeping across his kind features. Stop thinking about it! Stop. That was a long time ago. Moving back to his closet, he put on his pajamas, trying to keep the memories at bay.

Zuko had always felt that controlling himself was harder than anything else. 

For a moment, he felt like he was going to cry, tears pricking in his eyes, but he stopped himself, and headed towards the balcony to get some fresh air. He slid the glass door to the side and stepped out onto the balcony, barefoot, glass of wine in hand. The fresh air felt good in his lungs, and he tried to focus on the city in front of him. From the top floor of the palace, the city looked wide and dense. Tall buildings in nearly every direction matched the palace in height, but they were at a distance.

He felt remote, and far away from it all. From his balcony the red-tiled roofs and windows all looked miniscule. Only a few houses and apartments had rooms still lit. Most of the city was covered in darkness, the only light coming from curved street lamps and the stars above. The city was mostly silent, gentle wind in the trees and around the buildings being the only sounds Zuko could hear. Everyone had gone to sleep except the guards, but they never made noise. 

He finished his glass of wine and went back inside, running a hand through his damp hair and turning to look at the bed. The wide expanse of silk sheets and plush pillows looked barren without Mai, but he got in anyway, and curled up around the pillow she used to make himself feel a little better. In an effort to fall asleep, he tried to recount their best memories together, and then older ones, ones of a mother with unconditional affection, who was always there, until she wasn’t. 

Southern Water Tribe

“There’s a ship! There’s a ship in the water!” Miko shouted.

Katara had been watching the young girl while her mother was busy, something she commonly did for women of the tribe. After reaching down to pick up the child she looked out towards the sea with the girl on her hip, and they caught a glimpse of the large ocean liner, a long, graceful steamship with many windows and a tall funnel. 

“I see it. It’s okay. That’s Zuko’s ship.”

“The ship’s here! ” A man called out in the distance, getting the attention of people in the tribe who were farther away.

Women and their husbands came out of igloos and tents to watch the ship come into view. It produced some steam and honked its horn.

“Why is it coming here?” Miko asked, and Katara lifted her higher, struggling to hold her weight.

“It’s coming to trade with us. We’re giving the Fire Nation food and in exchange they’re giving us some things we need: barrels and lumber and ropes. That kind of thing.”

“Why do they need food?” She asked.

Katara noticed her hood had fallen down, so she pulled it back up.

“They just don’t have enough right now. It’s complicated.”

Miko turned her eyes back on the giant ship.

“Who’s coming?”

“Mai, and some other people from the Fire Nation.”

“Who’s Mai?”

“Firelord Zuko’s girlfriend.”

Katara waited with Miko near the Great Hall until Hakoda, Sokka, and Bato came out.

“They’re not going to be able to get that thing in much closer.”

“The captain’s docking it out there.”

Hakoda turned to Bato. “I don’t want everyone in the village going out to greet them.”

“Tell them, then.”

So, Hakoda reached down and grabbed the blowing horn to gather the attention of the villagers, who came walking over until a large, unorganized group was formed in the center of town. Miko’s mother took her from Katara’s arms.

“I know all the little ones are excited about the ship coming, but I don’t want everyone going out there. It’ll be too much. We need room to get the equipment off the ship, anyway, and we can’t have kids getting hurt, so they all need to stay inside the wall.” Some sounds of disappointment erupted from children within the group, but Hakoda just smirked good-heartedly.

“I know you want to see what’s going on, but it’s not safe to be out there. You can take turns going to the top of Sokka’s watchtower, and look from there. As for the men, I’d like you to split up. One group is gonna come with me and unload. The other group is going to bring things on, when they’re ready for them. Let’s get this done as quickly as possible so they can be on their way.”

Men of the tribe nodded in agreement, and a few added, “Yes, Chief.” 

Katara nudged her father gently. “Don’t you think the women should help out if they want to? I’m going to.”

Pakku laughed at that a little.

“Yes, of course. If any women want to join, come along. Just leave the kids behind the walls.”

A group of twenty or so men and fewer women made their way out the front gate and towards the ship. When they arrived, Mai was walking down the ramp with a well-dressed man and two guards following closely behind. None of them were clearly holding any weapons, Katara noticed. 

“Hi, Mai. It’s good to see you again.”

“Hi, Katara,” Mai greeted, not too enthusiastically, her narrow eyes overlooking the village.

Her black fur-lined cape was secured at the top of her chest with a silver clasp, and she quickly pulled the hood up. It blew rather violently in the wind coming off the Southern Sea. She looked over the tribespeople in front of her and stepped down onto the icy ground to properly greet them.

“Hello, Sokka. Chief Hakoda. Nice to see you again.”

She bowed her head, which Katara found odd. But she supposed, considering Fire Nation norms, she actually should have bowed more for a head of state.

“Good to see you, Mai!” Sokka said warmly, and just went right up and hugged her, which clearly shocked Mai a bit. She almost stumbled back from the sudden physical contact. 

“Nice to see you too, Sokka.”

She patted him awkwardly before he let her go and turned to her left, where a middle aged man stood bearing a beautifully wrapped gift.

“This is Chuan Li. He’s the Assistant Director of International Trade.”

“It’s a pleasure to meet you all.” He bowed as well, and walked towards Sokka and Hakoda. “Chief Hakoda, this is a gift for you and your tribe from the Fire Nation. A small token of our appreciation. We’re honored to have you and your tribe as trading partners, going forward.”

He took the present. “Likewise. Thank you for the gift. How was your trip?” 

"Very pleasant."

“It was fine." Mai reached a hand up to keep her hood in place. “A little boring, but no rough weather or anything. We got lucky.”

“Why didn’t you take an airship?” Katara asked, curious.

“That's actually really expensive. It wasn’t necessary.”

“Oh, okay.”

“Well, welcome to the village. We’ll show you around a little.” 

Sokka gestured for them to follow, and took it upon himself to begin the tour. 

“So, this is the wall. We had to build it up again after Zuko smashed into it with his ship, but it was actually a good opportunity to build a better wall— a bigger one, so we did. That way we can make the village bigger. Hopefully, in not too many years it’ll be looking like the capital did a hundred years ago, with huge igloos all over the place. And a market. That’s the watchtower I built.” He pointed and smiled proudly as they entered the village. “And that’s the smokehouse. Those are all people’s houses on the left there. We're building more everyday. And this is the Great Hall! Isn’t it cool?”

“Yeah, it looks great.”

“We used to have an even bigger one, but it got destroyed in the raids a long time ago. This one’s brand new. Come on in, we’ll show you.”

“One second, Sokka. Are these all the men you brought with you?” Hakoda asked Mai, eyeing Chuan and the two Fire Nation guards, clad in black and red armor. 

“Yeah. There are sailors, of course, and a captain, but they’re on the ship. That’s okay, right? Zuko told me you didn’t need a lot of help.”

“It’s okay. It’s good. Can they— stay here and unload?” He asked calmly.

Mai locked eyes with him for a moment, putting two and two together. Hakoda didn’t want them inside.

“Yeah, that’s fine.” She turned back to the guards and Chuan. “Unload the cargo, please. I won’t be gone for long.”

“Where would you like us to unload everything, Chief Hakoda?”

“I’ll go with them,” Bato offered, and Hakoda nodded. “Come with me. Right this way.”

He motioned for them to follow. They trailed behind, walking towards the storehouse, and Mai noticed a mother pulling her child in close at the sight of the guards in armor walking through their town. 

“Let’s go inside,” Hakoda said to Mai and his children, and they walked into the Great Hall, a large common building with two weather-proof wooden doors bearing a carving of a crescent moon.

Mai took off her fur-lined cape when she got inside as the interior was remarkably warm. 

“You can hang your cape here,” Katara showed her where they hung their furs on the hooks by the door.

They all took off their parkas and moved towards the fire-pit, a large structure built up in the center of the hall. Mai looked around for a moment, taking a look at the alcoves around the room. There were three on each side, and each one was different. She saw a sitting area and a ceremonial display, as well as an alcove with weapons and shields. In the center, smoke rose off the fire and exited through a small hole at the top of the hall. At the base, many pelts were arranged around the fire, as well as a table with bowls and cups. 

Kanna entered behind them and took off her parka. 

“Gran-gran, this is Mai,” Katara introduced once she approached them. Mai bowed her head a little. “She’s Firelord Zuko’s girlfriend.”

“Nice to meet you,” Kanna said with a small smile.

“Nice to meet you, too.”

“My name’s Kanna, in case you don’t feel like calling me gran-gran.” 

Mai chuckled a little at that, expressing emotion for the first time, her thin lips curving upwards.

“Sit, dear. Give her something, will you?”

Katara went to the large pot on the fire and scooped up a little for her. Mai felt a little awkward tucking her long legs under her to sit on old furs on the floor, but she did as she was told. 

“Here you go, Mai,” Katara said as she handed her a cup. “This’ll warm you up.”

“Is it tea?” She asked, because it certainly didn’t look or smell like any tea she was used to.

When an octopus tentacle popped up to the surface her eyes widened and Sokka laughed.

“It’s just warm broth. We don’t have tea down here. We don’t really have plants in winter. Except sea prunes.”

Mai looked up at her for a moment in shock, but let it go, understanding the realities of life in the icy tundra. “Thanks.” Katara noticed she didn’t drink it.

“So, how’s our old pal, Zuko? Doing better these days?” Sokka asked.

“He’s—” Mai stopped mid-sentence, looking away for a moment. “He’s okay, I guess. Considering everything. But he’s super busy. Extremely busy. And the famine isn’t helping anything.”

“I bet.”

“There were…” she stopped again, as if she was wondering whether to continue speaking about the subject, “some riots this winter.”

“Oh! That's awful. He didn’t tell us,” Katara interjected, concern evident on her pretty face.

“He’s probably trying to keep it quiet,” Sokka commented.

“That’s terrible. I’m sorry to hear that.” Hakoda sympathized, accepting a cup of broth from his daughter. “Riots about the food shortages?”

“That and other things. Some people really don’t want him in charge, you know? A vocal minority. They don’t want a Firelord who listens to The Avatar. They call him a traitor for siding with Aang instead of his father. He had to arrest people.”

“Sounds awful.”

“Doesn’t surprise me, really,” Sokka added, shrugging. “I mean, did we really expect that a country full of people that have been against The Avatar for like a hundred years would suddenly turn around and start loving him? After said Avatar crippled their military, took away all their colonies, put their old ruler in prison, and took away his bending to boot?” He took a sip of his broth. “I’m surprised there haven’t been more riots.”

“Sokka,” Hakoda scolded.

Katara went to sit by her grandmother, handing her a warm cup of broth as well.

“What? I’m just being realistic.”

“No, he’s right.” Mai agreed with him, nodding. “It’s been difficult getting everything changed over. The war was embedded into practically everything in the Fire Nation. Most of our economy was based on the war and the colonies. A lot of our jobs. Men who used to be in the military are out of a job, now, obviously, and some of them really don’t like their options, which are mainly farming and construction jobs. But we need farmers now, a lot more, because we took so much food from other nations during the war. Tons of Fire Nation citizens lived overseas. Even our schools focused on the war.”

“How so?” Hakoda scowled.

“Everything was kind of centered around it. The curriculum was adjusted to meet the needs of the war. So they could train soldiers and army medics and colonial supervisors… We just started working on new textbooks. The old ones were just—” she sighed, “so one-sided. So full of propaganda and lies. I had no idea how many lies there were.”

“Yeah. I guess you were raised on all that stuff, too.”

“Of course. We all were.” She looked down at the cup of broth and picked it up, but didn’t drink it. “I didn’t know any different. No one did when we were kids. Our textbooks growing up said the airbenders had a big military and there were battles between our army and theirs.”

“Hah! Pacifist military. That’d be interesting!” Sokka laughed, tilting his head back. “Imagine Aang running a giant army, doing drills with a bunch of soldiers. Yeah, right. Aang won’t even kill beetle-flies.”

“Yeah, it’s ridiculous. Anyway, Zuko has a lot on his plate.”

“Are the riots under control now?” Katara asked.

“Yes, for the time being. They’ll be better now that more food shipments are coming in. Speaking of, how much food did you manage to collect?”

“A whole lot.” Sokka answered comedically, emphatically.

Hakoda smirked. “As much as we could without harming the ecosystem here. We can’t collect anymore for a while without disrupting the balance of nature. I’m sure Bato will give your—” he faltered. “What was his title again?”

“Assistant Director of International Trade. Chaun Li.”

“Right, your Assistant Director of International Trade, boy, that’s a mouthful— will be given a list we wrote up, with all the amounts and everything.”

“Thank you.”

“Of course.”

“How long do you think the transfer is going to take?” 

“Could be a little while. I’m going to go and make sure everything runs smoothly. You kids can stay here and catch up,” Hakoda decided, getting up and walking away. "And keep an eye on my mother," he teased.

Kanna tsked at that.

A silence stretched between them, and Mai decided to break it. “How has everything been going here, with your efforts to rebuild the tribe?”

Sokka and Katara filled her in on the updates from their homeland and the Northern Water Tribe’s help with rebuilding, their conversation lasting the better part of an hour. Kanna began to fade after a while, slowly falling asleep against a carved beam. Katara had smiled widely when she saw her dose off, and she covered her grandmother in a blanket, letting her rest. In not too long, though, the transfer was over and Katara and Sokka got their bags and said their goodbyes to the tribe.

On the shore, Katara hugged her father tightly, letting him wrap his arms around her like a giant bear, and she tried to sear the moment into memory. 

For all she wanted to go, she wanted just as badly to stay. 

“Goodbye, everyone! ” She called out when they were on the ship, leaning over the railing to wave. “We’ll miss you!"

Friends and family all waved back, smiling. Her gran-gran was crying, Katara knew that much. 

“Goodbye! ”

“Bye, Katara! Bye, Sokka! ”

“Safe travels! ”

“Be safe, kids! ”

Mai watched the scene with interest, looking between the siblings and their tribe on the icy shore, the love between them so strong it was palpable. She wondered what it was like to live in such a place— one with cold air and warm people. 

Chapter Text

“We are made wise not by the recollection of our past, but by the responsibility for our future.”

― George B. Shaw

Hiryū Ocean Liner, International Waters

Katara couldn’t sleep.

It was odd. The ship wasn’t rocking violently, nor was the bed uncomfortable, but nevertheless, sleep eluded her. She had been tossing and turning for hours. Eventually, giving up, she pushed herself off the bed and put her slippers on, leaving her room and walking out towards the deck. 

As soon as the door opened she realized she wasn’t alone. 

“Can’t sleep?” Mai asked, voice as low and raspy as ever.

She came over to the Fire Nation woman, who was leaning casually against the railing of the deck, resting her elbows on it. Katara watched her put a cigarette to her lips and inhale deeply, long black fingernails glinting in the moonlight.

“Yeah. I don’t know why. It’s not like this ship is uncomfortable or there’s bad weather or anything. It’s just,” faltered, shrugging, “I dunno. I haven’t left home for six months.”

“I can never sleep when I’m away from home for the first few nights. A lot of people are like that.” Mai exhaled a trail of gray smoke. “Do you want one?”

Katara made a face. “No. Thanks, but I don’t really smoke.”

“Okay.”

They both looked out at the waves for a moment, watching them roll and crash back into the water, glistening with white where the moon hung in the sky. The gentle sounds should have lulled Katara into sleepiness, but she was wide awake.

“So, are you excited for this big reunion?” She asked, and instantly regretted it. Mai wasn’t one to feel excitement for anything, really. 

“I don’t know. It’ll be nice to see them all again. But I wish it was under better circumstances.”

“Are things really that bad in the Fire Nation?” She waved her hand to get the smell of cigarette smoke away from her face.

“They’re not great. Like I told you. The mood in court is really tense right now.”

“Right. Well,” Katara wrapped an arm around herself, the chilly air getting to her, “Aang will help fix things. He’s a fixer.” 

Mai pursed her lips. “This decolonization thing seems to be a real nightmare for him.”

“I think it would be for anybody. He’s the best person for the job, though.”

“Of course. I just meant— it’s not that easy.”

“No. It’s not.”

“Do you think—” Mai started to ask, and then she cut herself off.

“Yeah?” Katara rested herself against the railing as well, mirroring her.

“Do you think people respect Aang? As a leader?”

That made Katara’s eyes go wide in shock. She turned her head to look at Mai.

“He’s just— so young. Even though he’s The Avatar, even though he defeated Ozai, do you really think…” she paused and took another puff of her cigarette, “people will do what he says? After decolonization is over?”

Katara scowled. “They’re gonna have to. He’s The Avatar. He has the support of all the world’s leaders right now: King Kuei, Chief Arnook, King Bumi, my dad, Zuko… What’s making you think about that?”

She could only see half of Mai’s face, as the woman was turned out to sea, but she could tell something was bothering her. 

“Well, suffice to say, there’s not a lot of love for him in the Fire Nation at the moment, Katara. You know Zuko and I support him now, obviously, but there’s a lot of hatred for him back home. Some people think he neutered our nation. They think he ripped down everything we had going for us and ruined the country, basically.” 

That made Katara angry, her brows furrowing more. “If they really believe that, why isn’t there a full-scale revolt?”

“They’re scared of him. Ozai was always… untouchable. So was Azulon. And Sozin, or so people thought. They never lost fights. They never faltered. They never lost anything. To have a child take him down like that, and take the bending out of him, like literally suck it out of him with magic, it’s—” she looked Katara in the eyes. “They’re afraid of him. That’s why they’re not rebelling, in my opinion. They know they’d be put in prison, or worse.”

“Mrgh.” Katara tipped her head back in frustration. 

“And fear alone isn’t an excellent motivator, so, yeah, sometimes I worry.” She tapped her cigarette ash into the ocean.

“I get what you’re saying. I do too, if that’s any consolation. I sit at home and worry about what’s going on there.” She looked out to sea. “I worry about Zuko. He has so much to deal with right now.”

“What do you think about the whole decolonization thing in general?” Mai asked.

“I think it’s good. It’s necessary. Those aren’t their lands. They stole them. The Fire Nation, I mean. Your country stole them, so your country has to give them back. I know it’s hard, because some people have lived there for so long, and they grew up there, but if they really want to stay, they can ask King Kuei for citizenship.”

“He’s barely giving that out to anyone.”

“Really?”

“Yeah. Most people at home think it’s a joke. Basically everyone has to go to the Fire Nation, unless they’re a fucking earthbender or something. Unless they can prove most of their family is Earth Kingdom. It’s nearly impossible to get citizenship, and, of course, most of the colonials wouldn’t want Earth Kingdom citizenship, anyway.” Her meaning was implied, and Katara only nodded.

“Well…” she trailed off, looking up at the moon, “it’s tough, but fair. That’s all I have to say. The four nations are meant to be the way they were before the war. Separate. Aang has to do his job. Being The Avatar is all about keeping the four nations equal and at peace… We just need to make sure the colonials have some place to go.”

“It’s mostly tenement housing,” Mai muttered apathetically.

“What’s that?”

“Tiny apartments in these giant buildings. Like the ones poor people live in in Ba Sing Se.”

“Oh.” Katara remembered them. They worked, but they weren’t ideal. She remembered the noise and issues with hygiene.

“They’re not great. Suki and her team are working with our government contractors, building houses, but that takes time and money, and there’s almost none left in the budget. That’s why they’re coming back. Zuko doesn’t have any more money in his budget to pay for all the construction and the materials. He’s going to have to wait until after the taxes come in this spring to hire them again.”

Katara waved her hand, shaking it off. “We can work something out. I’m sure of it. Once we’re all there, we’ll think of something.”

“You’re such an optimist,” Mai noted, eyebrows drawn slightly up. She put out her cigarette on the railing. “I’m going to bed. See you in the morning, Katara.”

“Goodnight.”

Fire Nation, Capital City Prison

Zuko knocked politely on the door to his father’s prison cell. 

“Come in, Zuko,” Ozai sighed, moving to sit down near the bars. He only ever had one visitor.

Zuko walked in and lit the lantern on the wall. His father had been sitting in relative darkness, despite the early hour of the evening. The tiny window at the top of the prison cell did little to let the light in. It was a desolate place. 

He got the attention of a prison guard. “Excuse me. Can I have a chair?”

“Yes, Your Majesty.”

“Thank you.”

Zuko looked at his father through the bars while he waited, noting the way his face was starting to look gaunt, the space under his cheekbones abnormally sunken in. A chair was brought in and placed on the floor while smells of freshly cooked food began to fill the otherwise dank prison cell.

“Anything else, sire?”

“Only privacy.”

“Yes, sire.” The guard walked out and left them alone in the cell.

The door closed behind him with a thud. Zuko stepped forward and held out the dinner he had taken with him through the bars.

“I brought you tempura. And that kimchi fried rice you like. The spicy kind.”

Zuko waited a while for a response. 

“...Thank you.” Ozai’s voice sounded weak. Barely there.

Zuko hardly recognized it.

“Are you going to take it?” 

With a sigh, the older man reached out to grab the red lacquer bento box by the handle, noticing the elegant gold and white engravings, signature of the Royal Palace. He set it on the floor and opened the lid of the top compartment, taking out the chopsticks. The fragrant and delicious smells of fried sweet potato, lotus root, shrimp-crab, and broccoli sparked his appetite. After taking a couple bites, Ozai looked upward at his son, who he unnervingly found was looking more and more like him by the day.

“Anything you care to say, or are you going to watch me eat in silence?”

Zuko, who had been weighing whether it was better to leave or not, finally sat down in the chair. I’ve come this far.

“I need to ask you something. I want your advice.”

“There it is,” Ozai murmured knowingly, picking up a piece of shrimp-crab tempura and dipping it in the tentsuyu sauce. “What do you want to know?”

“How did you get the council to be on your side after you took over? How did you get them to support you?”

“They wanted to support me,” he answered with a dash of pride, a remnant of the tone he had effected before his downfall. “I ensured that I had many in court who would support me long after I took power. I spent years earning the trust and loyalty of my followers, so they would be ready to support me the moment I took the throne. I didn’t act impulsively and then expect everyone to obey me as soon as the coup was over. That would have been foolish,” he finished, with a gold glare in Zuko’s direction. His tone was soft and calm, but his words stung Zuko just the same.

He scowled. It’s too late for that. Zuko was used to the unhelpful ‘advice’ from his father. The few times he had gone to visit him in prison after the war, most of their conversations had been unhelpful, and often aggravating for Zuko. Nevertheless, he always returned. 

“But, how do you know if people in your court really support you, or they’re just putting on a show?”

“You don’t,” Ozai answered simply.

Zuko made a face. “What?”

“Well, you don’t, Zuko. I doubt you would have the skills to be able to spot someone who is false.”

“You think you’re so much better at it? You didn’t know Azula lied to you about killing The Avatar. And you didn’t know I was gonna go against you and join Aang. I completely surprised you. We both did, actually.”

Ozai made an exasperated expression. “If you really think I’m such a bad judge of character, then why ask my opinion on it? Really, Zuko? What sense does that make?”

“I’m just— Urgh,” he grunted in frustration. “I just want to know how you figured out who in the court supported you, and who didn’t, and how you handled it.”

Ozai ate in silence, ignoring him. 

“How’d you do it?” After watching his father elegantly pick up a piece of broccoli tempura and eat it without answering, Zuko’s anger boiled over. “Are you just going to sit there?! "

“Calm yourself,” Ozai warned, his voice low.

It was a voice that Zuko used to fear above all others. One that had made him cower and squirm, and obey his master's every command. He did as he was told. 

“You really want my advice on how to rule? I shouldn’t even give any more to you, considering all that you’ve done to me,” he mumbled under his breath, “but I don’t want you ruining and embarrassing this country any more than you already have, so, fine. I’ll give you my advice. Listen closely.”

Zuko crossed his arms. “What is it, then?”

“Stop acting like a boy. You’re young, yes, but that doesn’t mean you have to act this way.”

“What’s that even supposed to mean?”

Ozai rolled his eyes. “You’re foolish. You act without thinking. You speak without a filter, as if everything you think simply flows out of your mouth without a moment of consideration. You blow up over nothing, like an impetuous toddler. You come into my prison cell, give me a meal, and you think I’m going to solve all your problems? Grow up.”

Zuko huffed at that. “I don’t think you’re going to solve all my problems, dad.”

“You’re childish. Act like a man. And beyond that, act like the ruler you claim to be.”

Zuko rested his head on his hand. “That’s awfully vague.”

“You’re too foolish to understand it.” He played with his food for a moment. “You’ve never been very bright.”

“Fuck you.”

Ozai glared up at him. “That’s exactly what I mean. You’re myopic. Throwing petty insults in my direction. You stole my crown while you were still a boy, but you have to act like a man now. There’s no other way. Otherwise that crown on your head will be stolen from you by someone better. Someone more suited to the job. Don’t expect to get a free pass your whole life simply because you’re my son.” 

In the Fire Nation, ruling families were never thought to be god-ordained. The Fire Lord could always be challenged, in one way or another. It was a mark of a good ruler to show he was able to keep the throne in the event of any challenge. Zuko knew this, but he refused to believe anyone would be bold enough to challenge him face-to-face. Without Agni Kais, the only way would be with a real battle, and he told himself that no one would attempt such a thing when Aang so fervently wanted him on the throne, because then his challenger would have The Avatar to deal with as well, who even Ozai himself couldn’t defeat.

“Urgh. I shouldn’t have come here… You’re impossible.”

He stood up to leave, but something overcame Ozai, and he tried to drive the message home. 

“How do you think you’ll ever be the powerful ruler you want to be with a tongue like that? With no filter. No tatemae. Nothing. You have courage, sure, and some talent, but no tact. None at all.” 

Zuko tried to calm himself down, stopping with his hand on the door. “I’ve never been good at keeping my thoughts secret. It’s a part of who I am.”

“You wear your heart on your sleeve. You’re just like your mother,” he almost put a piece of tempura in his mouth, but stopped. “No, worse. Because you have a vile temper, and she did not.”

You never talk about her anymore. His hand dropped down, letting go of the door handle.

“I’ll work on it.”

Ozai took another bite. Zuko decided to walk back, and sat down at the chair once more.

“You never really answered my question.”

“And I don’t have to.”

“Answer it. I’m not going to beg you.”

With a moment of thought, Ozai sighed and looked up at his son. “First, focus on becoming a respectable ruler. Compose yourself. Don’t blow up in anger over nothing. It makes you look ridiculous. Don’t announce your feelings to the entire world. Don’t whine like a child and throw tantrums. And stop swearing so much. It's gauche. Treat yourself like an emperor. No one will respect you as a Firelord if you don’t act like one. That should be obvious.”

“You’re saying, what? You think nobody respects me? None of them?”

“At this point, it’s unlikely you have anyone’s respect in the Capital. I don’t know how you would. You betrayed me. You betrayed this nation. And now you want everyone to love you for it.”

“Why do I even bother talking to you?” Zuko mumbled under his breath, rubbing the bridge of his nose in frustration. Even though it was meant in sarcasm, Ozai answered the question.

“Because I commanded respect as Firelord. Because people wanted to follow me, even to the bitter end. I’m sure you’re having a difficult time with that. You’re fed up with your own shortcomings and so you come to me. For tips. Like we’re playing a pai sho game.”

Zuko said nothing for a moment, looking down at the dingy tile floor.

“Do you know what’s really preventing you from having the court in your pocket, Zuko?”

“Not really.” 

“Now that the war’s ended you're no doubt pushing all your ministers and the court to come around to your way of thinking. There’s no doubt it’s frustrating them and making them despise you. Why? Because you’re criticizing them. You’re blatantly telling them or implying that they’re immoral and cruel to have done such things during the war. You’re criticizing your own nation. You’re implying that your own country is immoral and cruel, and it needs to be fixed, which by extension is no doubt making everyone else think that you think they’re depraved, blood-thirsty criminals. How’s that for patriotism?” 

“I don’t mean it like that—”

“You did the same thing when you were thirteen. When you spoke out in my war meeting and insulted my commanding general. You, who know so little of military tactics and warfare, essentially called him immoral as well as all of us for going along with his plan—”

“It was immoral!” Zuko shouted.

Ozai continued his rant, speaking quickly and sharply.

“You also never stop to consider your own impurities when you insult others like this. If you’re going to criticize someone in a serious way, you need to make sure you aren’t guilty of the same sins first, at least not so obviously, because then you come off as a vile hypocrite, only further inciting the vexation and anger among the people about your rule. You fought against The Avatar at Ba Sing Se. You burned down half of Kyoshi Island. And you captured The Avatar during The Siege of the North. People know these things. It’s common knowledge. You’re clearly not innocent, Zuko. And yet you condemn others for committing or abetting the same crimes that you have, with little thought about how it’s received or how hypocritical you come across. You’re being sanctimonious.”

“I don’t know what that word means.”

“You’re acting like you’re morally superior to other people, even though you’ve committed the same crimes. Can’t you see how obnoxious that is to them? How frustrated your ministers and councilmen must be with you? Only holding their tongue because they fear retribution? Because they fear The Avatar? The reason why I say these things so plainly to you is because I’m already in a prison cell. I have nothing left to lose. They fear this same end. So they hold their tongue. You came to me because I’m the only one who’ll tell you the truth about this. I’m the only one who’s not afraid.”

He hung his head, thinking for a moment. “...You’re right.”

“Yes. I am. You’ve put yourself in a dangerous position with your council.” 

Zuko paused, letting his father’s words sink in. “How’d you guess that was going on in my court? Did one of the guards tell you?”

“No. It was easy to surmise that much without any help.”

He would have doubted it, but he knew his father had uncommon intelligence, the same intelligence that had been passed down to his sister.

“Why are you telling me this? I thought you hated me now. Why help me?”

“Oh, I do hate you, Zuko,” he sighed, “but I don’t hate this country. This is all I can do to prevent you from ruining it from my prison cell.”

Zuko locked eyes with him, hating how familiar they looked. “I don’t hate this country, either. I love the Fire Nation.”

“Well, it doesn’t come across that way. When you betrayed me on the day of the eclipse— that little speech you gave me about how the Fire Nation inspires terror in the hearts of men? I’m assuming you speak like that now to your council. Do you think that will do anything other than sow discord and discontent?”

“It’s the truth.”

Ozai shook his head in the negative. “It’s not a fair observation.”

“Yes, it is. You’re deluded if you think otherwise. We’ve caused terror all over the world. You tried to burn down the Earth Kingdom— talk about terrorizing people!”

“Do you think that the people of our country haven’t been terrorized, too? You think they haven’t been raided and pillaged and raped by those Earth Kingdom brutes? You think they haven’t woken up in the middle of the night and found their neighbors dead in their beds, their throats slit by water-tribe savages? They have. You want to talk about terrorizing others? Visit a town in the colonies that suffered a night raid by Hakoda and his men. You think that the people of this country want to be called immoral savages by you, when some of them have endured things like that? Remember things like that? You think women from captured towns, who we brought back, weren’t raped by the Earth Kingdom soldiers? You think they didn’t watch their families be crushed to death and buried in mass graves? ”

“It’s not like that! I mean, that may have happened, sure, but you’re looking at it from the wrong angle. We waged war on the other nations, not the other way around.”

Ozai showed no remorse. He was calm, no expression on his handsome face. “I didn’t start the war, Zuko. Neither did my father. Sozin did, over one hundred years ago. Who’s to blame for starting the war other than him and his men?”

“Sozin started it. But we were still perpetuating it. We still carried out the actions of war. We didn’t have to.”

“We’re culpable, yes. But what choice did we really have? Were we to give up a war, when we were nearly finished? Accept defeat and, what? Let the other kingdoms push back against us?”

“Yes! We had to. We had to. There had been enough bloodshed. The solution wasn’t to end the Earth Kingdom and build it back up as the Fire Nation.” He sighed in frustration. “I’ll never agree with you on this. Ever. You’re— you don’t care about the lives of the innocents. You never have. You only ever cared about winning. About taking power for yourself.”

“Taking power is all that matters.” Ozai was resolved on the matter. “People will always die. People will always be hurt and hurt others. You’re an idiot if you think you’re going to create some kind of utopian airbender paradise with The Avatar. People cannot live together without fighting over power. It’s a constant struggle that’s been going on since the dawn of man. The airbenders tried to pretend like they didn’t care about power— tried to pretend that they were spirits, detached from the world— but even they had power struggles in their ridiculous temples. Even they fought over positions and spots on the council. Regardless,” he waved his hand in the air, knowing Zuko wouldn’t agree with him, “many people in this nation feel the same way as I do. You’re never going to win hearts and minds talking to people like you are now, accusing them of evildoing while you are guilty of the same crimes. You’re trying to rally them up, what, by telling them how terrible they are? How they need to fix themselves? You’re not a religious expert. And you’re not a ruler who inspires fear, either, so that is unlikely to work. You're a moody teenager, playing dress-up in my robes.”

Zuko made a noise of frustration. Arguing with his father often felt like arguing with the voice in his own head.

“They probably think you hate them and hate this great nation. What a leader you are,” he added sardonically. Zuko’s face contorted in anger. His fists clenched at his sides.

“I don’t hate them! And I don’t hate the Fire Nation. I love the Fire Nation. I do. I just hated the war— I just wanted to stop the war. We need to move on from that. But that doesn’t mean I hate the people here, or that I think I’m better than any of them. I’m not. I know I’m not. I know I did terrible shit, too. But I’ve changed. I— I care about the people here. I just want to lead everyone into a new future, together, without so much hatred. Without the war. I want the Fire Nation to prosper. And I think we can, if we could just come together, but, we need to be on the same page first. We can find a new direction. Together.”

Ozai went back to his meal. After a while, he looked up. “You got your answer, Zuko. You’re welcome.”

Zuko stood, but paused on his way out. “I’m guessing you have another reason for doing this. Something I’m not seeing yet.”

“Pardon?” 

“You’re not helping me for no reason. You and Azula— you’d never do something like this without reason, you’re too damn selfish. You think this is gonna benefit you somehow. I just haven’t figured out how yet.”

“I’m not plotting anything, Zuko. I’m powerless now. I have no firebending and no freedom.”

“Doesn’t matter. You’re still up to something, probably.”

“What on Earth do you think I could be doing?” Ozai asked innocently, gold eyes meeting gold.

Zuko knew that look.

“I’m not sure yet. But I’ll figure it out eventually.”

Hiryū Ocean Liner, International Waters

The next morning over breakfast Katara noticed that Mai was unusually quiet. She and Sokka had been chatting for a while, but Mai hadn’t joined in, not even a little. Luckily, her brother broke the awkwardness at the dining table.

“So, Mai, what have you been up to since the end of the war?”

She looked up from her congee, which she had barely been eating. “I’ve been helping with different things. Things that Zuko needs to get done around the capital. And the palace. There was a lot to do after the war ended. Buildings had to be rebuilt. Proclamations had to be sent out. We remodeled parts of the palace, like Zuko’s new chambers. I supervised that while he was working on other stuff. And I helped with the initial changes to the education system. That was difficult. There was a lot of resistance.”

“I bet.” Sokka remembered the things Aang had learned in his brief days in a Fire Nation school.

“I had to go to schools with the education team and check the textbooks to make sure the curriculum was actually being changed— making sure they removed the propaganda and the lies. Huge parts of the textbook were blocked out. Some teachers just decided not to teach history this year altogether, because their history books were largely blacked out due to all the inaccuracies.”

“What did Zuko think about that?”

“He wasn’t mad about it. As long as they didn’t quit altogether he thought it was fine. He understands their frustration. But the new textbooks aren’t out yet, so, what can they do? They’re just focusing on other subjects for now. But the whole education system is getting revamped, and some people are really unhappy about it. They’ve been threatening to quit if things aren’t fixed soon. And they don’t want to teach the new books. They think the books Zuko is going to have taught are going to be filled with propaganda, and not the other way around.”

“Gods.”

"Not everyone thinks that, but a lot of people do. A lot of people still feel like we shouldn't have given up the war."

“Who’s helping him with the new books?” Katara asked.

“He’s trying to get a good team together in the capital, but they keep fighting about things. Historical events, I mean. Different versions of our history are written down all over the world, and it’s hard to come to a consensus. They’re debating what the truth is. It’s hard to tell at this point.”

“Maybe they should bring in some old people who actually remember. Back home we don’t really keep written records. We just pass things down through generations through stories. Or we make art,” Sokka added, thinking about the sealskin painting he had of an epic fight between tribes in the Southern Seas in his room at home.

“A lot of old people just remember what they were told, and at least in the Fire Nation, what you’re told isn’t always accurate. Well, definitely not just in the Fire Nation. People in Ba Sing Se didn’t even know there was a fucking war going on, apparently.” She sounded exhausted, closing her eyes.

Katara wondered if she hadn’t been able to sleep at all the previous night.

“I think they knew, on some level, but they just didn’t talk about it because of the Dai Li,” she responded, taking a sip of water.

A servant refilled it without asking, and she watched with interest. She wasn't used to being around servants.

“Maybe. But, anyway, yeah, I’m helping Zuko. I do whatever he needs.”

Sokka almost made an inappropriate joke, but refrained. “Do you have an actual position?” 

Mai shrugged. “I’m in the books as an administrative assistant or something like that, whatever.”

“Do you want a more legitimate position in the government?” 

“Not really. I’m thinking about going to the university if—” she paused, blinking, “if I’m free next fall.”

Chuan Li entered the dining room. Sokka ignored him.

“Why wouldn’t you be free?” He asked, confused.

“I don’t know. Forget it,” Mai muttered. “Good morning, Chuan.”

“Morning," Katara greeted.

“Good morning, Mai. Katara. Sokka,” he addressed them professionally, one by one, bowing. “How did you sleep?”

“Great. Like a baby moose-lion. The beds on this ship are so comfortable.”

“That’s good to hear.”

The rest of the conversation carried on, normal as could be, but Katara noted the strange expression that had been on Mai's face when she had mentioned being free in the fall. She had no idea what it meant, but it stuck with her.

Fire Nation, Royal Palace

“And, how long were you at your last job?” Zuko looked up at the elderly man in front of him. He was stroking his long, white beard with a wrinkly hand. 

“Eighteen years, Majesty.”

Longer than I’ve been alive. 

“Okay. Thank you for coming in, Huang. I have enough. I’ll write you a letter letting you know my decision.”

“Thank you, Your Excellency,” he said, struggling slightly to bow before he shuffled slowly out of the room, long robes trailing behind.

Zuko sighed when the man had left, cracked his neck, and looked out the window at the lush courtyard while a servant exchanged tea cups.

How many more of these do I have to do? Agni. They’re all ancient. He had been searching for a head advisor for weeks, and none of the candidates had been too tempting. Each had been too senile or too boring or too loyal to Ozai. The door opened once more and Zuko turned, expecting to see yet another bearded old man. Instead, a young woman entered the room. His eyes went wide in shock for a moment. 

Holy shit… Zuko thought to himself as she walked in and bowed deeply at the waist.

Her face was strikingly beautiful, with slightly upturned amber colored eyes and elegant, straight brows. Zuko noticed her plump, pouty lips, painted an elegant shade of red that matched her qipao.

“Nice to meet you, Miss—” he cut himself off, waiting to hear her name.

“Amara Miyazaki. It’s an honor to finally meet you, Firelord Zuko.” Her voice was just as graceful and pretty as she was.

Zuko made a mental effort not to check her out too obviously. He turned and gestured for her to kneel at the chabudai, the low table and cushions set up in the center of the room.

“Have a seat, please.” He kneeled as she did. “Would you like some tea?”

“Yes, thank you, Your Majesty.”

He poured some for her from a red and white teapot and she smiled, it being a great honor to be poured tea by the Firelord himself and all. Zuko looked at her for a second too long, noticing her long, silky, pitch-black hair, partially down, and partially drawn up into a bun with pretty kanzashi— feminine hair ornaments. Focus. She’s just another candidate. Zuko took out his paperwork and began shuffling through sheets to find her name. Amara Miyazaki… That name sounds kind of familiar. Amara Miya—there. He read it over.

“It says here that you’re twenty-three.”

“Yes, Your Majesty.”

“But you have a pretty solid resume, anyway. Care to summarize this for me?”

“Of course, sire. I attended the Royal Fire Academy for Girls and graduated in ‘93. Then, I spent a summer interning for Akio Imazato, the former Mayor of the Capital, and after that I shadowed Minister Suzuki for about a year. I did work for his office, and began working with strategists and speechwriters. I graduated from Akihara University in ‘95 with dual-degrees in history and political science.”

“Wait— that doesn’t make sense. You got your degree in two years?” He looked up at her, confused, expecting it to be a mistake. 

“Yes, Your Majesty,” she responded, calm and straight-faced.

“It takes most people four.”

“Yes, Your Majesty,” she repeated, just the same. “That’s right.”

“Hah." He smirked knowingly, the pieces fitting together. “Okay. And how old were you when you graduated prep school?”

“Sixteen.”

“You’re always two years ahead of everyone else?” 

Amara’s expression stayed the same. “Please feel free to contact my professors and teachers for confirmation.”

“Okay,” Zuko kind of huffed, “points for modesty. It says here that you can read ancient nizhong, fanzi-ten, and Northern yup'ik? Seriously?” He raised his good eyebrow.

Except for a few academics and the Fire Sages, people only ever spoke the common tongue, and knew little of the languages that were popular before Great Unification spread the language of Ba Sing Se throughout the four nations hundreds of years ago. All other languages had completely faded out of popularity. 

“Seriously,” Amara answered, mirth glittering in her eyes, “Your Majesty.”

“You can speak informally with me. I don’t mind it. Actually, I prefer it, especially if we’re talking one-on-one. I’m a pretty casual guy.”

She almost smiled. “Alright.”

“You can read the ancient languages. You went to Akihara. So, you’re, what, some kind of genius?” He deadpanned.

Amara laughed, amused. “No. But I study a lot.”

“What was your grade point average in college?” He challenged.

“One hundred.” 

Zuko made a face. 

Amara shrugged. “I’m a history buff. I like studying.”

“Gods, I wish I did. It also says here that your father worked in the government?” Until I took over, he thought to himself, noting the years.

Amara set down her teacup. "Yes, he did. He was the chief engineer for the war, starting in '79. He designed tundra tanks, jet skis, tank trains, and the drill, I believe.”

“Wow. Impressive. Where does he live now? There’s no address here. Did he retire, or—?" Quit as soon as I took office? 

“I don’t know.”

Zuko looked up at her. “What?” 

“Well, he left to get groceries when I was thirteen and he hasn’t come back yet, so I’m expecting him any minute now,” she joked.

Zuko chuckled a little.

“I don’t know where he lives, sire. We haven't spoken since I was a child.”

“Right,” he brushed past the admission, being familiar with the idea of having a distant father, “well, you’re technically qualified, despite your age, so let’s get to the real interview questions.” He set down the application form and looked her in the eyes.

“Why should I hire you to be my advisor?”

“I’m competent. Raising myself has allowed me to be much more mature than I should be for my age. I work very hard, and I have a strategic mind, which allows me to have a good grasp on the outcomes of various choices and events. Due to my education, I have a very thorough knowledge of culture and history, particularly Fire Nation history, so I know all about the nuances of the consequences of previous Firelords’ decisions. Also, I’m pretty easy to talk to and get along with, so I’ll feel comfortable communicating with anyone. And,” she dropped the formality again, her expression turning to one a little less serious and a little more mischievous, “let’s not ignore the obvious. I saw the other candidates for this job in the waiting room. I have nothing against old men, nothing at all, but old men have been running governments for as long as anyone can remember, and it doesn’t have to be that way just because it’s always been that way. A head advisor doesn’t have to be an old man. I’m wise for my age. I’m not reckless. And I’ve already learned a lot about life, despite my age, like you have. We can relate to each other more than someone’s cynical grandfather.”

He smirked. “Mmm. I do like the idea of working with someone younger… How do you think that being a woman will affect you in this job? You’re the first female candidate I’ve met.”

“Well, there are differences between men and women, at least generally speaking, and if anything, I think women compliment men in any workplace, and especially in court. When dealing with all kinds of various issues a man’s first instinct, unless he’s a pacifist, is usually to fight, or become aggressive. A woman’s first instinct, at least for me, is to try and mend the situation, improve communication, and calm things down. We’re not fighting anyone right now, or for the foreseeable future— we’re mending bridges. Or, building new ones, rather. We’re repairing relations and improving communication and cooperation. That’s what I’m good at. So, I think being a woman would actually benefit me in a way that it didn’t when we were still at war.”

Good answer. “I see. Are you willing to commit all your time to this job, if necessary? Are you willing to stay here at the palace for long periods if there’s an issue that needs to be resolved right away?”

She nodded. “Absolutely.” 

“How do you think you’ll handle the stress of this job?”

“Very well. I’ve dealt with stress all my life, and I’m aware of the stress of working in court. I handled my internship with Minister Suzuki all while going to college full-time. I’m ready.”

“Okay. This is a different kind of question, but, how do you feel about the status quo, and how do you feel about rebelling against it?”

She thought for a moment. “I think that, when done for proper reasons, rebelling against the status quo is absolutely necessary, even if it’s painful. Even if it harms your relationships and your reputation. If something that’s considered part of the status quo is actually immoral, like using child soldiers, for example, or committing adultery, or waging war without any real reason, I think everyone needs to rebel against it. I think that’s the duty of common people. And it’s an important one.”

“How did you become interested in court politics? Why did you choose this profession?”

“I suppose I became interested in politics during high school. There was plenty of politics going on there,” she teased, and then she got serious again, “Human dynamics have always interested me. I like thinking about politics like a Pai Sho board, with many players, all moving their pieces in different ways, all seeking different ends, and competing with one another. I became interested in learning about the different ways that humans behave and why— well, why some endlessly follow others, hoping to succeed if they follow in their footsteps, why some adhere strictly to the rules, and others break them, why some are highly motivated, and others aren’t, and why everyone seems to be carrying around old wounds, carefully trying to keep them a secret from others. It’s just fascinating to me, I suppose. For the same reasons I’m interested in history and plays. I chose this profession because I saw what was going on in the government and I was interested in it, and the further I got and the more I learned, the more concerned I was about the government. I had my moral awakening, if you will, when I was sixteen, the same age you were when you switched sides, and at that point I realized I couldn’t go on working for such a terrible regime, and I left. I went to work on more mundane government projects in the Northern states. I learned about local taxes and regulations and other things like that.”

“What in particular made you switch? Or, made you ‘wake up’ to it all?” He wondered.

“I started learning more and thinking more about the realities of what we were doing. All the children that were dying, the numbers of soldiers killed on the warfront, the destruction, the broken families, the famines abroad. I thought about the moral depravity going on— all the child soldiers, the torture, the murders, the rapes, the pillaging. My boyfriend was talking about some of the weapons used in the war and it made my blood chill. The veil came off my eyes, so to speak, and I was no longer blinded to what we were doing— I finally saw it for what it was: evil. And I wanted no part of it anymore, even though I was offered jobs in court.”

Zuko took a moment to consider her. He had a good feeling about her, and he decided to trust it. 

“Is there anything else I should know about you before I hire you?”

That made her smile. But she thought for a moment, and the smile faded.

“I know your father,” she answered, straight-faced.

That took Zuko by surprise. The gears in his head started turning and he scowled a bit.

“Really? How do you know him?”

“We were friends when I was younger. For a couple years. I met him at my college. He was teaching a course on lightning-bending.”

“Oh...” Zuko looked away, out the window for a moment, and then back at Amara, who was taking a sip of her tea. He scowled at the gorgeous woman. “That’s not a— a euphemism, is it? I don’t really think my dad has many friends,” he added awkwardly.

She raised an eyebrow. “A euphemism?”

“Were you—” he looked at her attractive form with a more critical gaze. “Were you sleeping with him?”

“No,” she laughed, which Zuko didn’t expect. “No, I wasn’t. I was dating Veras at the time. Veras Iwamoto. And he and Ozai were friends with each other.”

“Veras Iwamoto… The head of military technology? That crazy weapons guy?” Zuko vaguely remembered the man; a tall, eccentric genius with a goatee and very questionable morals.

“Yes, sir,” she chuckled, still laughing a bit at his casual nature.

He was obviously a teenage boy. Zuko was still reeling from the admission. It was hard to imagine.

“Okay…” He made a face. “Weird.”

“I just wanted you to know so that wouldn’t take you off guard later. We would go on vacations and things like that— all of us together. Veras, me, Ozai, and Androza. Sometimes others.”

“His ex-girlfriend?”

Zuko barely remembered that one. She had been meaner than the rest of his father’s girlfriends, with sharp eyes and a haughty attitude. 

“They started dating around that time, yes.”

“Alright. You were all friends. That’s kinda weird.”

Their respective age differences made Zuko feel concerned, and he tried not to think too much about his father’s strange past. Androza couldn't have been more than twenty at the time. And Amara would have been even younger.

“Yeah.” She didn’t deny that it was strange. “It’s a small world up here in the caldera. Everyone knows everyone else, basically.”

“How old were you, though, sixteen?” He cringed at the thought.

“Yes.”

“And how old was Veras?” 

“Forty.”

“Ah—” Zuko sputtered. “Uhh, ok-ay. Why were you dating a middle-aged man when you were sixteen?”

“That’s complicated, Your Majesty. It’s kind of a long story.”

Zuko put his hands up. “Oh, I’m sure. You don’t need to tell me. Sorry. I shouldn’t have asked. That’s your business.”

Amara didn’t seem to mind. “It’s alright, Your Majesty. I broke up with Veras at the beginning of ‘95, and I stopped being friends with Ozai and Androza at that time, as well. I realized they weren’t the kind of people I wanted to associate with anymore. I’m a different person now. I’ve done a lot of maturing since then.”

“I’m sure,” he reflected on his own past. “It’s not like I’m one to judge, either. Let me think if there’s anything else I want to ask you…” He looked down at her sheet again. “Oh, why do you want this job?”

“I want this job because I’d like to help you improve our country. It’s that simple. I was really inspired by the statement you put out at the end of the war. I think you have the potential to be a great Firelord— even a good one. You have the talent and the drive, but you also have a burgeoning sense of morality, something that your father, grandfather, and great-grandfather never had. You’re a beacon of hope for a new Fire Nation. A better, brighter, more enlightened one, built on the basis of respect for other nations and a love for our country not fueled by crushing others down. I want an independent, forward-thinking Fire Nation, one led by younger and less cynical people, where we try to get along instead of cutting each other down to get a step ahead. A new Fire Nation, one that’s never been imagined before, focused on promoting the best things about us and our homeland— one driven by science and culture and opportunity for those in the lower classes to rise up. We should create art and literature, not warships and tundra tanks. I want to help you improve the Fire Nation, and not tear down the other nations in the process.”

Zuko just looked at her for a moment, thoroughly impressed. “Did you plan that?” 

Amara laughed good-heartedly. “Not verbatim. I’m just a good orator. I write speeches professionally sometimes.”

“Okay. You’re hired, Amara,” he locked eyes with her, watching her expression change, a smile overcoming her.

“Can you start now?” He stood.

“Now? Yeah. Sure.”

She looked excited, Zuko thought, as she stood up and walked with him out of the room. 

“Alright. Let’s get started. I’m gonna get you caught up. Hinata,” he caught the attention of his assistant when they were out the door, “let everyone else go. I’m hiring Amara.”

Fire Nation, Harbor City

Their ship docked in the late afternoon, when the sky was turning to orange. Katara could feel how much closer the sun was in the Fire Nation. It seemed larger, boldly streaking yellow and gold over the sea, casting a warm glow around the harbor, causing the space under the red-tiled roofs to be cast in shadow. She raised a hand to shield her eyes as they debarked.

“That’s our carriage,” Mai explained, pointing to the dragon-moose drawn carriage waiting for them with shiny red-painted wood and gold trim. “Give me a minute to talk to the Harbormaster about the delivery.”

“Okay.”

“Chuan, let’s go,” she said to the man behind her, and the duo walked down the ramp.

They were approached by the tall Harbormaster who held a clipboard, checking shipments as they came in.

Katara looked around at the scenery as she walked down to the harbor. The Fire Nation was the complete opposite of her homeland. Instead of the desolate, icy tundra and a few igloos, in the Capital there was beautiful lush greenery, perfectly paved streets, and buildings everywhere, some of them three or four stories tall.

The harbor was full of people. Workers transported merchandise on and off the ships and into wagons, commoners went about their daily errands, and street merchants announced their wares, trying to lure people to their stalls. Beyond the open market there were stores on top of stores— literally. Katara tried to read the signs in front of the businesses set up in stone buildings, but she was too far away. There were sounds and smells everywhere, distracting her. Waves washing up against the docks, horses’ hooves on the cobblestone streets, and the commotion of the commonwealth, talking and going about their day. Katara could smell the sea, the fragrance of plant life in a public park nearby, and the overlapping scents of different exotic foods in the market, all at once. It was overwhelming.

“Are you alright?” Sokka asked, breaking Katara out of her reverie. He thought it was strange that she was silent.

“Yeah. Everything’s fine. I’m just a little overwhelmed, Sokka. We’ve been at home for so long, and now that we’re here—” she didn’t need to go on.

“I know what you mean. It’s nothing like home.”

He put his hands in his pockets and looked along with her, watching fishermen pull their catches up to the higher levels and young children race each other in the market space above. 

“It’s weird to be back here and see everything be so normal. No war,” she said simply, and Sokka nodded. They stopped at the base of the ramp.

“Yeah. It’s nice though,” he matched her mood, feeling quite contemplative himself. “It’s great that we can come here and we don’t have to think about the war anymore. We’re just here to see our friends.”

Katara turned to smile at him. He was squinting in the sunlight.

“I know. It is great.”

They watched as Mai approached them. She was in her normal burgundy and black bijia again. It wasn’t cold in the Fire Nation Capital, even in winter. It was pleasantly cool. Katara loved that she didn’t need her parka anymore.

“How’d it go?”

“Everything’s fine,” Mai answered. “They’re going to deal with the shipment now.” She slipped a small scroll into her pocket. “We can head to the palace.”

Sokka pursed his lips, looking around. “I thought maybe Zuko would be here to greet us.” 

“A Firelord isn’t really supposed to do that,” Mai explained, her voice low as always. “It’s not traditional. You go to the Firelord, not the other way around.”

“Oh. Okay,” he shrugged, and they walked together to the carriage, getting in one by one.

All Katara had with her was one large leather bag with a change of clothing and a few personal items. Sokka brought his backpack and his boomerang, which he set on the floor once inside. The interior of the carriage was finely upholstered, with velvet seats and glass windows.

“Nice carriage.” 

The three of them said nothing for a while as the carriage started moving through the harbor and up the ramp towards the main road. It wasn’t silent. Muffled sounds of horses and the market carried on, and they all looked out the windows, taking in the city. Katara suddenly realized she had almost missed the Fire Nation, in a strange way, like she had been longing to know it better. Her eyes glossed over the tea shops with tables out front, full of teenagers gossiping after school, the bars, with their talkative patrons standing and sitting after a long day’s work, sipping on wine and ale, and the grocery stores, full of people picking out yuzu and daikon. Stores upon stores upon stores.

Katara could hardly believe the sheer multitude of them. There were stationary stores and lantern stores and home goods stores. Clothing retailers, furniture makers, booksellers, and apothecaries all competed in the tightly arranged buildings, complete with unique signs, hanging lanterns, and displays in their windows. To Katara, all the patrons seemed to be doing well, at least from afar, with their arms bearing groceries or carefully packaged presents, fine clothing on their backs and hair pins in their buns.

“It doesn’t seem like these people have been rioting recently,” she noted, hoping for some reaction. "Or starving."

Mai was serious, as usual. “They haven’t. Things are pretty good here. We’re near the ocean, so there’s enough to go around. It’s harder deeper in the country, in the mountains and far from large rivers, where people live mostly on grains and livestock. Rice is the biggest issue, because we used to import tons from the Earth Kingdom, and we don’t grow a lot. It’s very expensive right now. And, to be honest, this area is too well-off to have many problems. It's mainly the poor people who are starving, out in the country or in the slums."

“Has Zuko talked to King Kuei about buying more?” Katara asked. “Kuei’s a decent guy. Wouldn’t he be willing to work out a trade?”

Mai didn’t turn from the window. “Not until decolonization is complete. He doesn’t want any Fire Nation citizens on Earth Kingdom lands. They have to become Earth Kingdom citizens or get out. Until that’s done, nothing,” she made her point quite clearly, “He’ll let our people starve if need be. They don’t care. They want the Fire Nation out. All the Earth Kingdom kings do; they’re standing with Kuei on this.”

“Don’t blame ‘em,” Sokka muttered, looking over at Mai. “Won’t they be done soon?”

“We hope.”

Once they reached the outer wall of the Fire Nation palace they had to get out and walk the rest on foot. It was the first time Katara and Sokka had seen guards that looked like soldiers in quite a while. They marched in formation, taking a corner with precision. As the trio approached the large front doors of the palace they opened loudly and a familiar figure walked out, crimson robes trailing on the tile floor behind him.

Katara’s eyes lit up. It felt like ages since she had seen her friend.

“Zuko.”

Author’s note about Ozai in this story: I will be portraying Ozai in a way that is consistent with A:TLA. For those of you who are fortunate enough to have never been a recipient of or witness to narcissistic abuse, particularly between parents and children, I will let you know that it’s very complicated being in one of these relationships. Also, narcissistic abusers are not abusive all of the time. This kind of abuse is cyclical and complex. 

Chapter Text

"Do I not destroy my enemies when I make them my friends?"

—Abraham Lincoln

Fire Nation, Royal Palace

“Katara.” 

As she hugged him, Zuko accepted the embrace easily, not caring about the impropriety. 

Katara closed her eyes and breathed in his scent: sandalwood and patchouli. He was so warm. She thought it felt strange to be in his arms again after so long. 

It suddenly struck her that she had really, really missed him.

“It’s so good to see you again. I’m glad you made it.”

Katara pulled away to look at him. He was mostly the same, she thought, but he looked healthier. Regular meals and what she imagined were very rigorous workouts looked good on him. 

“Yeah, it feels like it’s been forever.”

They shared another moment of eye contact before Sokka groaned at them.

“Uhm, hello? I’m right here.” He teased.

Zuko smiled at him. “Sokka,” accepting a hug from him as well, “Good to see you.”

“You too. We missed you, buddy.”

Katara barely noticed a guard’s face twitch at that comment, seemingly finding the greeting very strange. She ignored it and looked back at the Firelord, who was actually smiling for once.

“Is your leg all better?” Zuko asked, glad to see Sokka wasn’t using a crutch anymore.

“Yup! All thanks to her.” He gestured to his sister. “She’s a great healer.”

“The best, yeah. I remember.” He sort of laughed. 

Zuko knew firsthand how talented she was; he had spent hours with Katara in healing sessions after their fight with Azula. She had reduced the nasty scar on his abdomen to a faint line in a matter of days.

“You’ve gotten taller,” she muttered, looking up at him and noticing the distance. “So, how are you?”

“I’m alright, considering. I’ve been—” He stopped himself when he noticed Mai approaching, her silky black hair gleaming in the sun. 

She bowed deeply at the waist, which made Katara raise a brow.

“Mai. Glad to see you made it back in one piece,” he teased.

“I can handle myself.”

She rose and Zuko gave her a brief kiss on the lips.

“Always,” he smirked, wrapping an arm around her while he looked back at the pair of Water Tribe siblings on his front doorstep. 

“Everyone else is already here. They’re in the lounge.”

“Really?” Katara hadn’t expected everyone to arrive before them. “Aang’s here already?”

“Aang’s here. I’ll show you where he is. Come on in,” he let go of Mai and turned to lead them through the gigantic doorway. “Toph, Suki, Ty Lee, Sang— they’re all here. Appa’s in the stables.”

Once the front doors were shut behind them, all daylight had suddenly vanished and they were ushered into the darkened halls of Fire Nation opulence. 

Katara thought there was no other place like it in the world. 

In her travels, she had seen mansions and palaces. Earth Kingdom villas and Airbender temples and even the Earth King’s Palace in Ba Sing Se. But none of them felt quite like the Fire Nation Royal Palace. 

It was pleasantly cool, even on the hottest midsummer days, and lavish beyond belief. Elegant lanterns cast a dim, seductive glow, illuminating huge decorative columns, hanging scroll paintings, golden statues, and dark hardwood floors, polished to perfection. Even the walls looked expensive, painted in a rich, intimidating shade of burgundy. When Katara looked up she realized the hall was so tall that the ceilings were cast into shadow.

The dramatic change in scenery made her feel dizzy. She struggled to keep up the pace with the rest of the group. Firelord Zuko was walking quickly, having long ago memorized the layout of his home. 

“Forgot how fancy this place is… sheesh,” Sokka glanced back at a golden sculpture of a phoenix, worth more than he could even imagine. “How did everybody get here so quickly?”

“They left before you did, actually.”

“I’m just so glad everyone could make it. This is amazing,” Katara chimed in. 

She thought it was strange to reunite with Aang and her friends inside the Fire Nation Royal Palace of all places, but, then again, everything was strange after the war. 

“There’s more good news,” Zuko added, sounding unusually upbeat, “Decolonization is finally over.”

Katara’s face lit up at that. “No way!”

“That’s amazing! Now it’s party time! Par-tay time. This calls for a celebration, my friend. Am I right?” He playfully put his arm over Zuko’s shoulders.

“Sure. As long as you promise not to throw up on my carpet at three in the morning.”

Katara chuckled as Zuko pushed Sokka’s arm off his shoulders. He was never really one for prolonged physical contact.

“That was one night! You never let me forget that one night. And that was in Ba Sing Se, not your palace.”

“I just can’t believe they got decolonization done. I thought it would never end. This is great. I can finally make some progress with Earth King Kuei and Bumi and the Northern Water Tribe. I could draft a letter tonight and—” Zuko began, but Sokka stepped in front of him, raising a hand to cut him off.

“With all due respect, those sound like tomorrow’s problems, Mr. Firelord. Tonight is for celebrating! You’ve got to learn to enjoy things once and a while. They did it! Woo! ” He did a little celebratory dance as they walked down the hallway, earning some quizzical looks from the guards and servants along the way. 

“Sokka, calm it down, ” Katara whispered, trying not to laugh, “We’re in a palace.”

“He hasn’t been partying for a long time, has he?” Mai asked, dryly. 

They all remembered the liquor-fueled days of partying in Ba Sing Se after the end of the war, filled with fireworks, drunken shenanigans, and very late nights. 

She laughed. “No, he has. We’ve been partying off and on for months since the war ended. But parties back home are very—” she chuckled, “Ahh… different from parties here, or in Ba Sing Se. At home, parties are about being together with family. The whole tribe, really.”

“What do you do?” Mai asked.

“We eat meals together. Go hunting together. Cook together. Sometimes we sing and chant. Or dance.”

“We play games.” 

“And we pray to the gods and the spirits. But out in the rest of the world, parties are more— how do I say? Adult-free,” she emphasized comically.

“Ah-hah,” Zuko chuckled.

“Lacking any kind of adult supervision. There’s no gran-gran here to tell him what to do. Or, what not to do, I guess.”

“Gran-gran’s very strict,” Sokka added. “Love her. Don’t get me wrong. But she’s a stickler.”

“I get it.”

“Also, we don’t have alcohol back home. We don’t even have anything to make it with.”

Zuko smirked. “Right. Well, no adult supervision here. And the liquor's top shelf.” 

They all laughed when Sokka turned and mouthed ‘hell yeah’ over his shoulder. 

Then, out of the corner of her eye, Katara spotted a very familiar figure through an archway: a little monk in yellow and orange with a bald head and some very nice tattoos.

“Aang? Aang! ”

He turned right away, searching for her voice. When he caught sight of her, clothed in her old blue dress and her mother’s necklace, his expression changed entirely, pure joy evident on his youthful face.

“Katara! ”

They ran into each other’s arms with passion, colliding in a fumbled hug. 

“Oh, my gods. Aang, I’ve missed you so much! ” 

“I missed you too!” 

He hugged her again, very tightly, and for too long, but he didn’t want to let go. After a few moments he pulled back and kissed her cheek. 

“I’m so glad you’re here, Katara. I never want to be apart for that long ever again.”

“Me neither.”

“I’m sorry I kept getting delayed so many times.”

“Don’t worry about it. I’m not mad.” She hugged him again, unable not to. “I’m just so glad we’re back together again. Thank the gods.”

Mai startled a bit at their dramatic reunion. But she soon realized their meeting was tame compared to Sokka and Suki’s, who started kissing passionately before Katara or Mai could even get in a ‘hello’ to her. 

“Please ignore that,” Katara whispered under her breath to Mai and Zuko, who laughed it off.

She looked away from her brother and Suki’s romantic embrace and went over to hug Toph. 

“Toph! How are you? I missed you.”

Toph accepted the hug, but only for a moment. “Hey, Katara. I missed you too. I’m good. They have really good food here, so I’m all set.”

Katara realized Momo was climbing onto a dessert table and she picked him up. “Momo! I just got here and you’re already causing trouble.”

She scratched his head affectionately while he made his little noises of contentment.

“He does that,” Toph droned, “Kind of his thing.”

“How’d everything go with decolonization? Zuko said that you’re done?!”

Toph huffed. “Sort of. This whole thing’s been a nightmare,” she complained softly.

“We are done,” Aang responded, but his tone was a bit more serious than she’d expected, “Everyone who needed to leave is here now. But that’s a long story. Not one for tonight. I just want to be happy that we’re all back together again.”

Katara nodded. “Tell us about it all tomorrow, then.”

“Sure.”

After finishing their public display of affection, Sokka and Suki joined the loose circle of friends gathering at the door.

“So, everyone’s really back?” Sokka made a face at that, finding the idea confusing. The sheer number of Fire Nation citizens who lived in the Earth Kingdom boggled his mind.

“Everyone who didn’t run away. All the colonial towns have been turned over to the Earth Kings. And the last of the Fire Nationals and Zuko’s men— and women — just came back from the Earth Kingdom. The ones who were helping us, I mean.”

“The official task force I sent out,” Zuko explained, “The government agents.”

“Good.” Katara smiled. “That’s good. I’m so proud of you for finishing this.”

She gave Aang’s hand a squeeze and he smiled, but his eyes didn’t. She noticed that.

Aang seemed eager to change the subject, looking over at Zuko with his arm wrapped around his girlfriend. 

“Oh, hey, Mai. I barely noticed you coming in. You’re so quiet. Nice to see you again.”

“It’s a pleasure to see you again, Avatar Aang,” she bowed her head deeply in deference.

He shook his head, smiling. “Just Aang, please. And you don’t have to bow. Hey, I heard you managed the exchange thing between the Fire Nation and the Southern Water Tribe. Nice work!” 

He gave her a double thumbs up, and a corner of Mai’s mouth twitched at that. She willed herself not to laugh at him. But Zuko did, not caring for a second about Aang getting offended.

“Oh, it was nothing,” she waved a hand in the air, “Seriously. I didn’t even do anything except tell the men what to do with the ship and make sure everything went well with Chief Hakoda. Nothing happened.”

“Really?”

“Hakoda and the tribespeople did all the work. And the trade admin guy who was with me. It’s nothing.”

“It’s not nothing, Mai,” Aang insisted, “It’s something. It was the first diplomatic trade between the Fire Nation and the Southern Water Tribe in decades. Right?”

“That’s true,” Zuko added.

Mai considered it. “Well, I suppose when you put it that way—”

“Mai! ” Ty Lee interrupted her, rushing into her arms for a hug.

“Hi,” she huffed, gently patting Ty Lee but soon trying to push her away. 

Ty Lee always wanted hugs to go on too long for her liking. She noticed Ty wasn’t currently in uniform, opting instead for a dark pink ensemble with a matching headband.

“I missed you!” She nearly squeaked, making Mai wince. It had been a while since she had been around that high pitched, girlish voice of hers.

“I missed you, too.”

“So, how are you? How was your trip? Zuko said you went to the Southern Water Tribe?”

“Yeah. It was fine,” Mai shrugged, “We caught up.” She glanced at Katara, remembering their conversation on the deck. “But neither of us could sleep very much on the ship.”

“I slept like a baby!” Sokka interjected, “That ship was so sweet . Thanks for the ride, Zuko. Didn’t know a Fire Nation ship could be so comfortable. It had couches and pillows and everything. Even game rooms. It’s not like a warship at all.” 

“That’s ‘cause it’s not not a warship, it’s a leisure boat,” Zuko explained.

“Well, it was pretty relaxing.” 

Sokka wrapped his arms around Suki from behind, holding her affectionately. She leaned back into his embrace and turned her head to the side, letting him give her a kiss on the cheek. Katara looked away, nearly cringing at their public displays of affection.

“Is anyone hungry?” Zuko asked, “Or thirsty? Everything’s already laid out in here. Or, we could go somewhere else. But they’re making a big celebration dinner tonight, so we’ll be eating soon, I guess.” 

Katara turned to see what he was talking about. The room they were in was unique. She had never seen a room quite like it, but then again, she hadn’t been in the Fire Nation much before, and when she had, it had mostly involved fighting outdoors or living in the wilderness. Except for one night in the Palace Annex in a guest room, she hadn’t seen much of anything. And she had been far too overwhelmed with emotions at the time to notice interior design.

It was an elegant space, done in the older, more traditional style. She noticed that the black and white paintings of nature around the room were done on top of real gold leaf walls. On one side of the room there was a couch on the floor, set up in a large U-shape, with a low table in the center bearing trays of different appetizers. A decorated lantern-style chandelier hung over it, casting the room in a warm glow. More food and drinks were set up in fancy displays on the long black lacquer tables on the other side of the room against the wall. Some bottles of sake, soju, fruit juice, and dumplings in steaming bamboo baskets caught her eye.

“I could use a drink, I guess. Sure. Since we’re gonna have dinner soon, I’ll just wait to eat.”

Zuko walked her over to the tables. “I told the servants to leave us for now so we could have some privacy. They just left everything. Help yourself. This one’s lychee soju.” He showed her the fancy, decorated bottle.

She set her bag down on the floor and came up to the table.

“And this is yuzu juice,” he explained, showing her a glass vase filled with the pale yellow beverage.

“Does it have alcohol?”

“No, it’s just fruit juice.”

“I’ll try that one. Thanks.” She reached out to grab one of the fancy cups, but before she could, Ty Lee burst into view in a flurry of red and pink. She hugged Katara before she even knew what was happening.

“Katara! It’s so good to see you again!” She gushed.

Katara found the embrace strange, although she accepted it. “You too. How’ve you been, Ty Lee?”

“Great! The girls and I have really been bonding. I’m loving it. The workouts are really hard sometimes, but, hey, I used to be in the circus. I can handle anything.” She smirked oddly.

Katara’s mind reeled. It was hard to understand how a girl like her could ever be friends with people like Mai and Azula. She just nodded vacantly.  

“Right.”

“Plus, guess what?”

Katara poured herself some yuzu juice, and then she realized Ty Lee was actually waiting for her to respond.

“Oh. What?”

“I met a guy! Isn’t that amazing?!” She grabbed Katara’s arm. “He’s so cute, and he’s really sweet, too. His name’s Yori. He’s really tall. And he has a mustache, but— don’t worry, he can totally pull it off.” 

“Good for you.” Katara glanced over at Firelord Zuko on the other side of the room, talking to Aang, Sokka, and Mai about something she couldn’t hear.

“Thanks! He’s twenty-two, but it works. We’ve been dating for about four months now.”

“Congrats.”

Ty Lee began pouring herself a drink as well. “I heard you and Aang got together.” She nudged her playfully on the shoulder. “So, what? You’re like a couple now, or something?”

Katara shrugged. “Yeah. I guess so. I mean, we’ve been apart for months, ‘cause of decolonization, but… we like each other, yeah.”

“So, you're like his girlfriend now. That’s great! Good for you guys.”

“Thanks. I’m actually gonna to go talk to him for a moment, if that’s okay—”

“Yeah, yeah.” She shooed her away. “Go on. Get caught up.” 

Katara made her way to Aang, who looked up at her sweetly and patted the cushion beside him.

“Sit next to me.”

“Actually, Aang, could I talk to you for a second? In the other room?”

“Sure.” He got up and walked with her to an adjoining room, a living area with Earth Kingdom inspired furniture, but in red instead of green, of course.

“What do you want to talk about?”

“It’s just—” She sighed. “I want to talk one-on-one. There are so many people out there right now.”

“I know. So, how are you, really? How have you been?” 

Aang pulled her back so they were out of sight of the rest of the group. He held her hands in his and fought the urge to just start kissing her out of nowhere.

Katara smiled a little and gave his small hands a squeeze. “I’ve been well. It’s been great to have the whole family back together. I mean, not my mom, of course, but everyone who's alive: my dad, Bato, Amanaq, Pakku, gran-gran, Inasuk. Everybody.”

“Yeah.”

“We had a great time together, really. Bato got remarried. Dad got sworn in as the Head Chieftain, officially. It felt so… comforting to be at home for so long. My dad and I got close again. It’s really—” she smiled softly, “Dad, Sokka, and I are finally starting to feel like a close-knit family again. So, I’m happy about that. But I missed you and Zuko and Toph every day.”

“Same. I missed Sokka and Zuko, but, Gods, I missed you so much , Katara. I can’t be without you for this long again.” He made a face, backtracking. “I mean, I really, really don’t want to. I know you had to go home and see your dad, and I needed to do this job, but we can’t separate anymore like this. It’s so hard to be apart . ”

“Aang.”

“I love you. It hurts to not be around you. I mean, I know I should say I don’t care, and being The Avatar is more important, but—” he rolled his eyes. “I’m human. I can’t help it. I do care.”

“I know.”

“I missed you so much. I couldn’t fall asleep some nights ‘cause it hurt so bad—”

Katara hugged him tightly, catching him off guard. 

Aang leaned into the embrace, resting his head on her shoulder. “I don’t want to miss you that much ever again.”

She pulled back. “Then, stay with me. Or, I’ll stay with you. You’ll just have to be okay with coming down to the South Pole for holidays and stuff. I need to visit my dad and my gran-gran from time to time.”

“No problem. I’d be happy to go with you. Now that this decolonization mess is over, I shouldn’t have to stay anywhere for so long. I’m free now. Free to spend lots of time with you.” He smiled mischievously, but then his expression changed, growing more serious. 

Katara vaguely noticed that they were just about the same height. He wasn’t so small anymore. He leaned in slowly, resting his forehead against hers briefly before kissing her on the lips.

She startled a bit at the sensation, still not used to kissing anyone, but she kissed him back. Once, twice, three times. It still felt really strange, she thought.

He pulled away and raised a hand to touch her curly brown hair, playing with it.

“You’re so beautiful.”

“Thank you.” Katara tried to look into his eyes, but she was blushing too much and looked down at his orange and yellow clothes instead.

“So, how was it?” She asked. “Decolonization?”

“It was… a lot.”

She noticed the pain that had suddenly appeared on his face. 

“What does that mean?”

“A lot of emotions, a lot of drama, a lot of issues. Honestly, it was pretty awful. Some people just did not want to leave their homes. They were so mad at me. Furious. They got really mean, and stubborn, and refused to leave. They said we would have to drag them out in chains. Some people screamed at the government agents. And they yelled at me and Toph. People threw things at Appa—”

Her eyes went wide. “They threw things at Appa?!”

Aang sighed. “Just some teenage kids who didn’t want to leave their homes. They were angry. Appa didn’t get hurt.”

“I’m sorry it was so much trouble, Aang.”

“There were some actual fights. I had to arrest people.”

Katara’s eyebrows went up in shock. “Gods. I didn’t know it was that bad.”

“Yeah. It was really bad sometimes. I didn’t want to worry you. I’m gonna let them go soon— I mean, Zuko is, but he knows the deal. They’re only being held for about a week. But, still, it was… not easy . Not at all. Those people have lived there for their entire lives. It was so hard for them to leave. They didn’t want to move out of their houses.”

“Of course not.”

“The Fire Nationals who had married Earth Kingdom citizens could stay, and their kids could stay, but if couples weren’t married yet we had to tell them they either had to get married right away, or split up. Or both of them would have to come to the Fire Nation, but they have to get married here in the next two months or the Earth Kingdom one will be deported.”

“That’s messy.”

“No kidding.”

“How many couples like that were there? With a Firebender dating an Earthbender?”

“A few dozen, at least. Those people, the colonials, they’ve been living with Earthbenders for decades.”

Katara thought about the colonies. “But the Firebenders are the ones with all the money. The Earthbenders there are like—”

“Servants." Aang finished her sentence for her. "Yeah. Some of them are just commoners dating other commoners, but, yeah, lots of them are servants for the firebenders. Some of the wealthier Fire Nation families from the colonies sold their houses there and took all their servants with them here. I had to have some…” he made a strange face, “ interesting conversations with some of the governors and lords.”

“About what?”

“Well, the officials had to do paperwork on all the migrations, you know? They had to keep track of who was coming over to the Fire Nation and why. Especially any Earthbenders. It was pretty clear they wanted to limit the number of earthbenders coming over here as much as possible. Fire Nationals were allowed to take their servants with them, but they weren’t supposed to take just any random Earth Kingdom citizen with them that they wanted to. Some of the nobles had Earth Kingdom Nationals who they wanted to take over, and they were denied, so they came to me, because some of them had Earth Kingdom kids.”

“I thought you said their kids could come with them.”

“Well, yeah, they could. They did. But— some of them were… secret kids.”

Katara scowled. “Secret kids?”

“Some of the nobles had a Fire Nation wife, and had kids with her, but they also had several Earthbender kids with the locals. Out of wedlock.”

Katara’s eyes went wide. “Oh. Right.”

“That led to a lot of uncomfortable conversations. Some of them had Earthbender kids with servants or— just Earthbenders that they knew, I guess. And Earth Kingdom girlfriends. But they also had a Fire Nation wife, so they didn’t want to just come out and say that. Some of them were not pleased to be told they couldn’t bring their, you know, other women with them. They put up a fight. Zuko gave in to some of their requests, partly ‘cause he’s just desperate to have this whole thing behind him. He just wanted it to get done.”

“Gods. These people... Why would an Earth Kingdom woman even want to come with a married Fire Nation nobleman over here?” The judgment was clear on her face, brows drawn up in bafflement.

Aang shrugged. “A better life? I don’t know… Or… Love makes people do crazy things. Maybe that’s why. More Earthbenders came over here than we expected.”

“That’s gonna be… interesting,” Katara muttered, the worry clear in her voice.

“I mean, I talked to a few of the women in that position. I asked them why they would want to come here with a married Firebender. It seemed weird to me, too. Some of them said they were in love, they couldn’t stand to leave him, whatever— but for some of them it was more for financial reasons.”

“What?”

“The nobleman they were with was giving them money every month. Paying for an apartment for them. Giving them spending money. They didn’t have legitimate income to support themselves. So some of them went with the rich nobles. They didn’t want to just go out into the Earth Kingdom and work for a living. They preferred to move here, even if the guy was married, just ‘cause they wouldn’t have to work.”

“They’re just trusting that the guy will provide for them. What if he just breaks it off and then they’re stuck here? In a country full of racists? With no job? No connections? No prospects?”

“Believe me, we warned them about that. Some of them came anyway. And those situations weren’t the worst of it. Not at all. Some of the Fire Nation Colonials are just normal, decent, hard working people, and they built their houses out there with their own hands. And they had all these memories in their house. They had relatives… buried out there,” he cringed at that, “Some guy asked me if I would dig out his dead father and relocate his corpse to the Fire Nation, too.”

“Spirits.”

“I tried to explain everything, but some people just wouldn’t listen. They were so mad about it. And sad. People were crying. Every day. Moms and babies and— people’s old grandmas. I felt terrible. They think I’m a jerk. Not that many of them have anywhere to go now that they’re here. Only some of them could afford to buy another house. Only some of them could sell their house. Sometimes the Earth Kingdom just kind of… claimed them,” he cringed again. “And the wealth that was in that home was just kind of lost .”

“Right.”

“I feel really, really bad about that. I’ve made—” his face fell even more, frowning, “I’ve made a lot of people poor, Katara. I’ve made a lot of people homeless.”

“No.” Katara put her hands on the side of his face, trying to comfort him. “No. Aang, you didn’t do anything wrong. You didn’t cause this mess. Sozin did. And the Fire Nation. You’re not the one to blame. Those people were never supposed to be over there. This is the only way to move forward.”

“I know. But these people— they didn’t deserve to get pulled out of their homes. King Kuei is so serious about that. The Earth Kingdom kings wouldn’t cooperate with the Fire Nation, like, at all, unless all of the Fire Nationals were out of the colonies and the Earth Kingdom. And he’s right, technically speaking, because they are his lands, so I get it, but…”

“But it’s a mess,” she nodded.

“Exactly. And, honestly,” he started whispering, “it’s kind of cruel. He’s being a bit cruel.”

“Keui?” 

That made Katara reel. He always seemed so decent, she thought.

“Him and his administration.”

She scowled. “That doesn’t sound like him.” 

“Maybe they don’t see it like that… Or maybe they just like getting back at the Fire Nation this way, I dunno.”

Katara nodded slowly. “Yeah.”

“I’m gonna stay in the Fire Nation for a little while and help them get situated. And help Zuko, of course. I need to get these people some housing. And new jobs. I’m the one that took them out of their homes.”

“Okay.”

“I’ll try to help. Even though I’m not an expert at this, Gods know,” he groaned at himself.

“No one’s an expert at this. You’re doing a great job, Aang. And I want to stay here for a while, too. Why don’t we just stick together from here on out? Like old times.”

Nostalgia hit him like a wave. 

“Like old times,” he sighed in relief.

They made their way back to the couch, finding Zuko engaged in conversation with Sokka while the rest of the group listened in.

“One of my biggest problems right now is the Yakuza,” Zuko explained, “After the war ended, I had to put limits on the amount of food that people could buy. And I set price caps so the grocers couldn’t make insane profits off the deficits. I couldn’t have the rich families buying all the food that’s available and leaving the poor people with nothing.”

“Right.”

“I even gave out ration cards in the poorest areas so the people could have something to eat if they were out of work— and just ate the cost using national savings. But the Yakuza, they’re just—” he closed his eyes and sighed in frustration, “undercutting me at every turn. They're so fucking annoying. As soon as I put limits on food purchasing, they set up their own grocery stalls. As soon as I give out ration cards, they make fake ration cards and sell them, or some other bullshit.”

“Wait, who are the Yakuza?” Toph asked. She reached for her juice before relaxing back on the cushions.

“Crime families,” Mai answered, “Like— do you know the Nakamura-shizu?”

“Oh, yeah, yeah. Gangsters.”

Zuko nodded. “Yes, gangsters. Together, all the crime families here are called the Yakuza. They run all the black markets in the Fire Nation. Anything illegal. You name it. Illegal prostitution? Yakuza. Gambling? Yakuza. Money laundering, assassinations, extortion, blackmail, loan sharks, human trafficking, drug trafficking— all Yakuza. They’re downright evil. But this food thing is just so frustrating. Anyway they can make a coin, they’ll make it. They buy off the farmers or the middle merchants, or threaten them, or steal from them, and then they sell extra food to the richer people for a major profit. They scam the poor. And they're these two main guys, the crime bosses of the two main families— they’re causing so many problems.”

“What are their names?” Sokka asked.

“Kanzo Nakamura and Osamu Zaito. My informants are telling me they’re working together right now, trying to come up with something bigger. Some sort of epic scam with the new housing developments for colonials. And they’re planning something, apparently. I don’t know exactly, but, something like a construction strike, to try to get me to pay the construction workers more to get them back to work or something. And then the Yakuza will steal the money.” 

“They’re terrible,” Suki shook her head. “They should all be in prison.”

“That’s awful! I can help you deal with them, if you want,” Aang offered. “I mean, I can try to catch these guys. They’re criminals. Obviously.”

Despite the kind offer, Zuko didn’t seem pleased, faltering. “Yes, but— it’s dangerous.”

The thirteen year old Avatar made an amused face, looking a little cocky for a second. “I defeated your dad, Zuko. Are you telling me he wasn’t dangerous, but these Yakuza guys are?”

“Of course he was,” Zuko rolled his eyes, “I meant dangerous for me. Not you. It’s dangerous for the federal government. Right now things are bad with the Yakuza, but they’re not my enemies, per se. I mean— in a way they are, but we’re not fighting an all out civil war with them or anything. If we piss them off, and take their leaders and put them in prison, it’s possible we’ll just make things worse. And make them do even more to get in my way. Especially if it’s you stopping them and not me… It’ll look like you’re running my country.”

Aang huffed. “I’m not! I’m just trying to help people. That’s my job. If the Yakuza are making life miserable for people, then it’s my duty to try and stop them.”

“That’s very noble of you, Aang, and I get that it’s your job, but you don’t really understand all of it—”

“What don’t I understand? ” Aang sat up, frustration evident on his face.

“These families used to be royalty in their own right,” Zuko explained, “A long time ago. Back when there were lots of feudal kings in the Fire Nation, not just one Firelord. Some of the kings who didn’t make it were killed, and the rest went underground. They still have money, and power and… influence. They have people’s respect in some areas. Or, at least fear. Plus, they can technically challenge me anytime they want.”

Katara scowled at that. “I thought you outlawed Agni Kais.”

“He did,” Mai muttered.

“I’m not talking about Agni Kais. I’m talking about challenging my rule as a group. They can try to take my throne by force.”

“How?”

Zuko got heated, gesticulating, “Like, get an army and march on the capital and try to overthrow me and my court. Or stage a coup. They tried to overthrow one of my ancestors—” he looked away, thinking, “I don’t remember. Sozin’s grandfather, maybe?”

“Great-grandfather,” Mai answered.

“Right. And they just barely lost. There was this big civil war between the head Yakuza family and my family hundreds of years ago. I have to think about this shit carefully, I can’t just do things without thinking like I normally do.”

Toph laughed loudly. “Good idea, hotman. Thanks again for burning my feet, by the way.”

Zuko gave her a look. “Hotman?”

Aang waved it off. “It’s slang from a hundred years ago. Look, I understand what you’re saying, but let me at least see if I could help somehow. It doesn’t even have to be me. It could be the Kyoshi warriors, maybe, or our other friends. We’re here to help you. We should at least have a meeting about it. Ask your advisors and stuff like that.”

“Sure. Thank you, Aang. I don’t mean to sound ungrateful, it’s just that being Firelord…” he looked down and sighed, “It’s complicated. I have to think about my citizen’s reactions to things. And the Yakuza’s reaction.”

“I get that it’s complicated. Trust me,” he raised his eyebrows, “I do.”

“Let’s talk about something else,” Ty Lee suggested. People in the group turned to look at her. “This is depressing. Katara, Sokka, how are things going in your tribe? You’re rebuilding, right?”

“Yeah, we are,” Sokka answered. “It’s going pretty great. All the men are back home, so we have lots of people to help build. Zuko ruined our old wall when he crashed into it with his ship,” he looked over at the Firelord, “Thanks again for that, by the way,” he mocked, like Toph had. 

Zuko sighed at himself. “Sorry.”

“It’s fine. We made a much bigger wall this time, with a nice gate. Plenty of space inside for new houses. We’ve built a lot of new igloos, too, and we finally have a Great Hall again! Like old times. It’s really big. It has this giant fire pit in the middle. It’s nice and toasty in there, even on the coldest days. And we built a smokehouse for the meat. Oh! And I rebuilt my watchtower, ‘cause Zuko destroyed my last one, of course—” he chuckled as Zuko put a hand over his face, “But we still have a lot to do. The men are working on building more igloos. And we wanna put up some larger buildings. Now that we have the stuff, we can start building them. And we want to make a government building and a marketplace. And a healing center, eventually. And an inn.” 

“I don’t think we’re gonna charge people to stay there, though,” Katara added, “It’ll be more like a guest house, so when people visit from other nations, they have somewhere to stay.”

“We haven’t really decided yet.”

“You all make decisions together?” Mai asked.

“Yeah. My dad is the Head Chieftain, but he doesn’t make any decisions alone. The elders have to agree with what he’s doing. And most of the tribe needs to agree, too.”

“The Northern Water tribe people are still there, right?” Toph asked. 

Katara nodded. “A few of them. Some are going back soon, though. And some more people are coming down in a few months. A different group.”

“They’re bringing women,” Sokka chimed in, smirking a little.

“Yes, they’re bringing women,” Katara droned at him, nearly rolling her eyes.

“Excited about that, are you?” Suki teased Sokka, and Katara didn’t know if it was really a joke. 

Sokka made a face. “Nah, ‘course not. I got the best girl right here.” He gave her a hug and Suki softened after he kissed her a few times.

Katara looked down at her fruit juice and wondered for a second if she was still a little sour about Sokka and a certain Northern Water Tribe princess. 

“All right, we’ve all had about enough of that. Thanks,” Toph complained, groaning. 

“What?” Sokka asked loudly. “What’s your problem?”

“Look, we’re all happy for you two, but, come on. Not in front of everyone.”

“You can’t even see!” He tossed back. 

“I can still hear you. Even that’s enough. I’m sure glad I don’t have to look at it. What about Zuko and Mai? They’re a couple. Do you see them kissing in front of everyone every five seconds? No.”

Sokka made a face, even though Toph couldn’t see it. “We’re just passionate.”

“That’s fine. Just please don’t be so passionate in each other’s mouths.”

“Okay, we’ll stop. We’ll stop,” Suki said quickly, shifting away from Sokka on the couch. “Katara, how’s waterbending training been going? Have you been practicing with Pakku?”

“Yeah, I have. It’s been pretty great, but he’s tough. Oh, there’s actually another Southern Tribe waterbender now! I forgot to say that in my letters.”

“Let’s see it, Sokka,” Zuko teased, reaching over to pick up a shrimp-crab puff. “You’re really a late bloomer, aren’t you?”

“Not me,” he laughed, “it’s this little boy, Kurati. He’s four.”

“I’ve been teaching him how to bend a little. Of course, he can barely do anything now, but it’s so great to have another southern bender!”

Zuko smiled when he saw how happy Katara was. He was used to seeing her be angry all the time before the end of the war. 

“Of course, it is,” Suki chimed in. “That’s great. There should be a lot more now that people down there are gonna be having kids with Northern benders.”

“Only a few. Just some of the men who were away at war. Bato married a Northern bender. But the women left in our tribe are all married,” Sokka explained, “except Katara.”

“But, they’re marrying waterbending women?”

“That’s the plan, yeah. We’ll see if they get along,” she laughed a little, thinking of her grandmother and Pakku. “Our cultures are pretty different.”

“Are there arranged marriages in the Water Tribes?” Toph asked.

“Yeah. But they’re not common in the Southern Tribe anymore. Haven’t been for a while.”

“We marry for love,” Sokka said in a funny voice, looking over at his pretty Earth Kingdom girlfriend. 

Suki pushed his face away playfully. “You.”

“So, none of the marriages are arranged?” Zuko asked.

“Not really. Not in the south. We’re just gonna let them get to know the women who are coming down and see if they get along. They’ll get married if they want to, not ‘cause they have to.”

“In our tribe we would never force people to get married if they don’t want to,” Katara explained.

“Hah,” Toph laughed, “Where I come from the girl doesn’t even get a say in it. Your parents and the matchmakers just decide and tell you when your wedding is going to be and who you’re marrying.”

“Rough.”

“What about here? Do people have arranged marriages in the Fire Nation?” Toph asked.

“They’re really uncommon now,” Zuko answered, taking a sip from his glass, “Some of them are kind of arranged. Sometimes families set up their children together, but the marriages aren’t forced. That’s considered very old-fashioned here.”

“Basically everyone chooses their spouse here now,” Mai added.

“So, people here marry for love?” 

“Yeah.”

“Who’d expect the Fire Nation to have such a moral stance on marriage?” Sokka joked, a little snidely.

Zuko and Mai both looked at him for a moment but let the comment pass.

“What are we gonna do tonight? Any ideas?” Ty Lee smirked, a mischievous look in her eyes.

“Do you want to suggest something, Ty?” Mai asked knowingly.

“Sure!” She responded a half-second later. “The girls and I learned some new games. They’re really fun! I’ll teach everybody.”

A servant entered the room quietly, head bowed deeply in deference to Zuko, and kneeled before him, looking down at the ground. 

Zuko barely noticed but Katara couldn’t look away from the man, finding the idea of having such deferential servants totally bizarre.

“Yes?” He asked.

“Dinner is served, Your Majesty.”

“Thank you. We’ll be over shortly.”

The servant merely bowed again and walked away, head still hung low.

When the man was out the door Sokka shook his head and poured himself a drink.

“‘Your Majesty’,” he mocked, chuckling, “I’m sure glad I don’t have to call you that.”

“Well, you’re supposed to,” Zuko responded quickly, to the shock of most of the group. “That or ‘Firelord Zuko’. But I won’t make you.”

Sokka exhaled in relief, or possibly annoyance.

“People are gonna talk, though,” Mai added. 

“It doesn’t matter.”

“Talk about what?” Katara spoke up, feeling strange about their back and forth.

“The way you two act around him isn’t proper,” Mai explained, “I mean, Zuko and I have never been one for following all the rules, or caring about them, but you two really push that line.” 

“Us?” Sokka asked loudly, a little shocked. “What did we do?”

“You both hugged him outside. In public. And you didn’t bow. And you called him ‘buddy’.”

Sokka made a face. “That’s the big issue?”

“In the old days you would have been put to death for that.”

“No one’s allowed to touch the Firelord without being told to,” Ty Lee explained, “There are a ton of rules about honoring the Firelord. I’m sure you just don’t know about them. You’re not supposed to touch the Firelord, or use his given name without permission, or look at him without permission, or speak before kowtowing—”

“Ty Lee, don’t.” Zuko cut her off and turned to Sokka and Katara. “It’s fine. You don’t need to bow or any of that. We’re friends. Just…” he thought about his words for a moment, “don’t call me ‘buddy’ in public. That is a bit too informal.”

“I…” Sokka averted his gaze, and Katara still didn’t know if he was angry or embarrassed, “I’m sorry for making a scene. I had no idea. You’re my friend. I didn’t think I had to bow or any of that. We don’t do those things in the Water Tribes. I’m not used to it.”

“I know. Don’t worry about it. I’m not mad.”

“We weren’t trying to be disrespectful,” Katara spoke up, feeling a little embarrassed herself.

“I know that. It’s okay. We have weird rules in the Fire Nation. People act one way in public and another way in private. Like, it’s fine to call me that when we’re alone like this, but not out in the open in front of servants. It’s disrespectful to use my first name in public.”

“And people are supposed to bow to the Firelord in public, even if you know him,” Mai explained.

“I had no idea we had to do that,” Sokka put his hands up. “I thought that was for strangers.”

“No. I’m not trying to upset you or anything," Mai insisted, "I just want to make you aware. I don’t know if anyone’s ever talked to you about our customs or anything.”

“No.”

“Well, now you know. I just wouldn’t want people to say bad things about you. You don’t deserve it. I know you don’t mean to be disrespectful.”

“You’re trying to say because we don’t bow to him and stuff, people are gonna think that we’re savages? That we’re uncivilized?”

“They already think that,” Zuko answered boldly, “But I don’t care about their stupid opinions. I know what you’re like. A person can have all the social graces in the world but be a complete snake under it all. That kind of thinking is stupid. Out of all the people in the world right now, you and your tribe actually respect me the most. You agreed to trade with me. That matters a lot more than something as superficial as bowing.”

The air was tense as Sokka and Katara thought about his words.

“That’s a good point,” Suki answered.

“Yeah, I agree… But I don’t like that people here see us as savages, either,” Katara spoke her mind, setting down her drink on the table.

“Katara,” Zuko said, making her look up at him, “Those people we’re talking about— they hate everyone in this room. And they look down on all of us, in different ways. Including me. We’re just gonna have to prove them wrong.”

Katara nodded, looking down at her lap.

“Come on, let’s eat.”

He stood and the rest of the group followed suit, following him to the main dining room.

After courses of roast duck, shrimp-crab, gyoza, sauteed noodles, vegetables, and soup, as well as a bottle of top-shelf soju, any embarrassment from before had been forgotten. After dinner, Ty Lee’s games had kept the group entertained for hours, and gotten the older ones a little drunk, so the group decided to call it a night. 

Zuko walked them to the Royal Annex himself, his arm affectionately wrapped around Mai’s waist as he did so.

To the group’s surprise, he led them down a set of stairs into a long underground hallway rather than out the front door. It was quite dark inside, only dimly lit with low hanging lanterns.

“Why aren’t we staying in the palace?” Katara asked.

“The Royal Annex is designed for guests. It’s the guest house.”

“Okay.” Katara found it odd, but she found lots of things odd in the Fire Nation. It was a strange country.

“It’s weird that we have to go underground to get there,” Toph spoke up.

“We don’t,” Zuko explained, “It’s just easier this way. It’s a lot more hassle to go out the gate and have the whole royal entourage walk with us over there when it only takes a few minutes.”

Suki stumbled a little bit and Sokka pulled her upright, giggling as he did so. 

“Are you okay?” Katara asked, glancing back at them over her shoulder. “You drank too much.”

“I’m fine,” Suki responded with a smile, a heavy blush on her cheeks. 

“If any of you puke tonight, I’m gonna sleep outside with Appa. I don’t care,” Toph complained.

“Oh my gods, I’m fine,” Suki shot back, a little too loudly.

“How long is this hallway?” Sokka complained.

When they came to another set of doors, the group watched curiously as Zuko flipped open a cover to a box inlaid on the wall and set a series of characters into order on a strange puzzle lock before inserting a small key. A loud click resounded in the metal hallway.

“What was that noise?” Toph asked. “The door?”

“Yup.”

Zuko reset the lock and shut the cover on the box before opening the set of doors for everyone.

“What is that thing? Some kind of security lock?” Sokka walked over to it and squatted down, wobbly, opening the cover and looking inside at the unusual combination of characters inscribed on rings on a brass cylinder. “I wanna figure out how it works.”

“Some other time, when you’re not drunk,” Zuko chuckled, pulling on his arm to get him to stand up.

After ascending a long set of stairs the group was outside suddenly, and the cool night air felt like a stark change from the inside of the palace. They followed Zuko down a marble pathway surrounded by greenery. Even at night, the gardens seemed vast and impeccably maintained. Condensation on the lush grass and perfectly trimmed shrubbery shimmered in the moonlight, and elegant lanterns lit their path. 

“These are the Royal Gardens. The Annex is this entire building. It’s set up around the garden, Fire Nation style. There are a few different living rooms inside. And dining rooms, too. Everyone has their own bathroom and veranda.”

“There aren’t any babysitters, are there?”

“What?” Zuko asked, baffled by the question.

“When we stayed in Ba Sing Se there was this annoying lady assigned by the Dai Li to like,” Sokka stopped to hiccup, “Babysit us, basically. She followed us everywhere. It was suuuper annoying.”

“No one’s babysitting you. That’s ridiculous. You’re my guests. Just don’t steal anything or trash my rooms and there’ll be no problems.”

“Perfect.”

“There’s a whole staff here, including a head housemaid, Aria, and a head butler, but they’re here to help you, not to tell you what to do.”

“Wait— we get servants?” Sokka asked.

Zuko made a face. “My servants are going to help you because you’re guests, yeah. You can ask for things. But don’t be mean to them.”

“Why would we be mean to them?” Aang asked in confusion.

“I don’t know. Just don’t. First rule of being royalty: don’t piss off the servants, or they’ll kill you.” 

Toph laughed loudly at that. “True story.”

“Are we expected to tip them?” Katara asked.

“No.” 

After showing everyone the lavish common areas and to their rooms only Katara was left. Zuko approached the last room at the end of the hallway.

“This will be your room.” 

He opened the door for her and she smiled a bit, walking inside.

“Thank you.”

As Katara stepped into the room she was immediately taken aback by how elegant and refined the space was. Every surface was so smooth— the floor, the tabletops, the silk curtains. She watched Zuko use firebending to light a lamp by the door. The large four-poster bed on the opposite side of the entrance looked so grand with its silk bed coverings and nightstands bearing lanterns.  She turned to take in the rest of the room. There were wardrobes, dressers, closets, and even a sitting area.

“The bathroom is through that door right there.”

“I have my own?”

“Yeah. Do you like the room?”

“I do. It’s really pretty. I just never really thought I’d be staying here again. I don’t know why…” she muttered, walking around, checking out the spacious bathroom complete with a full sunken bathtub and a separate water closet.

“Last time, everything was different,” he responded.

Zuko thought back on it. Katara mending his wounds, comforting him, and healing him with her waterbending. It was all surreal. The world was in a state of suspended belief. Complete chaos. He could hardly believe that he lived through it, let alone live to become the Firelord and have Mai back. It was all due to Katara. He knew that much. No one else could have saved him in that state.

“Thank you again… for healing me,” he added softly, touching the place on his stomach where the scar would have been if Katara hadn’t healed him.

“Thank you for saving my life,” she responded easily.

She walked over to give him a hug. Zuko hugged her back, sighing as he did so. 

“I’m not gonna get in trouble for that, right? We’re in private,” she teased, but Zuko’s face was still serious.

“...I’m sorry it took me so long to switch sides, Katara.” He looked away, bearing his scar to her, “I know I screwed up. I think about it a lot… and I regret it so much. So much. I can’t even explain. What I did in Ba Sing Se—”

“You don’t have to go through it all again. I know. I know you’re sorry. You said you’d change and you have. And I told you I’d forgive you, and I have. I’m looking forward to the future, Zuko. We don’t have to talk about the past all the time. I trust you enough to stay with you now and work with you. The war is behind us. We have to look forward.”

“The war’s behind us… but there are still a lot of problems here. So many. And I feel— please don’t tell anyone this, but I feel like I can barely do this. Running the country. It’s so difficult right now. My people are starving out there… Jobless. Homeless. And I’m trying so hard to fix it but sometimes I just get stuck. I can’t figure out how to fix all these problems overnight. My entire country was used to the war, and having the colonies, and now… now I don’t know what to do.”

“You’ll figure it out. With our help. We’re here to help you, not just to visit. And we just brought food. Plenty of it. So many barrels of fish and squid and sea kelp that I lost count. That’s a start. And there are other things to do. We’ll help you with this, I promise. You don’t have to do it alone.” She put her hand on his shoulder. “You have us now.”

Zuko smiled a little at that, relieved that even if he didn’t have the support of his people, at least he had the support of his friends.

He would take what he could get.

Chapter Text

“One man who stopped lying could bring down a tyranny.”

 — Aleksandr Solzhenitsyn, The Gulag Archipelago

101AG, Fire Nation Capital, Royal Annex

That night, Katara dreamt of a memory from long ago, one of the precious few days she remembered with her mother. When their family had been complete. 

Katara, her brother, mother, father, and grandmother were all seated around a central fire-pit in their family’s igloo, warming up after a long day of hunting and chores had kept them busy during the daylight hours. Parkas had long been stripped off and hung on their hooks near the entrance, and Kanna was busy stirring a pot of fish and seal soup, bubbling away by the fire.

Her mother, Kya, was kneeling comfortably on the floor, tanning a caribou-bear hide. Katara enjoyed watching her mother tan it so skillfully, scraping with a practiced hand. Sokka, however, had his gaze on his father, wide-eyed as Hakoda described the process of the men’s hunt that day. He was totally entranced and amazed by the story, which Hakoda exaggerated for the enjoyment of his young son. Katara watched her mother give him a knowing smile and playfully shake her head at him before looking up from the hide, subtly signaling with her blue gaze that he shouldn’t hyperbolize his stories so much for Sokka’s amusement.

A knock at the door stirred Katara awake, and she struggled to come back to reality in her sleepy state. She stirred under the silk-covered duvet, sitting up and rubbing her tired, bleary eyes. There was only a dim morning light coming in from around the edges of the curtains behind her. She quickly scanned the room, struck by the odd sensation of waking up in an unfamiliar place, one filled with elegant, polished wood furniture, potted plants, and beautiful watercolor paintings on the walls. Another knock on the door made her sigh, and she begrudgingly pulled her legs over the edge of the bed, slipped on her house slippers, and walked over to the door, opening it just a little. A young plain-faced servant stood before her, one with brown eyes and a brown livery. Said servant simply looked at her for a moment before lowering her gaze deferentially and bowing slightly.

“Good morning, Miss Katara.”

“Good morning,” she responded softly, clearing her throat. “Can I help you?”

The servant paused for a moment, put off by the question. “Firelord Zuko has rung the dressing gong, miss. My name is Su Ni. I’ll be serving you this morning.”

“Firelord Zuko has rung the dressing gong? ” She repeated, visibly confused. She rubbed her eyes again.

The servant bowed again, as if nodding. “Yes, miss.”

“I’m sorry, but you’re going to have to explain that a bit, Su Ni. I’m a foreigner,” she cringed a little at her own comment, “obviously. I don’t know your customs here.”

“Ah. Yes,” she stuttered, “certainly, Miss Katara. I understand. Firelord Zuko requests your presence at the court breakfast in the Royal Palace. He rang the dressing gong a few minutes ago; that means that the servants are expected to start helping the guests and any others attending to prepare for breakfast. I’m here to dress you and to help you get ready. Then you will be escorted to the formal dining room in the Royal Palace.”

“Okay. Thank you. I don’t really need any help, though. I don’t know what you would help me with.”

The servant looked awkward for a moment, as if she had never heard such a response. 

“I… I can help you prepare your outfit, miss. And style your hair, or do your makeup. Anything you need.”

“I don’t really wear makeup, but, okay,” I guess, she thought to herself, “come on in.”

Once Katara had opened the door the servant stepped in and quickly made her way to the closet. Katara closed the door and watched Su Ni open the wardrobe, shocked to find only two dresses inside: a pale blue winter dress and a darker blue spring dress with white trim, both in the Water Tribe style.

“Which dress would you like to wear today, Miss Katara?”

“The pale blue one, please.” 

She almost wanted to ask ‘What should I do now?’ as Su Ni laid the dress out for her on the bed and laid out her leggings. It felt like she was playing a role in the theater she didn’t understand.

Su Ni turned to face her, hands clasped respectfully in front. “Would you like me to run a bath for you, or prepare a shower?”

“No, thank you. I took a bath last night.” 

What’s a shower? She thought to herself. Like, a rain shower?

Su Ni nodded. “I’ll prepare the sink basin, then, and lay out some face soap for you.”

“Okay.” She picked up the dress from the bed. “I’m gonna change quickly.”

She faltered, looking at Su Ni briefly as the woman went to prepare the bathroom. The sliding door to the bathroom was open, and for a second she watched the servant open a carved wooden cabinet, retrieving soaps and a towel, then laying them out by the sink basin. Katara found the scenario odd. Changing in front of a woman was normal, but, in front of a complete stranger, and a firebender, at that? It felt too peculiar, so she stepped into the walk-in-closet to change, shutting the door behind her. 

When she came out with her dress on and pajamas in hand she noticed Su Ni looked up at her. She had been stripping the bedding off, but she paused, catching her gaze before looking at the closet and putting two-and-two together. Without a word she went back to stripping the bed, pulling the sheet off of the feather-down mattress. 

“Is there something wrong with it?” Katara asked, a little confused as she put her pajamas back in her dresser.

“What, miss?”

“The bed. Is there something wrong? Why are you taking all the bedding away?”

She put her socks on, then started pulling on her boots. Katara wouldn’t have asked it, nor would she have even wanted to think about it, but she vaguely wondered if people from the Fire Nation thought she was dirty and washing the sheets after only one night was a show of demonstrating that. 

“No, Miss Katara. Nothing is wrong. All linens and bed silks are washed daily in the Royal Palace and the Annex. For your comfort. I’ll replace them with freshly laundered ones in a minute. And, I’ll add some fresh nightgowns to your dresser, if you want to use them.”

“Thanks. I’ll just finish getting ready, then.”

She entered the bathroom and threw her braid behind her shoulder before leaning over the gold basin, filled with water. After washing her face, she dried herself off with a hand towel, and upon opening her eyes she realized Su Ni was standing right beside her, reaching into a drawer.

“Oh!"

"Sorry to startle you, miss," she responded quickly.

Katara turned to her. "What are you doing?”

“I—" Su Ni, stuttered, looking down at the tile countertop, "I’m preparing some combs and pins so I can style your hair for you. Would you like me to straighten it, quickly? I can get the straightener ready.”

Katara scowled, looking down at the countertop as well, where Su Ni had laid out wax in a jar, bamboo combs of different sizes, hair pins, and some kind of hair straightening tong with flat ends made out of metal.

“No, I’ll do my own hair. Thank you, though.”

Su Ni blinked at her, like she was speaking a foreign language. “You don’t want me to style your hair?”

“No." Katara cringed, hoping she wasn't coming off as rude. "Thank you, but I'm very particular about my hair, and it only takes me a minute or two to braid it myself, anyway. I don’t straighten it. And I don't wear makeup. But I appreciate the offer,” she tried to be polite despite the early hour, but hoped the woman would leave her be.  

Su Ni bowed and walked out. On that awkward note, Katara closed the bathroom door behind her, leaving the servant to wallow in confusion in the bedroom as she put on fresh bedding. When she had finished getting herself ready a few minutes later, Su Ni was gone, fresh bed-silks already in place, and she sighed before stepping out into the hall.

And yet again, Su Ni was there, head down in deference, along with a male servant in a slightly different livery with a matching headcovering. 

“May I escort you to the Imperial Palace, Miss Katara?” The other servant asked. 

A moment passed as Katara looked between them both, wondering about the oddity that was the serving class. She would never have imagined herself being around them, let alone having them at her disposal. 

"Yes, thank you. Can we pick up my brother Sokka before we head over?”

“He’s already in the dining room in the Imperial Palace, miss. All the other guests have already arrived.”

“I guess I’m late, then. Let’s go.”

She followed the escort down the long, elegant hallways of the Annex, out into the immaculate Royal Gardens, down a long marble path, then through a gate into the open expanse of the central plaza, where they walked amongst servants and some upper class citizens until they reached the gigantic gate of the palace. The morning sun was already beaming down on her and Katara narrowed her gaze, barely catching the side eyes and strange glances from nobles and servants using the plaza as a thoroughfare. When talking, a few of them would stop just to stare at her before whispering to one another.

It hurt to be looked at in such a way, and gossiped about behind her back. The whole ordeal set her in a strange mood, and made her feel like a fish out of water. For a moment she cringed when she realized she hadn’t taken her leather waterskin with her. It felt odd to be unarmed, especially in the Fire Nation of all places, but then she realized a fight was very unlikely given that she was a guest of the Firelord. Still, it was hard to not be a little concerned, because she could feel the hostility in the air, and the fact that she was very obviously unwelcome, even though they couldn’t say anything to her face.

By the time she had followed the servant through the dark and opulent hallways of the palace, and finally reached the dining room, everyone had already begun eating. She looked around red-walled room briefly. A gigantic white, gold, and black abstract landscape mural of misty mountains occupied the entire wall opposite her, stretching up at least ten feet towards the arched ceiling, from which elegant lanterns hung, suspended in mid-air above the enormous black dining table. It easily seated everyone in their group, with room for more, as well as an array of different foods all arranged on Fire Nation style dishes. The delicious smells peaked her appetite as she approached the table, looking over at Firelord Zuko, seated at a special ornate chair at the end of the table. She glanced at the gold fire emblem hairpiece in his topknot, then down at his burgundy, black, and gold robes. It was odd to see him so formally dressed.

“Hi, everyone. Good morning.”

Everyone said ‘hello’ and ‘good morning’ back. She caught a glimpse of a servant preparing something at a side table and then moved her gaze over to her boyfriend, next to which there was clearly a reserved seat for her. He was clad in his more formal yellow religious robes that day, with the wooden airbender necklace around his neck. Katara blinked at the sight; she hadn’t seen him in that outfit since the day of Zuko’s coronation.

Aang smiled up at her sweetly. “Saved you a seat.”

A servant pulled back her chair so she could sit before she could even ask. 

“Thank you. Sorry I’m late.”

Aang brushed it off. “Don’t worry. How'd you sleep?"

"Fine. Well, actually." She looked around the table. "Where's Ty Lee?" 

"She's hungover," Suki replied. "She's sleeping in."

"Oh," Katara responded simply, remembering why she generally avoided alcohol.

As soon as she sat down a servant filled her cup with steaming hot black tea, and she looked over the small dishes set up in front of her: steamed rice, cooked salmon, miso soup with tofu, nori salad, a tamagoyaki omelet, and grilled cow-pig skewers. Her mouth began to water at the sights and smells of such flavorful and well-cooked foods. Katara loved her homeland, and she had a few favorite dishes from home, but Southern Water Tribe food had nothing on Fire Nation or Earth Kingdom food, simply because of the difference in variety and spices available. She picked up a grilled beef-pork skewer, her mouth watering at the wonderful smell.

“Is anything going to be spicy?” She asked the table before she took a bite.

Zuko smirked a little. “No.” 

She looked up at him, surprised to see him reading a newspaper at breakfast.

Mai added, “Only the dipping sauce for the meat, but you can just eat it plain.”

“Thanks.” 

She took a bite of the meat and enjoyed the rich flavor, looking up at Suki and Sokka across the table. They were talking between themselves, but quietly, so she had no idea what they were saying. Toph was ignoring them, fully concentrating on eating. Her gaze drifted right, to Mai, sitting at Zuko’s right-hand, and thought it was interesting given the early hour of the morning. 

As Sokka and Suki dropped their apparently private conversation, there was silence for a moment, and Katara decided to break it, curiosity getting the best of her. 

“I’m a little surprised you came over just for breakfast, Mai. It’s so early. You two must be really close,” she said, looking between the Fire Nation couple, deciding to tease them. “Does the dressing gong ring at her house, too?” 

Both Mai and Zuko just stared at her, straight-faced. Zuko folded his newspaper and set it down on the table.

“No, Katara. She lives with me.”

Shock was clear on her face, her brows raised up. Katara assumed it was just another Fire Nation custom she had never heard of, that guests stay in the Annex and girlfriends stay in their own room in the palace.

“So, she lives here, in the Royal Palace? And has her own room?” 

The young Firelord almost felt embarrassed for a moment. “Uh… no, not her own room.” 

Zuko had a cheeky smirk on his face as he tried to keep himself from laughing, but Sokka openly chuckled from across the table, and Suki tried to stifle a giggle, as well.

Mai rolled her eyes at them, looking over at Katara. “We live together.”

Katara blinked, a bit confused for a moment. Mai hadn't answered her question. “You live together?” 

“We’re sleeping together,” Zuko clarified brashly, putting an end to the confusion. “We sleep in the same bed.”

Chuckles erupted around the table at that.

“Oh! I’m sorry, I didn’t understand, just— ‘cause you're not married,” she commented awkwardly, waving her hand as if to dismiss the issue. “Nevermind, sorry.” 

Katara felt embarrassment take over, warming her face. She knew people in the Fire Nation slept with each other outside of marriage sometimes, but she had never expected Zuko and Mai to do it so openly, and especially not without any kind of comment before that morning. She mentally berated herself for being so inquisitive all the time, and asking too many questions. With all the servants lining the room, it felt like extra eyes on her, silently judging her. Or maybe judging Zuko and Mai, she didn’t know. They were as silent and expressionless as the statues next to which they stood.

“Katara’s so innocent, she probably couldn't even put that together,” Sokka commented, reaching for another meat skewer. 

“Relationships must be really different in your tribe,” Zuko commented quietly. “Old-fashioned.” 

She looked up at him, catching his gold eyes on her as he took a bite of his omelet, and actually blushed a little. Sex had never come up in their discussions before. It felt strange to discuss sex in front of so many people, and she averted her gaze. 

“Well… yeah.”

Mai made a bit of a face at that. “I mean, living together while dating isn't common here, but you all actually wait until marriage?" She droned. "Seriously?”

She pursed her lips. Mai was leaving out the obvious end to her question, but Katara understood what she meant: living together before marriage was a bit taboo in the Fire Nation, but sex before marriage was ubiquitous.

“Uh, pretty much, yeah. We wait until marriage. It’s— We’re not allowed to sleep with anyone before marriage in our culture. It’s kind of a rule.”

Firelord Zuko raised his good brow at Sokka comically, making him chuckle again under a barely concealed smile. After dropping Suki and Sokka off in a bedroom together the night before, that rule didn’t seem to be very effective. 

Katara picked up on the hint, making a noise in her throat. “Not that my brother obeys that. So, I guess, not everyone.”

Sokka shrugged. “Yeah, I’m not really one for that rule. I’m a bit less traditional when it comes to that sort of stuff. I mean, we already have to break a lot of our old rules in order to survive. For a long time there was a rule that you can only marry someone from the Water Tribes. We have to break that rule now because most of the women left between our tribes are married, or my own relatives. So, I pretty much have to be with someone who's not water tribe, anyway."

"You couldn't marry one of the northern waterbenders?" Zuko asked.

"Well, I could, if I was single, if," he emphasized, looking over at Suki. "Don't kill me," he teased, "but it's kind of complicated and... hard to explain. There's actually a bit of..." he pressed his lips together, trying to find the right words, "tension between our tribes."

"Really?"

"Yeah. And, to be quite honest, a northern girl would probably look down on me. I mean, Yue didn't, but a normal girl there probably would."

"Look down on you?" Mai asked.

"They think they're better than us," Katara explained, taking a sip of her tea. "They think they're more cultured and better at keeping the traditions and just more— sophisticated isn't really the right word."

"They think they're better," Sokka explained, clearly a bit frustrated by the idea. "More religious. Better at worshiping the spirits and the gods. And they're so traditional. I mean, stuck, like three- hundred years in the past kind of traditional. They're sexist. They don't like outsiders, generally. Men can have multiple wives. Only men can hunt. Women don't learn to read—"

"Except royalty. Sorry, Sokka," she apologized, raising a hand, "keep going."

"Women don't learn to read, except royalty. They can't do things without the permission of their father or husband. They can't bend, except to heal. Only men can fight, and read, and own a house, and— you get the picture. They have a million rules, and take the religious eating practices and ceremonies in our culture super seriously. We're just—" he made a face again, "we're different. Very different. And we're trying to work past our differences and come together, but it's hard. It's hard for us and it's hard for them, too."

"I thought you said that some of their women were coming over to your tribe, though," Zuko scowled, thinking. He picked up his teacup again, relaxing back in his chair. "So, what are they, the discards?"

Sokka laughed out loud at that, then covered his mouth and realized he probably shouldn't have. Katara tried not to laugh as well.

"You just say the quiet part out loud, don't you Zuko?" Katara chuckled, shaking her head. "That's a mean way to talk about them, though. And that's not really accurate. Let's just say, they're the women who didn't get married at sixteen like everybody else in the Northern tribe. But, also, some of that is because the only available men left for them up there were their cousins, so they need to meet different guys."

"Also, from what I understand, some of the women coming down are being sent away because they were a little too, how do ya say... feisty?" He made a playful expression, and Aang laughed.

"We're getting all the feminists," Katara commented. 

"Because they sure don't want 'em," Sokka said through a laugh. "They don't. But, anyway, I actually think it’s kinda nice you two are living together.” He looked over at them. “I know Zuko wanted to get back together with you after the war. Wasn’t sure he was gonna be able to pull that off.”

“But I did,” Zuko grinned at that, and Mai playfully swatted his arm. 

“Things are different in our tribe, though,” he continued. “Katara’s right. I wouldn’t do this at home,” he vaguely looked in Suki’s direction, “People are old-fashioned there. Not like the Northern Tribe, but still old-fashioned. Gran-gran would be mad. And my dad, too.”

“Our traditions are really different. For sure. And our way of life. This is a culture shock, being here,” Katara said the obvious part out loud, hoping it would clear the air a bit, and make her feel more normal. 

“We’ve already been in the Fire Nation before, Katara,” Aang responded, looking over at her.

“Yeah, but... I’m a fish out of water right now.”

“Why?” 

She glanced around the tall, ornate, unbelievably fancy dining room for a moment, realizing that the trees on the huge mural on the other side of the room were done with real gold paint. A male servant standing in front of the mural caught her gaze and she looked down, picking up her chopsticks again.

“Maybe because the Capital is different. I don't know. I’ve been at home for six months, in the middle of nowhere, with just my tribe. This is a huge city. And, other things, too. I mean, I don’t understand the thing about the servants dressing us. We don’t have servants at home. Why have them in your bedrooms? Why don’t you all dress yourselves?”

Zuko and Mai exchanged glances, thinking. It was a little awkward to discuss servants while servants were lined up around the edges of the room, ready to refill glasses and take away empty plates, all of them listening. 

“It’s tradition,” Zuko answered. He didn’t know what else to say. “It’s a profession. An honorable profession. They’re coveted positions, actually. You get to live in the Royal Palace. Eat great food. And it’s a good income. A lot of my servants send the extra money they don’t need back to their family members in the countryside.”

“I didn’t mean I don’t understand why they do it," she clarified, "I meant I don't understand why the upper class here started hiring them in the first place.”

“So we don’t have to cook every meal and wash every dish and do our own laundry,” Zuko droned monotonously, nearly rolling his eyes. “And take out the trash. I can take out the trash on my own, but I’d really rather not.”

Toph laughed at that. But Katara glanced over at Mai again, still wondering about them. These Fire Nation nobles.

“Did you have servants growing up?”

“Always,” Mai answered.

“For everything, or—?” she cut herself off.

“Yeah. They take care of the animals. We have horses and two fox-dogs, so they take care of them. They clean the house, keep up the lawn and the gardens. We also have a private chef who cooks for us. Cooks for them," she corrected herself. "They help with the shopping, send packages for you, style your hair, paint your nails. Anything. They helped raise me and my little brother. It’s their livelihood. And they do a better job than I could on my own, especially when it comes to things like hair and makeup.”

“It’s something people in the Caldera are used to,” Zuko clarified. “Not the business district or the outer suburbs.”

“The really rich people, you mean?” Aang asked. “Like the Upper Ring in Ba Sing Se?

Zuko nodded.

"Well, a lot of people in the business district have at least one servant," Mai interjected. "Maybe two or three."

"How many do your parents have?" Katara asked Mai.

"Seventeen. But a few of them manage our our other properties— their other properties." 

"Your parents own multiple houses?" She could barely believe that. 

"They do."

"A lot of people in the Caldera own multiple homes," Zuko explained. "Usually one here, one in the mountains, and one by the beach, or on Ember Island. Sometimes more. And rental properties, as well."

Katara made a face. "Wow."

"How many houses do you own?" Aang asked Zuko, popping a piece of tofu in his mouth.

"Lots. Most are rented out. I would have to look at a list. Do you mean for my own personal use?"

Aang nodded, chewing.

"Then..." he looked away, thinking, "four. Well, we kind of ruined the house on Ember Island."

"You kind of ruined your house on Ember Island," Aang corrected him firmly. "You started that fight, not me."

Zuko pursed his lips. "True."

“So, are you going to be in meetings all day, Zuko? Sorry— Firelord Zuko.” Sokka corrected himself, a little snidely. 

Zuko blinked at him languidly, thinking about something, but he let it go. “Yes, of course. I have some national government meetings in the morning. We can discuss trade and some other things this afternoon. And I think I have a meeting with the police this evening. I’ll have my advisors tell you what time later. They’re in a meeting already.”

“I’d like to have some time today to talk to you and your advisors about what happened in the Earth Kingdom. And our next steps,” Aang said, finishing off the last of his tea. A servant stepped in to refill it only a moment later.

“Definitely. I think they’re arranging all that right now.”

“Without you?” Aang asked, a brow raised.

“They’re going over the plans for today so they make sure I get done with everything that I need to get done.”

“So, they kinda tell you what to do?” Sokka mocked quietly.

“No,” Zuko corrected, his tone a bit harsh, “I tell them what to do, not the other way around. They’re just organizing my schedule. Because I asked them to. They figure out when all the other meetings are so things are booked in the right way. I don’t want to waste two hours doing that when I pay them to do things like that for me.”

Sokka raised his brows. “Gotcha.”

“I actually hired a couple of new advisors. They’re supposed to be here in a little bit.” He turned to his manservant on his left. “Can you get Kai for me, please?”

The servant nodded. “Of course, Your Majesty.”

“Who’s Kai?” Aang asked.

“My Chief Administrator. He’s kind of like an assistant, but more important. I hired him just after you left for the Earth Kingdom. He organizes things.”

Aang nodded. “Good.”

The conversation dropped off after that. There was clearly a bit of friction in the air between Sokka and Zuko, and no one seemed to want to get in the middle of it. Katara understood where her brother was coming from. He didn’t want to have to be submissive or subservient in any way to the Fire Nation, even if it was Zuko. He didn’t want to use honorifics for a firebender.

Their bickering reminded her that, not too long ago, they were bitter enemies. She glanced at the Firelord, considering how much she used to hate him and the Fire Nation. The fact that she was sitting at his dining room table in the heart of the Fire Nation eating breakfast amicably with him was something of a miracle. Katara considered her own life for a moment, and how dramatically everything had changed.

She had never even imagined that she would leave the South Pole. 

After finishing the last bite of her meat skewer, she tried a bit of rice, and still no one seemed to be picking up the conversation. She looked over at Aang, content with his bowl of miso and tofu soup, and then over at Toph, who was still groggy and busy eating. Sokka was being oddly quiet, too, so she looked over at Mai again, who was relaxed back in her chair. The black-haired teenager was simply sipping her tea and occasionally watching Zuko eat. Katara took in the sight of her long, pointed black nails, and then caught her sharp amber gaze.

Katara felt she had to say something after staring at her for a bit too long.

“So, what do your parents think about you living with Zuko?” She asked, a little impulsively. “Are they okay with it, then?”

Almost immediately, Mai looked down at her cup of tea, averting her gaze. Her face got solemn all of a sudden. “No. No, they’re not okay with it… I’m not really on speaking terms with them anymore, actually.”

Katara stilled at that, speechless. "Spirits."

“Oh, wow,” Suki commented under her breath. “Really?”

Mai nodded. “Yeah. Well, I see my baby brother and my dad every once and while. But I haven’t spoken to my mom at all since the end of the war.”

“Mai, that’s horrible,” Katara sighed, “I’m sorry.”

“It was a whole blowout, actually. It wasn’t just about me moving in with Zuko. It didn’t even start out that way. That happened because we fell out; it wasn't the reason we started fighting.”

“What happened?” Suki asked, sounding genuinely sorry for her. 

Mai looked uncomfortable for a moment, not sure where to start.

“You guys don’t really know me, so I guess I should explain. My parents were friends with Zuko’s parents when we were growing up. Well, mainly my mom was friends with Zuko’s mom, Ursa, so I would come over a lot as a little kid. And Ursa would take Zuko and Azula to my house sometimes. We grew up with each other. My parents live in the mansion right across the plaza. Anyway, I’m trying to explain that they’ve known Zuko since he was born.”

She paused, trying to think of a way to explain things in a succinct manner, but there was a lot they didn’t know.

“I guess, growing up, my parents were very… controlling. Very strict. They wanted me to act perfectly and dress perfectly. And get good grades. And never, ever, ever break the rules. That was really important. Their—” she faltered, “their goal for me, essentially, was for me to marry either Lu Ten or Zuko when I grew up.”

“Lu Ten was my cousin,” Zuko interrupted, turning to Mai. “Sorry, but they probably don’t know who he was. Lu Ten was my Uncle Iroh’s only son, and he died in the war when I was eleven. He was a lot older than me, though. A lot older. He was maybe four years younger than my dad.” 

Katara was taken aback for a moment by Firelord Ozai being referenced as ‘my dad’. The phrase struck her. Sometimes she conveniently forgot that her enemy-turned-friend had him as a father. 

“Yeah, so, it was unlikely that I would end up marrying him because of our age gap. And over the years my mom and Zuko’s mom got closer and my mom wanted me to marry Zuko, even though he wasn’t the second prince. My parents didn’t actually tell me that outright until I was a bit older. Maybe twelve, or so. But that was their goal for me. That was like my job in life,” she mocked, clearly taking offense at the idea.

“What?” Suki chuckled at that.

“It sounds weird when I say it out loud, and it was so annoying, but, yeah. I was supposed to be a good girl so he would want to marry me later or some stupid—” She cut herself off so she wouldn’t swear in front of the servants. “I don’t know. It’s kind of ironic that we actually did grow up to like each other, and started dating on our own.”

“Who liked who first?” Suki asked, looking between them.

“I liked him first. I had a crush on him, and my parents encouraged it at the time.”

“How old were you when you started dating?”

Mai looked over to Zuko. “Twelve, right? It was year eight in school, so we would’ve been twelve.”

Zuko nodded. “Yeah. But it was just,” he made a face, “little-kid dating. We just held hands and went to get tea.”

“That’s what all dating is for twelve-year olds,” Mai sighed at him. “Anyway, we started dating, and my parents really encouraged it at first. They got excited, because by that time Zuko had become Crown Prince, so it meant I was theoretically going to be the Fire Lady, eventually, if we got married. And my mom was super obsessed about us getting married. It was so annoying. Then, when he was thirteen, he got banished, of course. And Ozai took away his title, too. He made Azula the heir. And I was heartbroken, obviously,” she looked over at her boyfriend, “I was so depressed when he had to leave. But my parents…" she looked up at the ceiling for a moment, exasperated, "They were so fake about it. The second Zuko was banished, like that,” she snapped her fingers, “They stopped caring about him.”

“Wasn’t just them,” Zuko added, remembering how quickly people changed their opinion of him the second his title was gone.

“Ozai wanted him out, so he was supposed to be out. I wasn’t supposed to care about him at all. They changed their tune literally overnight and said I was being emotional, and I never should have been wasting my time dating a boy like him. And he was a bad influence. When I would cry because he was gone they would get mad at me and tell me it was disgraceful. My mom said that, not my dad," she clarified, "My mom was the main one saying these things. My dad just went along, mainly. I was told that I couldn’t cry about him, or write to him, or talk about him, or even think about him anymore,” she sighed, exasperated. 

Zuko reached for his cup of tea, taking a sip. “She did write to me, though.”

“Of course, I did. I tried to send him letters. He didn’t get most of them, though, because he was at sea. And I had to just carry on like he never existed, and say nothing. It was awful. Then, last summer, we met again in Ba Sing Se after the coup, when he was coming back. And we got back together. I was happy about it, obviously. The night we returned I went to my parent’s house and told them that he was back, but I didn’t tell them that we were together yet. They were so upset that I had even talked to him.”

“Why?” Aang asked.

“Because he was still technically banished. And they said we had to wait to see what Firelord Ozai was going to say about him before I even spoke to him. They wouldn’t let me leave the house to go meet him. I was grounded in my house until we heard what Ozai’s decision was. And when he decided to accept him back and give him back his title as Crown Prince, oh, Agni,” she made an exasperated face, “Again, in one second, they switched. My mom asked ‘Are you two going out? Did he ask you out?’ And when I said ‘Yes,’ she said, ‘Oh, I’m so glad you’re dating the Firelord’s son. That’s so wonderful. You’re going to be a Firelady one day,'” she mocked, frustrated. “I was so mad. I wanted to scream at her. You’ve been saying you hate him for three years, and I haven’t even been allowed to speak his name in my own house , but then the minute he has his crown back, you love him.”

“They’re ‘yes-men’,” Zuko commented. “A lot of people in the Capital are like that.”

“They wouldn’t even let you say his name?” Aang asked. “That’s so weird.”

“We were supposed to pretend like he didn’t exist.”

“They sound fake,” Suki commented.

“They’re so fake,” Mai agreed, shaking her head in aggravation. “And I was getting so sick of it. Following all these stupid rules that just… made me hate my life. When the war was over, I was so worried that Zuko was dead, or I’d be trapped in prison forever or something. I was just sitting in my cell, wondering if he was alive or not. And worrying that my dad and my little brother had been killed, somehow. It was so crazy. And I thought to myself, ‘If I ever get out of here, I’m going to live my life the way I want to live it. So, what? I could die at any moment, why waste my life following my parent’s rules and not doing what I want to do?’”

“Yes, exactly!” Toph encouraged from the other end of the table. “Exactly. She gets it.”

“So, I— I stayed here. The same night I came back. That was your third day as Firelord, right?”

“Acting Firelord. That was my coronation day.”

“I know. I just lost track of how many days in it was.”

“It was the third day.”

“So, what happened?

“Well, I was just relieved that he survived and I got out of prison. The last thing on my mind was whether I was following my parents' rules or not. We still weren’t sure if the country was going to collapse after everything. You remember,” she sighed at herself, “Caring about how it looked didn’t even occur to me, really. We were just glad to be alive. I stayed here with him and— whatever. People have more important things to worry about.”

“Except your parents,” Suki responded.

“Except my parents, exactly,” Mai sighed, “I went home after staying with Zuko for a few days. After literally helping him and the remaining staff take control of the country and keep everything from collapsing. And my parents were just… so mad. No. My mom was mad. My dad was relieved that I was alive and out of prison. They had been at our vacation house in the mountains, ‘cause it was safer than staying here. He hugged me when he got back. He said he couldn’t believe that Azula had tried to kill me. But my mom was angry. Angry at me. I asked why and she said she'd heard that I’d been in the palace with Zuko for a few days at that point, and she asked me if it was true. And I said yes.” She lowered her voice a bit. “Then she asked me, straight out, if I slept with him. Because that’s the thing to focus on when your daughter gets released from prison after the end of a world war. Whether or not she’s lost her virginity,” the exhaustion was clear in Mai’s voice. 

Suki shook her head. “Ridiculous.”

Mai looked brave for a moment, resolved. “I said that I love him and that, yes, I did.”

“And what did she say?” 

“She called me a whore," she answered quietly, her gaze somewhere far away, "and then she slapped me.”

“She slapped you?” Katara repeated, shocked.

“Yeah. She had never laid a hand on me before, not ever. There was this rage inside of her, and she was kind of losing it. I think her and my dad were both worried that because they had supported Ozai that they were going to be put in prison. And she was just mad at me, in general, for siding with Zuko, because he came out on top in the end, obviously. But it was more than that. I was so mad at her, and I just let it all out. Getting slapped was the last straw for me. I’ve been quiet almost my whole life, but I'm never, ever going to put up with that.”

“What’d you say to her?” Katara asked.

“I let out everything I’d been holding in for years. Zuko inspired me.” She sort of chuckled, remembering Zuko’s story about telling off his father on the day of the eclipse. “I told her that was it, and she couldn’t treat me like a child anymore, and I finally, finally told her off for being so controlling with me for so many years. I said I wasn’t going to follow their rules anymore, and I was going to do what I wanted, and she couldn’t stop me, and she couldn’t ground me, because I would just live with Zuko."

When her boyfriend gave her a side-glance, but said nothing, she stopped herself, deciding to clarify.

"Zuko didn’t ask me to live with him, let me be clear. I just assumed that he would let me, mid-fight, and afterward, when I came back here, he said that he was fine with it. But I wasn’t holding back. She was yelling at me about being ungrateful for all her hard work as a parent and all this nonsense, rambling about things that didn’t even make sense. Before that day I helped you all escape the Boiling Rock, I pretty much hadn’t broken a rule in my entire childhood. Almost never. Staying with Zuko for a couple nights was the first time I clearly broke a rule. And then I drove her over the edge because— I brought up the unmentionable,” she sighed.

Suki scowled. “The unmentionable?” 

Mai's face was tilted slightly down, an odd expression on her pretty face. “She was yelling about all this nonsense, how I was ungrateful and a liar, and it wasn’t even making sense. Then I stopped her, mid-way, and I said, ‘Let’s be honest right now. I’ve never said anything about this my entire life, but I know. And you know. The real reason that you’re so mad right now is because I sided with Zuko and Zuko’s the Firelord now, and he and The Avatar put Ozai in prison. And you’re losing your mind because you’re in love with him, and now that Zuko’s the Firelord, you’ll never be able to see him again. And you can’t do anything about it."

Katara’s face contorted into shock. “Wait, what?"

“Your mom is in love with Ozai?” Aang asked, taken aback himself.

Mai nodded. “Even now.”

“Well, that’s a twist,” Aang laughed, a little in disbelief.

“Are you serious? ” Katara probed, finding that too hard to believe.

“Yeah, my mom has been in love with Ozai for, like, all my life. As long as I can remember. She pretends that she loves my dad, but if anyone would see them interact, it’s obvious. It’s so painfully obvious that she’s in love with him, and she just pretends that she isn’t. No one ever says anything. And when I said that, she just burst into anger like a volcano and went crazy, calling me a liar. I was never supposed to say anything about that. I thought she was going to actually fight me for a moment, she was getting so riled up. My dad had to kind of step in front of her to stop her. It was ridiculous. And I didn’t even say anything mean to her about it. I just pointed it out. But that was enough.”

“That’s wild,” Sokka commented, shaking his head. “She sounds insane.”

“She's not insane," Mai disagreed. "She's just... not a good person. Anyway, she was still yelling, saying that she wanted to disown me, so I just walked out and said that I’d send servants to come get my things later. Then I walked across the plaza and told Zuko what happened and asked if I could move in. Haven’t spoken to my mom since. I met my dad and my little brother a couple of times for tea, which was… awkward, to say the least. I feel bad that I said that in front of him.”

“Said what?”

“That mom's been in love with Ozai basically the whole time that they’ve been married. It’s a horrible thing to say. But he still talks to me. I told him I was sorry for saying that in front of him. He says he wants to just move forward, and put the past behind us, but my mom is resolved. She doesn’t want to speak to me again. I’m not her daughter anymore. And it’s really weird because sometimes I go out and I see her walking around, and she just pretends like I don’t exist.”

“That’s crazy. I’m sorry, Mai,” Suki said softly, “I can’t imagine that.”

“Are you sure you were right when you accused her of being in love with Firelord Ozai?” Sokka asked, emphasizing his name, brows raised. “‘Cause that’s a pretty wild thing to accuse your mom of.”

“Oh, yeah, I’m sure,” Mai nodded. “But she’s been in love with him long before he was Firelord.”

“Were they having an affair?” Suki wondered, her pretty face contorted in a disturbed expression.

“No.” Mai looked over at Zuko for confirmation.

Zuko shook his head in the negative. “No. Definitely not. I don’t think my dad was ever interested.”

“It's one-sided,” Mai confirmed, “but it was the obvious truth that everyone saw, and yet no one ever brought up. I noticed it when I was younger, but no one said anything, so I didn’t say anything.”

Zuko made a face. “There was a whole lot of that around here before the war ended.”

“A lot of what?” Katara asked.

“People didn’t say what they felt. I mean, a lot of people still do that, but Zuko says what he feels almost all the time, so it’s different now. The atmosphere has changed."

“Everyone was scared of getting in trouble,” Zuko explained. "People are more free to voice their opinions now. Back then, people kept silent on almost everything. It was a part of our way of life. There was a different feeling around the Capital then.”

“We all felt like we couldn’t say what we really thought,” Mai continued. “We were all obsessed with following these rules. People were pretending all the time. All of us. It was a city of lies.”

Zuko looked down at his tea, his expression dour for a moment. "It was a country of lies."

“Like Ba Sing Se,” Aang mumbled. "Maybe worse, though."

“We all pretended like the world was eventually going to just accept us taking over, when in the back of our minds we knew that they wouldn’t, and the war would go on forever,” Zuko explained. “Even if we technically took over the whole world. No one said that. Well, I said it out loud sometimes. People never liked that I did. We pretended that the other nations looked up to us, and wanted us to improve their cities, but we knew, deep down, that they didn’t. It was just lies on top of lies.”

“That’s true, I guess, but that’s not what I meant,” Mai muttered.

“What kind of lies did you mean, Mai?” Katara asked.

“Lies within our own families. My mom pretended that she was this perfect wife, when really she was in love with his dad,” she glanced at Zuko, “Both my dad and Zuko’s parents pretended that she wasn’t. We all pretended that Ozai and Iroh got along, but they clearly didn’t. People pretended that Firelord Azulon and Ozai didn’t hate each other, but they very obviously did. People pretended that Azulon wasn’t way too old to rule, but he was. He was like a hundred years old. And when Ozai took over we all pretended that Ursa had done it, but almost everyone who lives in this area knew that he was really behind it. That he got her to do it for him.”

“Wait, wait,” Sokka stopped her, “isn’t Ursa your mom’s name?”

“Yeah,” he answered.

“Where is she?” Suki asked.

Zuko kind of sighed. “Dead, I assume. I don’t know. Probably dead. She was banished.”

“People blamed your mom for Firelord Azulon’s death? Why?” Sokka asked, scowling.

“Because she said she did it,” Zuko droned, confused by the question. “That’s why she was banished. Wait,” he scowled in confusion, “you all don’t know this story?” 

Everyone shook her head in the negative, except Toph.

“I heard that your mom did it, yeah. That’s what we heard in the Earth Kingdom. We heard that Princess Ursa did it, so, guess that was your mom. Man, you have a lot of murderers in your family,” she muttered.

“That wasn’t what we heard,” Sokka chimed in. “Back home we heard that Ozai killed Firelord Azulon and took over.”

"We just assumed that," Suki added.

“Oh, no. Well, kind of,” Zuko chuckled unceremoniously, “it’s— complicated.”

“You probably shouldn’t laugh at that, babe,” Mai critiqued quietly.

“Sorry. My family is insane. I thought everyone already knew this story.”

When Suki, Katara, and Sokka all shook their heads ‘no’, he realized the real story hadn’t gotten out like he thought it had.

“Wild. Okay, so, when I was a little kid my father was just a prince. Third prince, really. He honestly wasn’t even in line for the throne. Neither was I. My grandfather, Firelord Azulon, had my Uncle Iroh as his heir, his firstborn. My Uncle Iroh and my dad were his only legitimate children. And back then, Iroh’s only child, Lu Ten, was still alive. Lu Ten was next in line for the throne after my uncle. So, it was supposed to go from Firelord Azulon, to my uncle, to Lu Ten, and then to his children in the future. My dad wasn’t really in the line of succession at all. And Firelord Azulon didn’t like him. But, when I was eleven, my cousin died in the war and my Uncle’s wife was already dead by that point. So, my dad tried to take the opportunity to convince my grandfather that he should be the next in line instead of Iroh, and take away the title from my uncle because my uncle didn’t have any other children. He didn’t have any heirs. Azulon was furious with my dad for asking that. They had never gotten along, and Azulon fucking hated my dad. So he said that, as punishment, my dad had to kill me.”

Katara set down her chopsticks. "I'm sorry, what?"

Sokka gaped at him. “What the hell? What goes on in the Fire Nation?!" 

"That's crazy," Suki huffed.

“My mom found out about it, and that night they had this— this agreement, I guess. I don’t know exactly how it went down, but they basically came up with a plan. My mom wasn’t going to let me be killed. And my dad wanted to be Firelord, obviously, so they came up with this plan where she would murder Azulon and take the fall for it. But before he died he had to say that my dad was going to be the heir, somehow. Otherwise, no one would accept him as a legitimate heir to the throne. My Uncle was supposed to get the crown, and they totally screwed him over. I still don’t know how they did that. Because, like I said, Azulon hated him. He never would have given him the throne. But somehow they got him to say that he would make my dad the heir, in front of the servants, and Azulon’s advisor, and then they killed him.”

“Everyone said she did it," Mai explained, "Zuko’s saying ‘they’ because he knows that, but we didn’t know that. We suspected it, but we didn’t know that.”

“How did he die?” Katara asked.

“My mom stabbed him to death,” Zuko answered quickly. 

“Spirits,” Aang whispered, taken aback. 

"That's horrifying," Sokka muttered.

Zuko scowled. “Or, maybe both of them did. I'm not totally sure. The thing I still can’t figure out is how they convinced my grandfather to name him the heir in front of the advisor. No one knows. Maybe they just threatened him? My dad won't tell me, and he won't tell me where my mom went when she left. But they did get him to say that. He bled out in his bedroom. And my mom took the fall. She only did it so Azulon couldn’t have me killed. Then she confessed and my dad banished her on the spot.”

“Was that— in your bedroom? Where you sleep?” Suki sounded both shocked and concerned.

“No. I remodeled the palace when I moved in. I live in the rooms that used to be the Firelady’s rooms, but they’ve all been re-done now.”

“Wait, so do people know now that your father was also behind it, or do they still just blame your mom?” Aang asked.

“They know. Some people think I'm lying, but they know they both did it. On the posters I sent out for my mom, I wrote that that she’s no longer banished and she can come back. That I hope she comes back. If she's alive, which is doubtful. And I wrote that she won’t be put in prison if she comes back.”

“She really loved you," Katara sighed, "Enough to kill her own father-in-law.”

“Yes. But Azulon was horrible. Obviously. Who orders the death of their eleven-year-old grandson because they’re mad at his father?” Zuko asked, exasperated by his family.

“That doesn’t even make sense.”

“He said it was his turn to lose a son, and see how it feels. Both my grandfather and my uncle lost sons. Azulon had another son, but he died long before I was born."

"Still doesn't make any sense, though. And it's still pure evil," Sokka insisted.

"How did it go down after that?" Suki asked.

"After they killed him that night my dad became acting Firelord and he banished my mom. Apparently Azulon’s head advisors were so upset that he didn’t have my mom executed that they said they were going to kill him. There was almost a fight, but my dad just threatened to electrocute them all, so they let him take over. They were scared. He claimed that this one advisor had helped my mom do it. And he killed him that night, in front of everyone— shot him full of lightning. As a show of ‘here’s what’s going to happen if you go against me right now,’ basically."

"Crazy."

“And so they went along with it. So they wouldn’t be electrocuted to death," he huffed, "And that’s how he became Firelord. Then he fired any people that didn’t like him or had them put in prison and brought in his own people.”

“The thing I don’t understand is— Why didn’t he just kill her?” Sokka scowled, confused. “He’s evil. He’s a murderer. Not killing her made it seem like he was at fault. If he wasn’t at fault, and she really did it, then he should have executed her, so it fit his story. That way he would look innocent by completely pinning the murder on her.”

Suki nodded. “Right, why didn’t he kill her?”

He raised his brows. “Why didn’t he kill my mom?”

Suki and Sokka nodded.

Zuko scowled for a moment.

“Because he loved her...” He answered awkwardly. 

Shock contorted Sokka's face into a strange expression. “He’s capable of love?”

Zuko's gaze drifted, his mind somewhere far away. “...Yeah. Enough not to kill her, anyway."

“Oh.”

“But your parents were in an arranged marriage, right?” Katara assumed.

Zuko turned to face her. “An arranged marriage? No. Where do you guys hear this stuff?”

“They weren’t arranged?” Sokka repeated, just as confused as everyone else.

“How’d they get together, then?” Katara wondered.

Zuko looked awkward for a moment, pausing. “Uh... They met at a party. Dated. Got engaged. Got married.”

Sokka huffed. “Man, that’s not what I would have expected."

"Me neither."

“I told you, arranged marriages aren’t really a thing here.”

Katara scowled. “Yeah, but I thought maybe it was different for royals.”

“No. Not since before Sozin. Over a century now.”

“You have to understand,” Aang chimed in, “it’s hard for us to imagine any love in your family when almost all of the stories you tell us are about you all fighting or attempting to kill each other— or actually murdering one other.”

Exasperation was clear on Zuko’s face. “Right. I understand that. I never…” he thought for a moment about all the pain, death, and chaos that consumed his family when he was on the cusp of being a teenager. “I never, ever thought we would get to the place where we are now. I never thought any of this would happen when I was growing up. My parents, my sister, and I were just a relatively normal little family. Rich, but pretty normal, living a normal life for nobles. We weren't in line for the throne, really. The four of us were pretty happy, a long time ago, like I said. Everything was different.” He remembered telling them that when they were staying at his family’s old summer house.

Katara could hardly believe that was ever possible. She looked over at him, his brow set in angst.

“What changed?” 

“My dad changed,” Zuko answered. “Then everything got messed up.”

She saw the pain in his eyes when he said that, and it made her hurt for him. She wondered why someone would ever mess up their family and the world in the way Ozai did. It perplexed and intrigued her. But then she thought about Azula after their fight on the Day of Black Sun, losing her mind and collapsing into pure chaos and rage, and she wondered if the reason was exactly the same: insanity. 

“Why did he change?” Suki asked.

Zuko shrugged. “I don’t know, really.”

The delicate moment was disrupted by the presence of Kai entering the room, followed by three newcomers in the archway, coming in from another hallway near Zuko’s side of the table. All of them bowed immediately to Firelord Zuko and he stood as they did so. The second Zuko stood, Mai followed suit. When the rest of the table simply looked on, curious, but not understanding, she made a face as if to say ‘you have to stand, too, idiots,’ and waved with her hand to motion for them to get up. Then they all stood, with Toph being the last one to follow suit. Katara wondered if they were standing because Zuko had stood or because the people entering had some special status that necessitated that others stand in their presence. None of it made sense to her. 

“Amara, Xuan, Sōsuke, I’d like to introduce you to my friends. Everyone, these are my advisors. This is Avatar Aang,” he gestured to the young monk on his left, his yellow robes making him stand out starkly in the room. 

All three bowed at the waist to him, which Katara thought was interesting considering how little the Fire Nation apparently thought of him. But then she remembered what Zuko and Mai had just been talking about. It’s a city of lies. When she took in the sight of the advisors she wondered if they were disingenuous, too. Interestingly, she noticed it was a young woman in front and two middle-aged men behind her.

“Avatar Aang, you’ve already met Xuan and Sōsuke, but this is Amara Miyazaki, my head advisor. I just hired her.”

Aang’s eyes lit up. “Hello!”

To Aang and everyone else’s surprise, instead of standing straight, Amara kowtowed to him, gracefully kneeling to the floor and touching her head to the ground. 

“Oh, you don’t have to do that, really, it’s not—” he stopped himself because she was already down on the ground. “Thank you... You can stand.”

“It’s an honor to meet you, Avatar Aang.”

“It’s a pleasure to meet you, too.”

She stood slowly, elegantly, long golden earrings swaying as she rose, and everyone took in her incredible beauty as she straightened.

Like everyone else in the room, Katara couldn’t peel her eyes away from her. There was an unusual radiance and elegance about her appearance that demanded attention. Katara knew Zuko was saying something, and then Aang, but it went in one ear and out the other because the woman’s gorgeousness was too damn distracting. 

Amara's heart-shaped face was perfectly symmetrical, with a slim chin and nose, and tall, elegant cheeks. But the main thing Katara noticed were her full lips, painted red, much plumper and thicker than a normal Fire Nation woman’s. Then she caught the woman's gaze and spent a moment taking in the sight of her large eyes. They were striking, slightly upturned, and a lovely shade of amber, accented by graceful straight brows and long, dark eyelashes. Her skin caught Katara’s attention as well, it being a beautiful shade of light golden tan, with yellow in her undertone and pink blush on her cheeks. Her black hair was drawn up into a large, feminine style of bun at the crown of her head, with a few pieces deliberately hanging down and two curled sections framing her face. At the top, a golden dragon hairpin was pierced through her bun, matching the delicate golden earrings she wore.

It was too tempting not to look down and take in the woman’s outfit, too. The long-sleeved black Áo dài dress she wore was decorated with golden embroidery and a finely beaded collar. Katara noticed the way the dress hugged her body’s curvaceous form, curving in at the waist and flaring out around her hips, then breaking into two golden yellow pleats at her side. 

“And this is Katara, daughter of Hakoda of the Southern Water Tribe.”

The sound of her own name made Katara snap back to reality, and after seeing Amara bow her head, she did the same.

“Nice to meet you.”

“It’s a pleasure to meet you as well, Katara. I’ve heard a lot about you.”

Katara made a face, trying to smile normally, but struggling. Heard a lot about me? It almost felt too intimidating to look a woman as beautiful as Amara in the eyes, but she made herself do it, finding the foreign woman smiling gracefully, her plump lips twisted up slightly. It perplexed Katara how a woman so young and beautiful could possibly be qualified for such a position. Head advisor? What exactly is she advising him on? Fashion tips?

“On the other side of the table is Toph Beifong, from the Gaoling province.”

Amara bowed again, and Toph slightly tilted her head down.

“Nice to meet you.”

“You, as well.”

“Do we call you Advisor Amara or just Amara?” Toph asked.

“Either is fine. Thank you.”

“And that’s Sokka, son of Hakoda, from the Southern Tribe.”

Amara bowed her head briefly once more before rising.

“Nice to meet you.”

Katara wished she could have waterbended her brother’s drinking water in his face for the way he was looking at her in that moment.

“Very nice to meet you, too. Wow,” he sounded a little breathless, and looked like he was struggling to even think in her presence, “ah, my name’s Sokka—”

“I just said that,” Zuko interrupted him.

That made Katara want to chuckle, but she tried to keep her face still. Apparently she hadn’t been the only one zoning Zuko's voice out while ogling Amara. Or simply rendered stupid in her presence. Sokka turned to Suki, who didn’t look entirely pleased with him at the moment.

“And this is my lovely girlfriend Suki," he held out his hands a little awkwardly, like he was showing her off, "the illustrious Kyoshi warrior from Kyoshi.”

“Really? She’s not a Kyoshi warrior from Kangaroo Island?” Zuko teased him dryly. 

It was hard not to feel a little second-hand embarrassment at her brother’s obvious struggle to sound coherent in the presence of such a great beauty. She was reminded of the time that Sokka met Princess Yue, and the painful flirting she had to sit through that whole evening. But, after looking over at Suki, she thought it was a little odd, because Suki was really beautiful, too. Just younger and a bit less dramatically so. Less made up. Even in her simple burgundy dress and bare face, Suki was still extremely pretty. Katara suddenly felt like the plainest girl in the room.

“And this is my girlfriend, Mai Hasegawa,” Zuko introduced. “I don’t think you’ve met yet, right?”

“No, I don't think so,” Amara responded gently. “It’s very nice to meet you, Mai.” She bowed.

Mai bowed in return. “You, as well." She had a strange expression on her face for a moment. “I’ve never met you, one-on-one, but I’ve seen you perform over a dozen times, at least.”

“Really?” Amara asked, her brows raising a bit in suprise.

“Everyone goes to the National Theater,” Mai muttered, her tone a bit strange.

“It’s been a while, though,” Amara commented, looking away. “Over five years now. You must have been pretty young at the time.”

“I was in primary and secondary school. But I still remember. No one could ever forget one of your performances.”

"Thank you, that's very nice of you to say,” Amara smiled a bit, face drawn in appreciation.

“Wait, you’re a performer?” Sokka asked, excited. “What do you do?”

She turned to him. “I used to sing. And act, just a tiny bit. Back when I was younger.”

“Used to? So, you’re not going to give us a concert later, then? How else are we supposed to hear you sing?” He tried to flirt, seemingly, earning a little side-eyed glare from Suki.

“We’ll see,” Amara politely declined, almost trying to laugh off Sokka’s fumbled attempt at flirting. “Firelord Zuko, we have the schedule and the briefing ready now. And the councilmen are already waiting.”

Zuko sighed a little. “Alright. I’ve got to go, everyone. But I’ll see you all later today. We can have dinner together.”

“When are we going to meet, Zuk— Firelord Zuko?” Aang quickly corrected himself. 

“Do you want to speak to me privately, or do you mind talking about this in front of my council?”

Aang looked down, thinking for a second. “I think I should talk to you privately first. Then to the rest of your staff after.”

“Okay.”

“The discussion between you and me shouldn’t take longer than a few minutes, tops,” Aang explained.

“Let’s just do it now, then. Are you done eating?”

He looked down at Aang’s plate of an orange peel, a half-finished bowl of miso soup and a mostly empty rice bowl. 

“Yeah. I’m done. I won’t keep him for long, promise,” he said towards Kai and the advisors, pushing his chair in and starting to walk away, making Zuko follow behind.

Zuko turned to them on his way out. “Just tell the council to wait a few minutes, please. You can go on in. And I’ll just look at the schedule after our morning meeting.” 

With that, Kai and the advisors made their way out, and Zuko walked with Aang towards the end of the room as the group sat down again, resuming their breakfast.

Once they were out in the hallway, Aang struggled to match Zuko’s fast pace. 

“Where are we going?”

“My office.”

“Okay.”

Aang barely remembered the slightly gaudy and intimidating office from his brief time in the Capital with Zuko around the time of his coronation. He watched a servant duck to the side, stop walking, and put their head down in deference as Zuko and himself walked by.

“Why did this have to be in private and not in front of my advisors, at least?” He asked quietly.

“You’ll understand.”

Once they reached his office, Zuko shut the door behind them. 

“Have a seat, please.” He gestured to the dark, polished wooden sitting chair set up in front of the desk. Zuko moved behind the desk, back to the window, and sat at his own chair, tucking his robes beneath him. “What did you want to talk about?”

Aang sat down, finding the setting oddly formal, but, then again, he knew that everything had changed. They weren't runaway kids camping out in tents anymore. Zuko was still Zuko, but he was also a Firelord. A Firelord with a desk. Aang's gray eyes grazed over the important paperwork and scattered brushes sitting on its plain surface. He was apparently a tad messy. 

“I wanted to talk about decolonization. And I don't know how much of it should really be said in front of other people. I just want to be completely upfront with you about things—" he faltered, "the way things went. I feel like we owe that to each other. ”

“Honesty?” Zuko asked, raising his good brow.

“Yeah.”

“Absolutely. Please, tell me the truth. I want to hear it.”

“Okay," he sighed, shifting a little in the hard chair, "decolonization was… a nightmare. An absolute nightmare.”

“Right. I’m sorry, Aang. We had just finished the war and then you had to go through all that.”

“I’m not saying that it was a nightmare for me. I mean, it was, but that's not what I was talking about,” he cleared his throat. “It was a nightmare for them. Your people. And now it’s gonna be a nightmare for you, too. These people I just bought over— they’re mad. They’re really mad. Like, throwing-things-at-Appa-and-calling-me-a-demon mad.”

“Agni,” Zuko swore, opening a drawer and reaching for his cigarette case.

“I had to tear people out of their homes, Zuko. It was so hard. And they,” he tried to pick his words carefully, but decided to just let him hear it all, “They hate you for it. A lot of them. Some understand, sure. Some get that the war is over and this is just their new reality. But I just brought in some very pent-up and frustrated people into your country who…” he cringed, “hate you. I’m sorry. But they do. They hate me, but they might hate you even more, for allowing it.”

Zuko brought a cigarette to his lips and lit it with his firebending, taking a drag.

“I know.”

“You’re going to have a hard time dealing with it. I’m seriously concerned that they’re going to try to overthrow you. Some of them feel like they should. I've heard them talking. They don’t care that the war’s over. They’re just angry. They want to be mad at someone. Blame someone. We didn’t start this war, but we ended it. And now we get to deal with it.”

“Yeah,” Zuko sighed, exhaling gray smoke and rubbing his temple with his free hand.

“But, there’s more than that… There’s something else I need to tell you.”

Zuko dropped his hand, his golden eyes flicking up to look at Aang, noticing the unusually serious expression on his young face.

“What?”

“The Earth King’s... changed.”

References/inspiration:

Dressing gong concept— Noble classes at the height of the British Empire. Complex servant class dynamics and roles. Downton Abbey clip: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=g1zJk1OSN9w

Chapter Text

 "Peace cannot be kept by force; it can only be achieved by understanding." 

—Albert Einstein

Fire Nation, Royal Palace

Once Aang and Firelord Zuko had left the dining room, as well as Kai and the advisors, an awkward silence followed, with no one knowing what to say. 

Thankfully, Sokka had always been gifted at breaking silences.

“Well, that was a lot to take in during the course of one breakfast,” he murmured comically.

“Hah! ” Toph laughed, “I’ll say.”

“Really was,” Katara agreed, picking up her spoon again and trying to finish her soup. 

“Sorry if we overwhelmed you,” Mai apologized. 

“It’s fine,” Katara soothed, “There’s a lot we didn’t know, apparently.”

Sokka’s gaze lingered on Mai for a while, and then over to the elaborate archway leading to the main hall. “You don’t go to the meetings with Zuko, Mai?”

She finished her sip of tea, setting the cup down on the table. 

“No. None of us can go. Only the Firelord, his advisors, the councilors, and the scribes. I would only be able to go if I was Firelady.”

“Are you going to be the Firelady?” Toph asked boldly.

Mai made a strange expression, which, of course, Toph couldn’t see. 

“...Zuko hasn’t proposed to me yet, if that’s what you’re asking,” she responded, a bit painfully.

“Oh.”

The awkward moment left another lingering silence, none of them used to being around Mai in such a casual setting, save for a few days around the end of the war. It was still unusual to be in a world without war, and think of each other as acquaintances instead of enemies. Suki looked particularly uncomfortable, Katara noticed, there being a distinct tenseness in her body language, which Sokka seemed to be ignoring.

“How long is their meeting gonna be?” He asked.

“Hours. Maybe two or three. Then he usually has a working lunch with his advisors. After, more meetings.”

“So, what should we do?” Sokka asked everyone remaining. “We have all day.”

“I’m gonna take a walk,” Suki snapped, pushing her chair back.

At that, Sokka finally turned to face her, scowling when he saw her expression.

“Are you mad?” He sounded like he had no idea what could be bothering her. “Hey. What is it?”

“Are you serious right now?” She deadpanned. “Spirits, I wonder what I’m mad about. I have no idea. It’s such a mystery.”

“Uh—” Sokka was taken aback by her anger, his mouth agape, “I wish you would tell me.”

“If you seriously need me to tell you—” she huffed, exhaling quickly, “Forget it. I’m done with breakfast. Thank you,” she said to the servant pulling out her chair for her so she could stand. “I’m going to the gardens. I need some space. Don’t follow me.”

When she had stormed off, Sokka stared at the archway she had left through, perplexed, apparently.

“Why is she so mad at me?”

Katara nearly rolled her eyes at him. “Because a few minutes ago you were obviously checking out and then trying to flirt with Zuko’s new advisor.”

“No, I wasn’t!” He snapped back, his voice high, “I was just joking. I wasn’t actually flirting.”

“What’s the difference?” Toph asked sarcastically. “Even I could pick up on that. What was happening, by the way?”

“What do you mean?” Katara asked.

“Why was everyone acting so weird when Advisor Amara showed up?”

Katara chuckled, forgetting again that there were things that Toph couldn’t tell from 'seeing' with her feet.

“She’s just— really, really attractive.”

“Gorgeous,” Sokka emphasized, “Totally and completely gorgeous.”

“Interesting. Okay, makes sense,” Toph thought back to their meeting, “How old is she?”

Katara shrugged. “I don’t know. Young.”

“She’s twenty-four, I think,” Mai interjected, “Well, she got into Akihara when she was sixteen. And I think that was ‘94, so she would actually be… twenty-three.”

“Twenty-three? How is someone that young qualified to be a head advisor?” Toph wondered aloud, rather boldly, again. 

Katara was thinking the same thing herself but hadn’t wanted to cause any more discomfort by asking nosy questions.

“I have no idea,” Mai answered quietly, her expression slightly peeved. She was clearly a little surprised and annoyed by Zuko’s choice of candidate for the role. 

It wasn’t hard for Katara to read between the lines. Mai thought the choice was strange, but, beyond that, she probably didn’t want a woman like Amara to be around her boyfriend all the time. Katara didn’t know much about Fire Nation or Earth Kingdom governments, but she understood that head advisors were nearly bound to the Firelord at the hip, following him around, constantly available for second opinions and consultation.

“Why is Suki so upset, seriously? I was clearly joking,” Sokka sighed. “How could she not tell that I was kidding around?”

“Didn’t seem like a joke,” Toph rebuked. “Are you really trying to say that you didn’t find her attractive?”

“Well, I do. I can’t help that, I’m a man. But I wasn’t actually flirting with her. I was trying to be funny.”

“Not funny for Suki."

“I didn’t mean to— argh,” he pushed back his chair suddenly, “I wanna go make up with her. Sorry, excuse me,” he apologized, nearly running into the servant behind him who was trying to help him move his chair. 

“Sokka, stop,” Katara got after him, “She just said she wants some space. Give her time to cool off. You can apologize later.” 

“All this drama,” he complained, pausing, “I wasn’t even doing anything wrong.”

Katara looked away from him, annoyed. “Yes, you were.”

“All I asked was: ‘How are we supposed to hear you sing?’ And if she would give us a concert later. How is that flirting?”

“It was your tone of voice.”

“And you said ‘wow’ when she walked in,” Toph said, chuckling, “That’s probably not a good thing.”

He made a noise of aggravation in his throat.

Regret was clearly replacing indignation, his expression falling. He sat back down at the table, resting his head forward on his hand, slouching. 

“I’ll give her ten minutes, max. Then I’m gonna go apologize.”

“Okay.”

Katara decided to change the subject, looking over at Mai. “So, what should we do today? It’s nice out.”

She was surprised to see Mai lost in deep thought, apparently, staring needlessly at a blank spot on the table. At the feeling of eyes on her, she looked up. 

“What?”

“What are you going to do today? Do you have plans?”

“Oh, I don’t know,” she shrugged, “I was planning on spending some time with you all until dinner. You’re our guests.”

“Sure. What should we do, though?”

“I could show you around the Capital, if you want. Or, if you want to practice bending, we could go to the sparring court outside. Depends on what you want to do.”

“It would be interesting to see the Capital. We just saw a little bit from the carriage on the way up from the harbor. And I didn't see much during Zuko's coronation. But—” Katara cut herself off.

“But, what?” Mai asked.

“I don’t get the feeling that we’re entirely welcome here. And that’s… putting it nicely. I got some weird looks on the way over from the Annex this morning.”

Mai wasn't pleased by that, but she wasn't surprised, either.

“Yeah, you’re going to have to get used to that, for the time being. Sorry. And they’re going to have to get used to you.”

“They’re racists, Katara, what did you expect?” Sokka whispered. “The people here think we’re human garbage.”

“I don’t think that,” Mai snapped back quietly. "Neither does Zuko."

“Not anymore. I meant the people here who don’t know us. We go through similar problems back home. I— When I was packing to come here my grandfather said it was like I was taking a vacation to the underworld to go stay with the  demons.”

Mai raised her brows at that. “Wow.”

“People on both sides don’t get it. All our grandparents have ever known of firebenders are the firebenders who come in and murder our people. One of the reasons we let you come into our village is ‘cause we know you can’t bend.”

“And, hopefully now that your grandmother's met me, she won’t think that I’m a demon,” Mai whispered, annoyed.

“Our step-grandpa said that, not our gran-gran,” Katara corrected. “Anyway, what I was trying to say is that we’re not really welcome here, so a tour might be a bit awkward. I don’t think people are going to want to let us into their shops and stuff.”

“Well, they have to,” Mai responded firmly, “I’ll be with you, taking you around. And I’m the Firelord’s girlfriend, so they have to respect me. I’ll get after them if they say something bad.” She looked down at her tea, exhaling through her nose. “We have to start somewhere. The people here are going to have to get accustomed to having visitors from other nations, and treating them with basic respect. We have to start moving forward."

“So, our goal today is to end racism in the Fire Nation,” Toph added sarcastically, “Easy.”

Sokka chuckled from beside her.

“Funny, Toph. But Mai has a point, though. We have to start somehow, don’t we?” Katara asked. 

“They know you’re guests of the Firelord, so it’s not like they can do anything to you,” Mai added, “And once they see you a few times, hopefully it’ll get more normal.”

“I’m gonna go find Suki,” Sokka said abruptly, standing up and walking out of the room in the direction she left. 

“Is it just gonna be us three, then?” Toph wondered. “Aang’s busy, Zuko’s busy, Ty Lee’s hungover somewhere. Sokka and Suki are fighting.”

“It doesn’t make sense to tour the city without at least Sokka and Suki. It would be weird to leave them behind.”

“Do their fights usually last a long time?” Mai asked.

Toph shrugged. “I dunno. I’ve been in the colonies for six months getting things thrown at me.”

Katara exhaled. “They don’t fight that often. But Suki was pretty mad. She might need a bit.”

“Maybe I should show you the royal library while we wait for them.”

Katara wanted to point out that it was strange for them to leave breakfast when Mai hadn’t touched a single bite of food on her plate, but refrained, assuming that Mai had simply been overwhelmed by having guests and all of the dramatic conversation that had ensued during the meal. 

“Another library?” Toph groaned. “God, what is it with you people and libraries? ”

“I could show you someplace else,” Mai droned lowly, put off by the strange response. 

“Sorry. She’s just saying that ‘cause the last time we went to a library we got attacked by a giant owl-spirit, the library sank into the desert, and sand-benders stole Appa, making Aang go into the Avatar State. And then he kinda went crazy,” Katara explained quickly.

Mai’s usually narrow golden eyes widened, and the bewildered look on her face made Katara laugh a little.

“Also, Toph can’t read, so libraries don’t do much for her in the first place.”

“Maybe we’ll skip the library, then,” Mai mumbled comically.

“I’d actually like to see it,” Katara insisted, “If you wouldn’t mind taking us. Toph, you’ll be polite and come along with us, won’t you? You can just sit and play with your space rock or something.”

Toph made a bratty face for a moment before sighing. “Fine.” 

She stood up, a servant helping to pull back her chair once she did so. 

“Space rock?” Mai wondered aloud.

“One time we came across this comet that landed and she took a piece of it. Show her, Toph,” Katara urged.

Toph produced the space rock from her pocket and morphed it into a variety of shapes with her earth-bending: a star, a ball, an arrow.

“That’s incredible,” Mai complemented her, “You all have the weirdest adventures...”

Katara smiled. “Don’t we ever."

After walking through the dramatically lit, twenty-foot-tall hallway lined with gold columns, then up a staircase to a higher floor, they came to the entrance of the Royal Library. It was easy for Katara to understand why Mai had chosen to begin the tour there. It was majestic, with two expansive floors and dark, gleaming wood everywhere. It was a space Katara could imagine the educated nobility of the Fire Nation spending their time in throughout the years. A place of status and learning.

The ceiling caught Katara’s interest immediately and she tilted her head back to look up at it, surprised to see the coffered ceiling painted in gold leaf with depictions of birds and flowers in bloom. Black wood beams ran in both directions, dividing the ceiling into squares, and on each beam delicate lattice work added more visual interest.

"This place is amazing."

As her gaze moved down she focused on the second floor. On both sides of the room there were two levels of libraries, on top of one another, full of mahogany bookshelves stuffed to the brim with books, diagonal cross-sectioned scroll-cases, and matching dark-wood desks with chairs, set into the balcony so they overlooked the main floor. At the far end of the room there was a two-story set of windows with unbelievably tall floor-to-ceiling gold silk drapes, pulled back at the moment to let the morning light in. At their base were two comfortable red chaise lounges, and, between them, a large globe. Matching wooden spiral staircases on either side of the windows provided access to the upper level. 

The left and right side of the lower floor on which they stood were both filled with the same rows of bookshelves, stretching on past Katara’s line of sight, and in the middle of the room there were still more bookshelves and desks. The shelves and scroll-cabinets in the center of the library were a much lower height, allowing for an unobstructed view of the rocky courtyard beyond. 

At the entrance where they stood, however, an old man sat at the front desk, with gray hair and a long gray beard. On the top of his lacquer desk, incense burned away in a golden censer, filling the library with a sweet, musky scent. Katara noticed his wrinkled hand was wrapped around a quill, slowly writing out characters. He looked up from the book he was writing in, and when he saw Mai he bowed his head.

“Good morning, Mr. Ataname." She bowed. "How are you?”

“Greetings, Lady Mai. I’m well, and you?”

“Fine, thank you. I’m just showing our guests around. You can keep doing what you’re doing. We won’t disturb you.”

“I would be honored to show you around, if you’d like,” he offered, before his gold eyes slid over to Katara and Toph, no expression on his aging face.

“No, we’re fine. Thank you, though.”

“Alright. I’m here if you have any questions.”

Katara watched Mai step forward, approaching a huge book on a solitary lectern at the entrance to the library, flipping through a couple of pages. 

“This is the index,” she whispered. “If you want to read something, find the basic category you’re looking for, like, people, for example, and then you can see the list of names.” She flipped to the section with the category for people, and Katara looked on. “It’s divided into sections: ancient people, avatars, royalty, et cetera. You also look up other topics, like firebending, historical events, fiction— you get the picture.”

“And, what if you can’t read? ‘Cause you’re blind?” Toph whispered, exasperated, an annoyed expression on her face.

Mai glared at her a little. “Then I suppose you would ask the librarian to find whatever you’re looking for and have him or a servant read it aloud to you.”

Katara smirked at her monotone response. It was funny to hear someone else have to deal with Toph’s antics.

“If you’re going to check a book out, you have to write your name on the circulation ledger. The librarian writes down the date that you got the book and the date that it’s due by. You can borrow some of the books for a week. Others, you can’t even take out of the library.”

“Why not?” Katara asked.

“Because they’re extremely rare and couldn’t be replaced if you lost them.”

“Okay. I’ll take a look around,” Katara suggested, interested in discovering things in the impressive library. 

There was so much she wanted to learn that she didn’t even know where to start. Her education back home had been a simple one, just learning to read from a basic instruction book with her parents and a few other worn books. Her tribe had less than thirty left. One series was a popular thesaurus from the Earth Kingdom and another one was a set of water tribe stories that some unusual waterbender had recorded on paper in the common writing system, a strange thing to do among her people. The Fire Nation clearly didn’t share their aversion to recording thoughts on paper, she discovered, turning around and staring up in awe at all the books in the collection.

“I just want to sit down,” Toph said gruffly, “Is that a comfy chair over by the window?”

“Yeah.”

“Great,” she sighed, “I’ll just relax ‘till you girls are done here. Get me when you’re ready to leave.”

“Toph, I’ll read things to you if you want.”

She waved a hand in the air. “Not interested, thanks. After working on decolonization for so long, I just want to relax. I'm exhausted.”

“Okay.”

Katara moved her gaze around the large room again, various things catching her interest: a framed map of the world, an ancient poetry scroll on the wall, and a black and white cat-fox hybrid lounging on a red-cushioned chair. She watched Mai kneel down and pet the animal. When she felt Katara’s eyes on her, she turned to look at the waterbender over her shoulder.

“This is the library fox-cat, Toto.”

“Why keep a fox-cat in a library?” Katara wondered, smirking.

“Pest control. If there’s ever a rodent in here, Toto will eat them before they eat the books.”

“Smart.”

“Plus, he’s adorable.” 

Mai gave him another affectionate pet, her hand running over his silky coat, and Katara smiled a little. Sometimes it was hard for her to understand what Zuko saw in Mai, but little moments like that gave her a hint. She wasn’t always a drab, exhausted downcast. 

Katara walked off, moving towards the desk of the old librarian at the front and center of the room. He eyed her from the side, and when he saw she was coming right up to the desk, fully turned his head to look at her.

“May I help you, Miss—?”

“Katara, daughter of Hakoda. Nice to meet you,” she tried making an effort, despite her general disdain for old men with gold eyes. She extended a hand, attempting to put her best manners on.

The librarian looked at her outstretched hand for a second oddly before reaching out his wrinkled, age-spot covered one and shook hers for a moment.

“Nice to meet you, as well. My name is Mikai Ataname. I’m the head librarian here.”

“Are there others?” She asked, her blue eyes catching the light coming in from the windows behind him.

“I have an understudy, yes. He’s copying some things at the moment. Can I help you with something, young lady?”

The epic leather-bound book on the edge of his desk caught her attention. “I just wanted to look at the ledger, if that’s okay.”

“Alright.” With a slow movement of his arm, he reached over, his careful fingers opening up the index about mid-way to a page with a bookmark. “The name of the book is written first, listed in this column,” he showed her, pointing with a long fingernail to the right-most one, “the name of the borrower is next, and finally, the dates of removal and return. If you ever want to take a book from this library, you must get my permission, same as His Majesty, and write your name down on the page.” 

“If I want to, I promise I will.”

He put his spectacles on, tilting his head up to get a better look at her. “If you should ever lose a book, you owe the library the cost of the book at market value. Some of the values are as high as ten-thousand gold coins, just so you’re aware. But most are far less than that.”

“Understood.”

“Excuse my curiosity, but, what characters are used for your name? I’ve never heard of the name Katara before.”

“I’m water-tribe.”

“Yes,” he chuckled quietly, “I understand that much from your outfit alone. But, would you mind writing your name out for me, so I can see it written?” He asked, handing over a quill already dipped in ink. 

She watched him move over a piece of paper and wait for her to write. Steadying her right hand with her left, she slowly wrote out the characters for her name, hoping she wasn’t too child-like in her attempt at calligraphy.

卡塔拉.

When she had finished, she handed the quill back over and Mikai took a look at the paper, adjusting his spectacles as he did so.

“Interesting. Was your name partly inspired by the Ocean Spirit?” He asked, looking at the final character. 

“Yes. The last character is.”

“And, you said your father’s name is Hakoda. He wouldn’t be Chief Hakoda of the Southern Seas, would he? The famous warrior?” 

Katara smirked at her father being referenced in such a way, but she supposed it was true. 

“Yes, that’s my dad. But he’s more of a retired warrior these days. He’s focused on running our tribe now that the war’s over. Fire Lord Zuko just purchased a lot of food from us, and I'm here with my brother, managing the delivery and everything."

“I see,” Mikai murmured, narrowing his gaze, “Well— thank you for obliging my curiosity.” 

“You’re welcome.”

“Feel free to look around, but take care to put books back where you found them. The only things that can’t be touched or removed are locked in display cases. Everything else is here for you to peruse at your leisure.”

“Thanks.”

He’s not so bad, Katara thought to herself, pulling her eyes away from the old man and looking through the circulation ledger, flipping the pages. She decided to look at the books that had been checked out most recently, and began to read the characters in her own head, skipping over the dates. She wanted to see which books had been checked out, and by whom. 

History of Fire Nation Taxation. Kai Ito.

Atlas of the United Fire Nation: 85-95. Kai Ito.

Trade Among the Nations. Firelord Zuko Zaodan.

The Lady and the Tiger-Lion. Mai Hasegawa.

Dreams of My Emperor. Mai Hasegawa.

Into the Raging Sea. Mai Hasegawa.

Guide to the College Entrance Exam. Mai Hasegawa.

The Princess of Pine-Tree Mountain. Mai Hasegawa. 

Memoirs of Courtesan Imani. Mai Hasegawa.

The Forbidden City: In the Heart of Ba Sing Se. Princess Azula Zaodan.

Katara stopped reading, surprised to see her name in the book, but after a moment of thought reminded herself that this was Azula’s former home, and, of course, her library. The Forbidden City… she was planning for the coup. When Katara saw the dates she sighed, remembering that horrible day in the catacombs. Pushing the thought away, she looked down, continuing to read.

Ba Sing Se: A Physical and Political History. Princess Azula Zaodan.

A Chronicle of Earth Kings in the Modern Era. Princess Azula Zaodan.

The Earth Kingdom: A Traveler’s Account. Firelord Ozai Zaodan. 

Katara scowled, physically taking her hand off the place where he had written his name with elegant strokes. It felt strange to touch it, knowing that, several months prior, he had written it with his own hand. He had likely sat at one of the chairs or the desks, reading in the same room where she stood. It suddenly didn’t feel quite so safe in the boring library. She looked up, over to where Toph was lounging on a red-cushioned chaise in front of the tall windows, playing with her space rock. Turning her head, she found Mai sitting in a low, hand-carved armchair, reading a book, the cat-fox curled up on her lap. 

All was well. With a small sigh, she returned to reading.

Ba Sing Se: An Account of the Greatest City on Earth. Firelord Ozai Zaodan.

The Nature of Planning and Operating the Largest Cities in the Earth Kingdom. Firelord Ozai Zaodan. 

Beyond the Walls of Ba Sing Se. Princess Azula Zaodan.

The History of the Dai Li. Firelord Ozai Zaodan. 

Beyond the Walls of Ba Sing Se. Firelord Ozai Zaodan.  

Modern Earth Kingdom Societies: An Ethnographic Overview. Firelord Ozai Zaodan. 

Earthbending Tactics. Princess Azula Zaodan.

Earth Kingdom Hierarchies and Society. Firelord Ozai Zaodan. 

The Walls of Ba Sing Se, and Other Architectural Feats. Firelord Ozai Zaodan. 

Urban Planning in Ba Sing Se. Firelord Ozai Zaodan. 

Central Earth Kingdom Military Forces. Firelord Ozai Zaodan. 

The Crystal Catacombs: Under the Forbidden City. Princess Azula Zaodan.

At that, Katara stopped reading, stepping back from the desk and walking away. She turned on her heel, going down a random aisle just so she wouldn’t catch attention by drifting into space standing in the middle of the room.

They were planning the coup together, she thought to herself. The catacombs… and the Dai Li… She sighed through her nose. They were planning it together. 

For a moment, she was reminded of the last epic library she had set foot in, and the spirit that had resided within its walls. His words echoed in her head. 

‘Humans only bother learning things to get the edge on other humans. Like that firebender who came to this place a few years ago, looking to destroy his enemy.’

He had a point, didn’t he? 

Closing her eyes for a moment, Katara tried to re-orient herself in the present, and not think about that horrible day in the catacombs. The day Zuko betrayed her. And the day Aang almost died. It was too terrible to spend time dwelling on, so she tried to focus on the library around her. It wasn’t Wan Shi Tong’s epic library, but it was certainly an impressive one. She read some of the placards on the tops of the bookshelves as she walked around: Ancient Firebending Practices, Firebending Masters, Modern Firebending Theory, Martial Arts...

Without trying to, she sighed again, and walked out into the main room to where Mai was reading at a chair while petting Toto with her free hand, her long black-painted nails getting lost in the creature’s fur.

The Fire Nation woman looked up at her, her sharp golden eyes barely perceptible under black bangs. 

“What?”

“Can you help me find something?” She whispered. “I know there’s that index thing, but it’ll take forever, and maybe you’ll just know where to find what I want to read.”

Mai stood, leaving the book on a side table and setting the cat-fox on the floor. 

“What are you looking for?” 

“I don’t have any idea how things work here in the Fire Nation. And I hate that feeling. The only things I learned about the Fire Nation before the end of the war were about the military, and Ember Island, and a little about the schools. I don’t really know anything about how life is here, or how the government works.”

She raised a brow at her. “You want me to find you one book that covers all that?”

“Well, I’d ask Mikai, but I’m pretty sure it would take him ten years just to stand up,” Katara whispered softly. “Just show me something about the basics of the government here. Or the government section. Please.”

“Sure.”

She followed Mai around until they came to a bookcase titled Fire Nation Government, and Mai pulled out a book. When she had it in hand, Katara read the spine. 

“Fire nation politics and government, issue one.”

“What else did you want a book on? Our culture?”

Katara nodded, waiting as Mai went to collect another book for her.

Modern Fire Nation Society and Culture. Year of Sozin, 92.

“Thank you.”

“It's nothing. Do you want to check them out? Maybe Sokka and Suki are done arguing now.”

The books felt heavy in her arms, even though she only had two. They would last her a while.

“Sure. Are you going to borrow anything?”

“No. I’m still working on a book I have in our bedroom," Mai explained, "I’m not gonna get a new one yet. I was just looking through the one I might read next.”

“I noticed you read a lot.”

Mai glanced over to the circulation desk. “You were going through the ledger, weren’t you?”

“I was. I saw the books Firelord Ozai and Princess Azula were checking out before the end of the war,” she whispered.

“Yeah, I noticed that, too.”

“They were planning it for a while. The coup.”

“They were. Azula used to show me things in those books. Drawings. Maps of the prisons and tunnels under the city.”

It struck Katara that Azula and Mai used to be friends, and that Mai had grown up with her, a girl Katara could only describe as cruel, immoral, and insane. It was hard to fathom.

They approached Toph, relaxing back in the cushioned chaise, her arm under her head.

“Toph, we’re leaving,” Katara whisper-yelled, making the girl startle. “Sorry.”

Once Katara checked out her books and had a servant take them to her room, they reunited with Sokka and Suki in the gardens, their argument apparently behind them. The four of them entered a dragon-moose-drawn royal carriage, with Sokka and Suki sitting opposite Toph, Katara, and Mai. It was a large carriage, spacious on the inside, with cushioned seats, curtains on the glass windows and a small table built into the side of the wall. Despite the comfort of the interior, however, Mai felt completely uncomfortable. There were almost never circumstances that necessitated her showing visitors around the Caldera, and, if it happened, they were always upper-class cousins, or noble ladies her mother was friends with. Not foreigners who worked with The Avatar, enemies until half a year ago.

Unfortunately for Mai, Zuko was occupied, her mother was out of her life, and she was the one left to give the tour.

“We’re not going to be able to see much today. I have to be back at the palace by four, and there are lots of places to explore in the city. We can see more some other time.”

“Okay.”

Katara remembered to mind her manners. “Thanks for showing us around, Mai.”

“You’re welcome.”

The comments from the day before about their apparent lack of manners was still making Katara uncomfortable inside. She had never thought about herself as a person lacking in manners, and actually cringed when other people acted boorishly; being accused of uncouthness didn’t sit well with her. The whole ordeal had made her want to go out of her way to act politely, although the first mistake she and Sokka had made wasn’t even intentional. She made a mental note to try and think of Zuko as Fire Lord Zuko and not a runaway, crownless prince.

When she had taken her bath the night previous she thought about what Mai and Ty Lee had said, and it all made more sense to her. She and Sokka had acted inappropriately, although she didn't like to admit it.

They thought of Zuko as just another person after spending time with him so casually in tents for the month before the end of the war, but, really, he was the highest noble in the Fire Nation. A man people kowtowed to upon meeting. And they had just walked up and hugged him like he was an average citizen. Things like bowing and kowtowing were foreign to Katara, and, although she understood them, she had never grown up with them. In her tribe, there was no such thing as bowing, not even to elders. One carried no weapons on their person when meeting. But, everything was different in the Fire Nation.

“Can we get lunch somewhere in a bit?” Sokka asked. “Or, are we going back to the palace for lunch?”

“You just ate breakfast.” Katara barely resisted rolling her eyes, the sibling-to-sibling annoyance clear. “Can’t you wait?”

“We can go get lunch,” Mai answered. “Or, we can go back to the palace and eat there. Either is fine.”

“Maybe we should go back to the palace, if that’s okay. All the places here are probably really expensive, and Sokka and I barely have any money.”

“Same,” Toph echoed. 

Mai scowled in confusion. “You wouldn’t have to pay.”

“Why not? Is there a free-food-for-foreigners promotion going on today?” Sokka joked. 

“You’re guests of the Firelord. Of course Zuko would pay for your lunch. And anything else you need. We invited you to stay with us. Maybe that’s another custom that’s different here. If you invite someone to stay with you in the Fire Nation, you’re expected to pay for all their meals and for anything else they would need until they leave.”

“But, Fire Lord Zuko’s not with us,” Suki responded.

“He doesn’t have to be. I have his credit notes.”

“Oh.”

Sokka laced his hands behind his head, staring out the window with a smirk on his face. “Well, if it’s Zuko’s treat, I’m getting caviar with a side of lobster.”

“Sokka,” Katara groaned.

“That was supposed to be a joke. You’re such a spoilsport sometimes, Katara.”

“People here already think we have bad manners. Don’t give them reasons to.”

“I was joking. Gods,” he cursed, “Why is everyone so serious today? I’ll just shut up.” 

Katara gave him a little glare.

“At least there’s good food in the Fire Nation,” Suki commented randomly, trying to break the tension.

Katara was too annoyed by Sokka’s behavior to continue the conversation, merely dropping her head against the cushioned headrest and looking out the window, trying to lose herself in the sights of the Capital.

On the way out from the Royal Palace they passed through the wide expanse of volcanic rock surrounding it, making their way down the bare and undecorated private road between the palace and the plaza gate. 

“At first, I thought it was kinda weird that the palace is surrounded by such a big space with just plain rock, ‘cause it’s not fancy. It’s a little bit ugly, actually. You’d expect some sort of elaborate garden,” Suki theorized, “But, then I thought, actually, it makes sense. You don’t want assassins sneaking up on you in the bushes.”

“Right,” Mai confirmed, “That’s exactly the reason.”

"The Earth King has the same thing outside his palace in the Forbidden City, remember?" Sokka reminded her. "But it's a plain courtyard, not rock."

“I wonder how many assassination attempts there had to be for it to come to this,” Katara mused, “It’s definitely not aesthetically pleasing.”

“Over the years? Plenty. I don’t know exactly.”

“Has there been another assassination attempt on Zuko’s life?” A twinge of concern was evident in Katara’s voice. “I only heard about the one.”

“There was another. It was stopped by the guards.”

“How’d they get in?” Sokka wondered.

“He dressed as a servant and managed to blend in with the others. Tried to pretend like he was one of Zuko’s personal servants. Thankfully, the head butler noticed he wasn’t one of the servants really quickly and alerted the guards. They arrested him and found poison on him. He was going to poison our drinking water in our bedroom. So, I would have died too, probably,” she sighed, although she didn't seem too shaken up over the ordeal. 

“Who sent him?”

“Yakuza. He was a yakuza member himself; they could tell by the tattoos. But, we don’t know whether he was hired by the yakuza themselves or by someone else.”

“Do you think someone within the Fire Nation itself would want to kill Zuko?”

Katara watched the gates open before them, the carriage pausing for a second before it started rolling forward again.

“Of course. He has enemies. And the yakuza would rather kill him and put one of their own on the throne. Or, at least someone who would cooperate with them. Zuko’s not corrupt like that. He wants to tear them down.”

“Did Firelord Ozai cooperate with them?” Toph asked.

“I don’t know. Not that I knew. I knew he had a lot of connections. And they never made any attempts on his life that I know of, so… maybe. It’s not like Ozai would let people know if he had connections with them; it would’ve been a huge scandal.”

“Right.”

“That’s my parent’s house," she pointed out, not too enthusiastically. 

The mansion was two stories tall, its white walls accented by many windows, with a side balcony on the upper level, and topped by a tall, sloping red roof with gold trim. When Katara looked around she realized all of the houses in the Capital shared that characteristic coloring: white-washed walls, red-tiled roofs, and gold-painted beams. She noticed a front wall separating Mai’s family home from the street, and many steps upwards towards the level of the garden and the front door. The tops of trees and manicured hedges were visible over the top of the surrounding wall, but most were out of sight, the surrounding gardens and floor level of the home apparently shrouded in privacy.

Sokka noticed it as well. “I guess it’s nice you have the wall so people on the streets can’t look in your living room when you’re at home.”

Mai said nothing, merely nodding. Katara turned back to her window, too interested to see what the Capital looked like up close.

Despite the relatively modest size of the Caldera district, there were a myriad of government buildings, houses, and shops all carefully arranged in its crater walls. Space was used in a very deliberate way. Every mansion had multiple floors and a small yard, extending in front several feet, and on the sides, as well. Trees were strategically placed between buildings and houses, giving people a feeling of privacy and nature despite the close quarters. And many of the villas had privacy walls, some of the decorative, and some of the plain. At a few, an armored guard stood out front. Armed security, Mai explained, hired privately by some of the wealthiest in town. 

“I keep thinking about the assassination attempts,” Suki mumbled, clearly not too interested in the repetitive mansions, “Who would be next in line if Zuko died right now?”

“Not Azula, obviously,” Mai clarified, “He had her declared mentally insane. She’s not leaving the asylum.”

“Thank the Gods,” Suki exhaled, “Lock that bitch up and never throw away the key. She deserves to burn in the underworld for the rest of eternity.”

Katara said nothing, not disagreeing with her in the slightest, but Mai’s expression grew even more dour after that comment. She turned her head away to look out the window as the carriage rolled on. It was hard to think about her past sometimes, and all the things she had done for Azula. Memories flashed through her mind of fighting the Kyoshi warriors, Suki at their front, and tying them up, one-by-one, before taking them to their ship.

Once they had captured them, one of the girls had been crying. And when Azula had decided Suki would be separated from them, another began to cry as well, unable to keep tears from sliding down her painted face. Princess Azula had been laughing, making fun of the girls for crying when they claimed to be warriors, but Mai remembered Suki’s words to them:

‘Don’t be afraid of death, girls. If we face the grave, we face it bravely. It would be far worse to join these demons than to be killed by one of them.’ 

Mai caught Suki looking at her through the reflection in the glass and she turned, finally finding the courage to face her. To look her in the eye. It occurred to Mai that she had barely thought about what had happened with the Kyoshi warriors. Every time it had bubbled up in her subconscious in the past few months she had pushed it down, ignored it. It was hard to think about. 

After they had capitulated, Azula had been insistent that Mai and Ty Lee not tell the Kyoshi warriors whether they would die or be imprisoned, just to make the fear of the unknown even worse. Mai remembered them whispering amongst themselves about whether they were headed for a labor camp or to a public execution. She remembered Azula singling Suki out, taking particular pleasure out of toying with her, because she was the bravest one. The one who would never cower. Never cry. She would hold her azure fire right next to Suki’s face, fingers brushing against her jaw, her other hand threaded through the warrior’s hair, pulling her head back so Suki had to stare up at her, and the blue flames, just inches away.

‘One wrong move, one attempt to try and escape, and you’ll wish you were headed for an execution.’

She noticed Sokka had intertwined his hand with Suki’s, and when she looked up there was a darkness in his eyes and his expression that Mai had never seen in him before. His brow was just barely set in a scowl, his lips slightly turned in a frown, but his eyes… his eyes held a seriousness in them that Mai had never expected. She barely knew the teen. He had been an enemy from a distance, and not a fearsome one, and then a goofy friend of the Avatar. But he wasn’t playing the fool anymore. He looked more like a half-grown warrior than a goofball, his hand carefully intertwined with his girlfriend’s, his eyes set on Mai with a combination of emotions she had never seen in her direction. 

“You’ve never apologized to Suki for what you did to her, have you?”

Chapter Text

“Let not anyone pacify his conscience by the delusion that he can do no harm if he takes no part and forms no opinion. Bad men need nothing more to compass their ends than that good men should look on and do nothing.”

—John Stuart Mill

Fire Nation, Capital, Caldera District

Sokka’s words echoed in Mai’s head.

‘You’ve never apologized to Suki for what you did to her, have you?’

The moment he asked, the aura in the carriage instantly turned darker, and Mai felt trapped, isolated in her corner. 

“What did she do?” Toph asked, forgetting the role that Mai had played. Too much drama had happened during the end of the war, and it was hard to keep up with it all.

“Mai and Azula fought us when we were trying to return Appa to Aang,” Suki explained. “And Ty Lee, too. The three of them captured us and took us onto their ship.”

“Oh.”

“They separated us pretty early on and took us to prison. The girls thought they were going to die. Well, I did, too. I just thought Azula would keep me alive long enough for me to be used as bait for Sokka, and, as soon as I wasn’t useful anymore, I’d be killed.” 

The pang of guilt that ran through Mai was one she was very unfamiliar with, and for a moment she felt like she was going to be sick. Her hands jerked in her lap, wanting desperately to open the door latch on her left and run.

“They knew Azula was tormenting me, and they let her do it. They let us all think we were headed for the executioner.”

“How could you do that? ” Katara whispered, disturbed.

Her eyes suddenly looked so much like her brother’s. Like the ocean during a storm.

Mai would have thought they were strangely beautiful if they weren’t full of anger because of her. What she had done.

Her heat was beating much-too fast, pounding in her chest. She looked down at her hands, resting in her lap, shaking ever-so slightly. There was a reason she had never wanted to get in the carriage. 

“I’m sorry,” she said, breaking her silence, the words foreign in her mouth. “I’m sorry for what I did to you… I really am,” it hurt to look up at her again, “but you don’t know what it’s like to live my life, either. You didn’t grow up here. You didn’t grow up in this country, with these people. I was following orders. We were on opposite sides of the war, and—”

“You didn’t have to let Azula torment us like that, though,” Suki cut her off, her voice oddly calm, anger held in check. “We were on opposite sides, sure, but we had never done anything to you girls. But you let her torture us, anyway. You let us think we were going to be killed. You could have told us we were headed to prison. It wouldn’t have terrified them so much. They still have nightmares about Azula, you know. And the night we were separated.”

Mai scowled at Suki’s calm expression, only the slightest hint of resentment in her dark, blue-green gaze.

There was clearly a reason she had been chosen as the leader of her little group of fighters. Suki was strong. She could look death straight in the eyes and keep on fighting, Mai realized. She was the type of person who could step towards the executioner’s block with her head held high. 

“I shouldn’t have let her do that,” Mai said aloud, as much to herself as to them. “You’re right. You didn’t deserve it. I was weak,” she whispered, barely able to speak the words, “and I wish I could go back and change things, but I can’t.”

“Why did you do it?” Katara asked, the pain clear in her voice. “Why would you let Azula torment them? You don’t strike me as an evil person, Mai.”

“I was afraid,” Mai answered honestly, emotion in her voice in a way it never normally was. “I was in her…” she almost said ‘spell’, but stopped herself, worrying that it would sound stupid. “I was under her control for a long time. I let Azula control me for a long time. And I shouldn’t have. I never want to live like that again. When we captured you… when we were on the ship, and Azula was making it seem like she was going to hurt you— I should have said something, and I didn’t. I was too afraid,” she barely got out, because it was hard not to choke on the words, “I’m sorry for that. It took me too long to go against her. It wasn’t until it came down to saving Zuko’s life that I could do it. And I knew I would probably die for it…” she thought back, remembering that strange day.

“What happened after we left?” Suki asked. “I know she put you in prison for saving us, but, what did she do? What'd she say?”

Mai remembered it all in vivid detail, as it was too important of a memory not to. It was one of the most dramatic things that had ever happened in her often dull, mundane life.

“We were on the roof of the prison,” she began, her voice oddly soft. “The guards were holding me, two of them behind my back. Azula and Ty Lee were standing opposite me, maybe ten feet away. Azula told the guards to leave. I knew she was gonna try to kill me. But before she attacked me, she said, ‘I never expected this from you. The thing I don’t understand is— why? Why would you do it? You know the consequences.’ And I said, ‘I guess you just don’t know people as well as you think you do. You miscalculated. I love Zuko more than I fear you.’”

“Wow,” Toph sighed in awe. “What a thing to say.”

“She said I miscalculated. That I should have feared her more, and then she drew her hands to firebend at me. But the second before she could, Ty Lee stopped her. She was standing right next to her. And she hit her with a couple fast jabs, qi-blocking her. She actually knocked the wind out of her, and she fell over. Ty Lee came running over to me and told me to leave, but I knew it was pointless. There were guards all around us. In a second, they closed in on us, and they helped Azula up, because her arms had been paralyzed for the moment. Then she ordered us to be put in prison.”

Suki scowled at that. “Why didn’t she have you executed?”

"Yeah," Sokka echoed. "Why not?"

That was a question Mai didn't know how to answer. The inner workings of Azula's mind were foreign and complex. Although she had known the girl since they were both infants, she still felt a bit unsure about the depths of her psyche. In one moment, she could be rational, ruthless, and decisive; in another, she could be unhinged and chaotic. The only thing she knew for sure about Azula was that she almost always wore a mask. A mask that rarely came off, one that concealed deeper emotions and feelings, especially anything approximating weakness or regret. Other than desire for power and success, her other emotions were often buried somewhere within.

Mai knew she was capable of feeling things, at least somewhat, even compassion and possibly guilt, but they so rarely came up to the surface it was hard to know how much she could really feel them. And even deeper emotions like love were something she never associated with Azula. In all their years together, there were only two people she could ever imagine that Azula might have loved: her father and Ty Lee. 

Still, it felt too strange to speak the words out loud— the idea that she may have loved Ty Lee and wouldn't have wanted her to die. Mai was reminded of Zuko's words at breakfast that morning. What he had said about his father when asked why he didn't kill Ursa on the night of the coup. 

'Because he loved her...'

Mai knew it was possible that that was the answer, and that it was even possible that Azula had loved her, too, but something prevented her from being able to say the words out loud. 

“She… I don’t know…” Mai trailed off, looking away. 

“You must have some idea.”

It would have been too uncomfortable to admit that Azula may be capable of love. It was doubtful that they would believe her, but, beyond that, Mai didn't want to think about Azula having the capability of love when she was currently locked away for life in a mental asylum.

She took a deep breath, thinking of something to say. Something that was at least close to the truth.

“That would have been insane. And evil. Even for her. We’ve been close friends since we were kids. Except when I was in Omashu. I grew up with her. Ty Lee was her best friend. They used to hang out all the time when we were in school. To have us killed, me for saving Zuko, and Ty Lee for saving me— that would have been… too far, I think, even for her. I don’t know for sure. From what I understand, after we betrayed her, she went insane.”

“She was already insane,” Suki countered, “Azula would torment me just for fun. For no reason at all, other than to play with me. For entertainment. She’s sick in the head, Mai. She got pleasure out of it. I’m guessing that she just had it under better control before you both betrayed her, and after, she was so mad that it was harder to keep herself under wraps. When you two would leave the room, and it was just the two of us, the things she would say to me… I don’t even want to repeat some of it. She used to take a knife, touch the tip of it to my neck, and lightly run it up my throat,” Suki demonstrated, tracing with her fingernail from her collarbone up towards her jaw, “And draw just the tiniest bit of blood. If I moved even an inch, she would have sliced my throat. She said she would break me.”

“Suki,” Katara exhaled, disturbed. “You never said that.”

“I don’t like to talk about it. It was the worst time in my life.”

Sokka made a noise of aggravation beside her. “She should really be executed. I know Aang doesn’t believe in it, but she should be,” he insisted. “She deserves it.”

“What sense does it make to execute her and not Firelord Ozai?” Toph scoffed.

Mai withheld a sigh. “It’s illegal. Aang insisted on that when he allowed Zuko to take over.”

“I know. I’m just saying,” Sokka continued. “I don’t agree with Aang about this kind of thing. At least she’s locked up. I’m just worried she’ll be able to escape. She’s crazy, but she’s not stupid.”

“There’s really tight security,” Mai responded.

Sokka scoffed. “So? Zuko and I were able to break out of the Boiling Rock in one day. Supposedly the highest security prison in the country.”

“And Zuko was also able to break Aang out of Zhao’s fort,” Katara remembered. “When he dressed as the Blue Spirit.”

Sokka nodded. “Exactly. Just saying— Zuko, Azula, they’re not stupid. They can get out of situations you’d never think they’d be able to. At least Firelord Ozai can’t bend anymore. That’ll make it harder for him to escape. But Azula can still bend. She should be killed. In a public execution.”

“I’m not in charge,” Mai said simply. “But, even if Aang allowed it, which I doubt he ever would, I don’t think Zuko would ever allow her to be executed. Despite everything, that’s still his sister. Why doesn’t Aang just take her bending away?”

Katara thought back. “I asked him that on the night of Sozin’s comet. I was watching Azula. Because Zuko went with you all and Aang to take Firelord Ozai to prison. I had to stay back and keep an eye on her.”

“Right.”

“When Aang came back, I pulled him aside and talked to him. When he told me what he did, I asked if he would take away Azula’s bending, too. He said ‘no’— he said it isn’t a power he wants to use unless he absolutely has to. He said he hopes he never has to do it again.”

“Aang’s weird sometimes,” Sokka mumbled. “I don’t understand the way he thinks. Why wouldn’t it make sense to take both Azula and Ozai’s bending away? She’s just as bad as him. She’s just as much of a threat as he was. Well,” he stopped himself, “I guess not. He was a better firebender. But she’s terrifying. Her bending’s incredible. And she's unpredictable. And she's insane.”

“I think he feels like he needed to do it just the one time. Because it had to be done. But I don’t think he wants to go around doing it to any person he comes across who’s dangerous and evil. That would be a lot of people. I think maybe he worries people would start to fear him if he did that. People already fear him for what he did to Firelord Ozai. People didn’t know that it was even possible to remove someone’s bending.”

“Doing it to a random criminal on the streets is very different from doing it to Azula,” Sokka argued. “She staged a coup to take down Ba Sing Se and overthrow the Earth King. She tortures people. She’s kinda on a whole other level than a random bad person you would find on the streets.”

Katara exhaled sharply. “Hey, I’m not saying I disagree with you, Sokka. I’m just trying to explain his decision. Make your case to Aang. Not me. I’m not saying I agree with him.”

Sokka crossed his arms. “Fine. I will.”

When Katara looked back at Mai, her expression was dismal. She had her head hunched over slightly, her hands clenched, long nails pressing into her palms.

Katara thought it was strange that she felt bad for her. Still, in a moment of reconciliation, she reached her hand over and placed it on top of Mai’s. The Fire Nation woman startled at the sight of Katara’s brown hand on top of her own and snapped up to look at her. The carriage jolted slightly as they rounded a corner and Katara took both of Mai’s hands in her own.

“We all have to move on, Mai. We have to start somewhere, isn’t that what you said?”

The Fire Nation woman just stared at her, perplexed and amazed. The girl had been angry with her just moments earlier.

“I can tell you feel bad for not going against Azula earlier. But you did go against her. You did stop following her orders. Not as soon as you should have, but you did, consequences be damned. That counts for something. Same as Zuko. Both of you knew you would probably die switching sides. But you did it anyway.”

“That’s why we took Ty Lee in,” Suki commented, watching Katara hold Mai’s hands with a curious expression. “She apologized to us a lot. We decided to let the past be the past.”

Katara squeezed her hands affectionately before she let them go. “And we’ll do the same for you, Mai. Just like we do with Zuko. At least, I will.”

“You’re a very forgiving person,” Mai commented, finding it an odd thing. 

“Aang’s rubbing off on me,” she mused, smiling slightly.

“Thank you,” she whispered, before straightening, sitting upright again. “I think we should go back, though. I don’t think I should give you all a tour. It’s too weird. I can have a servant do it.”

She reached up to pull the cord by the door that rang the driver’s bell.

“Don’t—” Katara stopped her, then looked over at Suki, “unless Suki wants to stop. Do you want to go back?”

Suki's face was calm, unbothered. She turned towards her window. “It's fine. We can keep going.”

Mai wasn’t so sure. “You’re really okay with this? I understand if you’re not.”

“You apologized."

"Still."

Suki turned back to her. "Look, I decided to make my peace with the Fire Nation after the war. Obviously. Otherwise, I never would have agreed to come here and spend six months with my warriors helping Zuko's team relocate the colonials. I’m moving forward. Katara’s right. We all have to. I’m not opposed to working with people here. I’ve actually made friends here… Ty Lee, Zarin, Kenji, and soon I’ll probably be friends with you and Firelord Zuko. I know you don’t,” she looked at Sokka, “but I actually agree with Aang about what he said at the end of the war.”

Sokka scowled at her. “Seriously? ”

“Yeah. As long as people here are willing to stop acting the way they did, and ask for forgiveness, and try to move forward, amicably, then we should all try to get along. What’s the alternative? That was the point Aang and Zuko were making when they put out that statement together. What else should we do? Just keep fighting? What, should I hit Mai right now? Try to arrest her and take her to Kyoshi Island? Should I go take revenge on Zuko? Light his house on fire? And then we can all be fighting again? And everything will be chaos? It makes no sense. What Aang said is right. To move forward, to be at peace, we have to let go.”

“All of you are really forgiving,” Mai muttered, stating the obvious out loud.

“Well, you did go against her. That means something to me,” Suki thought about that for a moment. “That’s gotta mean you’ve changed inside. Or, did you do it just for Zuko?”

“No. Ty Lee and I had been feeling like turning against her for a while. We talked about it. But we were too afraid to do anything. She was the heir then, second only to the Fire Lord. It wasn’t easy to make the decision to turn against her. Against them. Together, they're a terrifying duo. No one usually crosses them.”

Katara scowled, but then she realized Mai was talking about Ozai and Azula together. Katara had never met the former Fire Lord, but judging off of Azula alone, she guessed that Mai was right. 

Suki took a deep breath, resting her head back on the cushions. “One thing that I’ve learned in the last year and half is that the war wasn’t about race. Not really. It was about power.”

Sokka made a face at her. “What? Of course it was.”

“My point is that it wasn't just based on race. It was about those in power abusing those who didn’t have power. Even people here got pushed down—" she looked at Mai, "by your own people. And Ba Sing Se was no haven. That was a total lie. To keep himself in power, Long Feng pushed people down, too. Even the Earth King and his family. Just so he could keep control… until Princess Azula overthrew them all, that is.”

“That’s a good point, Suki,” Toph responded. “And what I’ve heard from the colonials is that they really feel like they’re second-class citizens compared to the Fire Nation people from the mainland. It was bad during the war— you’re right. And it’s still bad. They feel like the rich people here keep them down. And don’t care about their problems.”

“Zuko cares about their problems,” Mai countered. “And them. So do I. They’re our people, too.”

As the carriage began slowing down, they approached a famous spot in the Caldera, a scenic overlook where the crater’s edge dipped down and one could see for miles, all the way out to the ocean.

“That’s a beautiful spot,” Katara commented.

Mai pulled the cord by the carriage door.

“Let’s get out here,” she suggested. “There’s an overlook, and I need a smoke.”

Once the carriage paused, Mai pulled on the handle to open the door, ducking her head and stepping out. Katara followed suit, relieved to be out as well. It was hard to stay in the small carriage when there was so much tension lingering among them. 

As the group made their way to the overlook, they said nothing, too distracted by the scenery ahead of them. The dip in the crater’s edge allowed for a complete view of the harbor’s city and the suburbs beyond. Past the steep drop-off of the edge, the city below them was large and expansive, buildings and parks extending out all around.

“Wow,” Katara sighed, stepping up to the railing. She rested herself on the edge, shielding her eyes from the sun with her free hand. 

The city stretched out far in both directions, morphing into suburban towns in the distance, and densely concentrated near the center. Her eyes struggled to take everything in. The land between the crater and the ocean was nearly filled, with the exception of one large park, she noticed, and another small one by the harbor. The one she had seen earlier, she realized. The harbor’s market and the docks were hard to recognize, as they were so far away, and the view was partially obstructed by tall buildings.

There were so many things to take in at once that it was overwhelming. Multi-level apartment complexes, impressive, tiered buildings that looked like schools, shopping centers, and rows upon rows of townhouses filled the city’s center. The streets were bustling in the early morning with carriages, carts, and pedestrians alike. When she looked further out, she took in the distant forest and mountains on her left, interspersed with neighborhoods near the coastline, and the ocean ahead, stretching out until the horizon. Boats and grand ships were both entering and leaving the harbor at the Great Gates of Azulon. One ferryboat that she could tell was leaving and at least two cargo ships were coming in.

“Can I have a light?” Mai asked from beside her.

Katara turned to her right, surprised to see Mai had been next to her all along. A random passerby nearby obliged her, lighting her cigarette with his firebending as she put it to her lips and drew in a breath.

“Thank you.”

“You’re welcome.”

The passerby gave Katara a double take before he walked away, back to his family near the other side of the overlook. She noticed him gesture to his wife and child to look at the strange collection of people beside them, probably piecing together who they were. 

“This is incredible,” Suki commented, approaching them. “You can see so far from up here. It’s breathtaking.”

“Really is.”

Sokka followed behind her and wrapped his arm around her waist, looking out at the city again.

“Were you looking down at the edge of the crater?” Toph asked. “Or the city?”

“The city.”

“The view’s really impressive— that’s what she meant. The city is really big. And you can see the ocean from here.”

“Oh. Yeah, it is a big city.” She pounded her foot on the ground, getting a better sense of it. “So many houses, I can’t even count. And that secret river Sokka talked about that one time.”

“What do you call that area?” Katara asked, looking out at the district near the water. “I know this is the Caldera.”

“We call it the market district, or the business district,” Mai explained, taking a drag from her cigarette. She wrapped her arms around her waist, holding them close to her body. 

“Are you cold?” Katara asked.

Mai nodded, shivering a little. “Just let me finish this and we can go back in. I’m not supposed to smoke inside.”

“Okay.”

Suki turned to Mai. “We really got off topic before. We were trying to ask you who would be next in line after Zuko. Not Azula, you said. Who’s the next heir, then?”

Mai exhaled, blowing smoke out the side of her mouth. “No one.”

Katara’s brow furrowed at that. “What?”

“Zuko’s first cousin, Lu Ten, is dead. He died in the war.”

“Right.”

She took another drag. “He has a few third cousins. A boy, No-iko, who’s even younger than him, but he’s not a bender. And his older sister’s also not a firebender.”

“Nonbenders are never supposed to be Firelord, right?” Sokka asked.

“Never. Other than them, there’s a second cousin, once removed, Akihiko, and he’s a firebender, but he’s in prison.”

“What for?” He asked.

“Serving as a commanding Admiral during the end of the war. He moved in to occupy Ba Sing Se after we took over. He’s a devout supporter of Ozai. Refused to serve Zuko, and refused to accept the war’s over, so he’s incarcerated.” 

“And they’re not considering a pardon for him?” Katara asked.

“No."

Katara’s brows drew up, her gaze far away, staring out at the ocean in the distance. 

“There’s no real heir.”

“There isn't. His advisors nag him about it constantly.”

Sokka huffed. “There really isn’t anyone? That’s strange.”

“Not unless Zuko would have Akihiko pardoned and named heir, but he won’t do that, because he’s an Ozai sympathizer and… a horrible person, honestly. Other than him, any remaining relatives would be ineligible for the throne because they’re not legitimate heirs.” 

Katara wondered about that. “What?”

“Firelord Azulon had a few other children besides Iroh and Ozai, and some of them are still alive. He had a few daughters and a son with his concubines, one of whom is still alive, and a firebender, but he can’t be an heir.”

“Why? Because he’s the son of a concubine?” Sokka asked.

“Yeah. Children of concubines are completely illegitimate here. This isn’t Ba Sing Se. They have zero claim to the throne. Only a child of a legal wife can be an heir, and here, concubines aren’t considered legal wives."

Sokka crossed his arms, looking out the ocean as well. “So, this guy is Zuko’s uncle."

“Half-uncle,” Mai corrected.

Sokka rolled his eyes a bit. “Yeah, I got that. What’s his name?”

“Zendari. He’s old,” Mai commented, taking another drag. “He’s nearly eighty.” 

“Spirits,” Suki swore, holding her hair back to keep it from being blown around by the wind. 

A thought occurred to Sokka, one he hadn’t remembered to ask before. “Zuko doesn’t have any concubines, does he?”  

A laugh escaped Mai’s lips. “No. And I’d never let him.”

Katara pulled her arms around herself, too, finally getting a bit cold. “So, basically, you and Zuko have to have a child together.” 

“And one who’s a firebender. Here, a girl could inherit, if need be, but only so long as she’s a bender. Firebending isn’t optional.”

Katara raised her brows. “I guess people put a lot of pressure on you two to get married now and start having kids.”

Mai’s expression answered her question well enough, the exasperation clear. “Oh, they do.”

“What do you think about all this?” Toph asked Mai. 

She sighed. “I never thought we would get to this point… No heirs. It’s crazy. I’m ready to get married whenever, honestly. And for us to try and start having kids as soon as next year. It’s soon, but we’re not a normal couple. And he needs an heir. One who’s not insane or in prison.”

“Do you ever worry that you’ll only have nonbenders?” Katara wondered aloud.

Mai stepped towards the ledge and put her cigarette out on the railing. “I do. We’re not in a great position to start with, because only his dad could firebend and both of my parents are nonbenders.”

“Good luck,” Katara responded, and scowled when she saw the expression on Mai’s face. “I’m not being sarcastic! I mean it. That’s a lot of pressure on you.”

“On us. Come on, we can go back in. It’s chilly out here.”

Once they were back in the carriage and moving through the streets of the Caldera, Katara leaned over so she could look directly out the window, taking everything in. 

The tour didn’t last very long, and they didn’t get out again to see anything on foot, but Mai still showed them a myriad of places around the Capital. Katara was surprised to find out how many buildings they could tuck in one volcano crater. There was the Ministry of Justice building, the Royal Fire Academy for Girls, the Royal Fire Academy for Boys, a private firebending school, the Central Military Office, the Administration of Agriculture building, some banks, and a five-story National Administration Office. All of the buildings were located along or very near the central plaza, which surrounded the palace. Mansions, shops, and restaurants were further out, all the way up to the edge of the crater. Mai explained that there were some places they weren’t going to have time to look at in the Caldera, like the National Theater and the Capital Galleria. 

When they made a turn down a more secluded drive off the plaza, they finally got to see a more normal neighborhood in the Caldera, which, Katara quickly realized, was still incredibly impressive. One three-story mansion was followed by another, and then another, interrupted only by a triplex of shops joined together. Katara tried to read the names on the fancy signs out front but struggled to comprehend the characters. She looked in their large glass windows. One was clearly a tea shop, with spaced-out, elegant tables inside, but the stores on either end were unfamiliar to Katara.

“What are those shops? I can’t understand the signs.”

Mai looked over. “They’re the names of the owners. One is Sendashi’s. They’re a real estate firm. The other is Kai-Shang, the names of their founders. They’re an interior design company.”

Katara tried not to chuckle at the bewildered, comical look on Sokka’s face at that moment, but failed. 

“Interior design company? ” He asked slowly, comedically. “You need a whole company to help you decorate your house?”

Mai chuckled a tiny bit, relieved at least that the tension from before was gone.

“Here, we hire people to do almost everything. You can do it yourself. People just like to hire someone who has a critical eye for decorating, and can find exactly what they need, and explain how to furnish their spaces well.”

“Feng shui,” Toph commented.

“Sort of,” Mai countered, “We have our own ideas about interior design.”

 Sokka just made a noise of disbelief. 

“I can’t even imagine how rich a person has to be to need to hire someone to decorate their house,” he mused, looking out at a particularly extravagant mansion with well-trimmed shrubbery. “That guy, I bet.”

The carriage began to turn around a cul-de-sac with a fountain in its center. Once they could see what was at the end of the road, Mai pulled the stop cord. Katara looked over, barely able to see some stone steps leading up to a large building.

“This is the last place I’ll show you all today.”

“What is it?” Toph asked. “I can’t tell anything with my feet still in this carriage.”

“We can get out. This is Akihara University.”

After everyone exited the carriage they gathered around Mai, near the base of the stairs that led to the impressive stone building before them. They were near the edge of the crater wall, and the building was one of the largest in the Caldera they had seen. It was unusually wide, with four floors and a covered walkway at the base that wrapped around the building. The red pillars of the external corridors matched the red-tiled roof which Katara had to tilt her head up to see. She squinted in the midday sun, raising a hand to shield her eyes.

“Nice college. The one in Ba Sing Se is better, though, I think,” Sokka said to himself, looking around. “It’s bigger than this one.”

College students and professors alike were coming and going from the building, making their way around using the external walkway or leaving the campus, book bags slung over their shoulders. Katara noticed they weren’t all dressed in matching uniforms like young school children did in the Fire Nation.

“So, this is where everyone in the Caldera goes to college?” Suki asked, squinting in the light. 

Mai shook her head. “No. That’s not how things work here. This is the most selective university in the whole country. People come from all over, even the outer islands. Or the colonies— back when there were colonies,” she corrected herself. “They only let in a hundred students a year.”

“Only a hundred?” Sokka mocked. 

“Considering that millions of people live in the Fire Nation, it’s pretty selective,” Mai retorted. “They turn almost everyone down. The people that get in have to pass all these intelligence tests and oral exams in addition to the regular college entrance exam. And pass the interviews. There’s both a firebending school and an academic college. That’s the firebending dojo there,” she pointed to a large complex building on the left with several dormers and steep, sloping roofs. “People can dual-enroll, but they have to be accepted into both, which is extremely hard.”

“Is there anyone we know of who went here?” Katara wondered.

Mai thought for a second. “I don’t think you would know almost any of them. Out of the people you’ve met? Ozai and Amara. That’s it.” 

“I never met Firelord Ozai,” Katara responded.

Mai scowled. “Oh. I thought you did— on the day of Sozin’s Comet.”

“No. When they took him to prison, I had to stay with Azula and make sure she didn’t escape.”

“What about Iroh?” Toph asked, changing the subject. “He’s really smart. Did he go here?”

“He didn’t go to college,” Mai explained. “He went right into the military. He went to a military prep school, then to real  training, and then to the war.”

"Ah, gotcha."

“How does the school system work here?” Suki asked. “On my island we all just meet in one room and the same lady teaches us pretty much everything.”

“Everyone in the country is required to go to primary and secondary school. It—” she faltered, trying to explain. “Primary school lasts from about age five until eight. Secondary school is basically between ages nine and twelve, or thirteen for some people. And ‘prep’ school is from age thirteen or fourteen to seventeen— or eighteen, depending when your birthday is.”

“‘Prep’ school?” Sokka asked, an eyebrow quirked.

“College preparatory school. It’s for people who want to go to college. People who never plan on going to college can stop at thirteen. They can start working with their parents, farming, or whatever. Or, just finish school and start working somewhere. But people who want to go to college in the future can go on to ‘prep’ school, and then apply for college, and see if they get in. Public primary and secondary school is free, but prep school isn’t.”

“How much is it?”

“It depends where you go.” 

“So, where do most people from this area go to college, then?” Suki wondered. “I’m assuming most people here are educated past the age of thirteen.”

“Capital University. That’s the main one. There’s another one in a city nearby, but it’s not as well-respected. It’s more…” she faltered again, not used to having to converse with peasants, “it’s for more working-class people. Caldera residents don't go there. It’s cheaper. You can learn more basic trades there— not that there’s anything wrong with that. People there learn how to become carpenters or nurses. More hands-on kind of jobs.”

“I saw that you’re preparing for the college entrance exam,” Katara mentioned. “Are you trying to get in here?” She jerked her head in the direction of Akihara.

Mai scoffed, like it was ridiculous. “Are you kidding me? I can barely read the high-classics, let alone understand them and debate them. Or do anything else you need to get in here.”

“You seem smart to me,” she countered. 

Mai smirked oddly. “Oh, Katara. There’s smart… and then there’s Akihara smart.” 

Chapter Text

"Stab the body and it heals, but injure the heart and the wound lasts a lifetime."

—Mineko Iwasaki

Fire Nation, Royal Palace

By the time Aang and Firelord Zuko were finally finished with their meetings it was already late afternoon, the sun hovering low in the sky.

After sitting still for so long during the last meeting, Aang had sighed in relief upon standing up and stretching out his legs. When Zuko said they could go outside, the boy had been so excited that he had kept walking in front of Zuko, even though he had no idea where they were going.

As they finally exited the rear doors of the palace and stepped out into the courtyard that adjoined the stables, Aang started running towards Appa immediately, airbending so he could lift himself up onto his head. He reached down to hug the bison, wrapping his arms around the animal’s gigantic neck.

“I missed you, Appa.” He stroked his head affectionately. “Those meetings were so long. I’m sorry, buddy.”

The sky bison let out a low noise in response, relaxing on the smooth courtyard tiles and letting Aang stretch himself out on top of his head.

Zuko noticed his other friends gathered around the animal as well, goofing off and talking amongst themselves. Katara was smiling up at Aang, stepping towards him and Appa with Momo in her arms. Soon the lemur was trying to climb on top of her head, like Aang had done on Appa, making her laugh. Sokka and Suki started chuckling, too, trying to help her get Momo off.

But such a scene, however tender, did little to distract Zuko from the worries pressing on his mind.

He couldn’t get Aang’s words from earlier out of his head. They had been bothering him all day, pushing through the fog of his subconscious throughout all their meetings. Finally, with his friends thoroughly distracted, he had a moment to clearly think back on what Aang had said to him in his office that morning. 

“The Earth King’s… changed.”

Zuko said nothing for a moment, and considered those words, trying to decipher what he really meant. He found the deliberate vagueness on Aang's part to be an odd choice.

“He’s changed? What do you mean?”

Aang said nothing for a moment, sighing. “What happened with Long Feng really affected him. And what happened with Azula, too. It changed him… And then, after Toph helped him escape from prison, when he went traveling, he got captured again. By the Dai Li. He was put in house arrest at a mansion at the end of the war with his wives and his children."

Zuko nodded. "I know that bit. I'm glad my sister didn't kill them."

That made Aang wonder. "Why didn't she?"

"On our father's orders. They both knew how much the people in the Earth Kingdom love the royal family, and she and our father both thought it would be a huge mistake to kill them, because it would make martyrs out of them."

Aang raised his brows. "Ah. I see."

"They thought it was better to put them all on house arrest at a mansion somewhere and lock them up. Have agents watch them and make them stay inside. That way the people of Ba Sing Se would see that even the royal family had to obey the Fire Nation. So, it was better not to execute them," he explained.

"Well, I'm glad they didn't, but she did execute Long Feng, and that's had an impact on Keui."

Zuko looked down, guilt suddenly apparent in his eyes. "Yeah, I remember. I was there."

Aang's eyes widened. "Oh."

It was strange to think of the period when Zuko had been re-instated as crown prince, after betraying them and before joining them. 

"They cut off his head?" Aang asked quietly. He remembered people talking about that.

"...Yeah. It was a public execution."

Zuko thought back to the Coup of Ba Sing Se, to his sister sending Long Feng to his death. He remembered seeing the man’s hands trembling ever so slightly as he climbed the final few steps to the platform, and seeing him turn to the horrified crowd. He remembered how he had refused to kneel at the executioner’s block, and the way his sister had grabbed him by his braid and kicked him behind the knees, forcing him down. When the massive blade had come down in one fell swoop and his his head had been cut off his body, Zuko remembered how odd it was that his green eyes had stayed open after death, the terror somehow still lingering in them. 

He blinked a few times, taking another drag and trying to forget that it had ever happened. 

“Is the Earth King still upset about that?” He asked.

Aang tilted his head to the side. "I mean, yeah, but not a whole lot, because Long Feng had manipulated and controlled him his whole life. But it did scare him, and it shocked him because Long Feng was almost like a dad to him.” He looked up, watching Zuko scowl down at the desk, seemingly lost in thought. “Kuei’s actually running the country now, you know that, right?”

Zuko made a noise of annoyance. “Yes, I know that, Aang. But what do you mean— it’s ‘changed’ him? Changed him how? I mean, he was angry, of course.”  

His gray eyes drifted to the side. “Yeah, Keui was angry. And sad, too.”

The Fire Lord noticed the unusual seriousness in the young monk, his emotions starkly different than normal. Aang’s playful spirit was absent at the moment, and Zuko thought it was slightly disturbing to see the little thirteen-year-old Avatar be so solemn, his bald head tilted down.  

“What are you trying to say to me? You’re not saying—” he paused, not even wanting to speak the words, “you’re not saying I should be worried about the Earth King attacking us, are you?”

“No!” Aang sat up straight suddenly, shaking his hand. “No, no. I’m not saying that. Please don’t think that. I just mean that… he’s taking his job really seriously now. Not that he was trying to mess around before, but— things were different. Do you know about his past? What his life was like before we told him about the conspiracy?”

Zuko took another drag from his cigarette, thinking. “I know some of it. He was basically a fake king, right? And Long Feng was actually in charge? That’s what Azula said.”

Aang nodded. “Yeah, that’s basically true. It was an insane conspiracy. He inherited the throne when he was really young.”

“How young?”

“Four years old. So, they allowed Long Feng to be in charge of running things. He was the Grand Secretariat, technically, but, really, he was in charge.” 

“I got that.”

“Keui was in charge of the Royal Palace itself, but Long Feng and the Dai Li were controlling Ba Sing Se and the surrounding territories. Back then, the military and the council were loyal to Long Feng and the King. But Kuei let Long Feng run things. Everything changed when we showed the Earth King that Long Feng was lying to him. When Kuei ordered Long Feng to be put in prison, the military and the Council of Five sided with Kuei, but the Dai Li stayed loyal to Long Feng."

"Right. Before my sister convinced them to follow her."

"Exactly."

"They're gone now," Aang reminded him, "There's no such thing as the Dai Li anymore."

"I know. My sister banished them."

"I meant that the Earth King isn't having a Dai Li police force anymore."

"I heard that. Back to when he was a fake king—" Zuko urged him to continue. 

"Yeah, so, to keep Keui from taking over, and becoming a real king, they lied to him his whole life. And to his kids and his wives. Long Feng kept them prisoner, basically, trapping them in the Forbidden City. They couldn’t leave or have guests come into the inner palace. And he was super careful about who talked to them. The eunuchs had to stay in the palace, too. They couldn’t ever mention their past, or the war, or go visit their families.”

Zuko brows raised in shock. “That’s harsh.”

“He never told Keui or his sister or his wives about the war. Ever. And when new women were added to the harem they were absolutely forbidden to mention the war. Or to say anything about what was happening out in the world. They had to ‘forget their old life, and focus only on life in the palace,’” Aang mocked, repeating what he had been told. “So, Kuei had zero idea about the war. But, he also had no idea that he wasn’t a real king. He thought he was the real king.”

Zuko’s incredulous expression clearly showed his lack of belief in that statement. 

“How is that even possible? That’s insane. He didn’t even have control of the military!” 

Aang sort of shrugged. “I know. He explains it better than I can. But he also thought the military was dormant, because he thought there was no war."

Zuko made an exasperated expression. "Right."

"Basically, Long Feng raised him, and some servants and his older sister. But his older sister and Long Feng were in on it together. I don’t remember why," Aang scowled, "He convinced her or something.”

“Okay.”

"When he was growing up, they were all telling him how he was supposed to be king. That his duties were to be in charge of cultural events, religious events, like ceremonies, and— parties. That kind of thing. When he got older, he was told he needed to run the palace and manage his family. That those things were his main job: managing the palace, his harem, and taking care of his kids and their education. That’s it. He was told that an Earth King isn’t directly involved with the affairs of the state, or the military.”

“Hah!” Zuko laughed. “What a joke.”

Aang exhaled sadly. “It's what he was told. That the military's run by the government and the Council of Five. And the city's run by the mayor and the Grand Secretariat. And other government workers. They convinced him since he was a little boy what his duties were supposed to be; he didn’t know any better, and none of his wives or eunuchs told him different. They were too afraid of Long Feng to say anything. If anyone said something about the war or about the powers that an Earth King should have, they were put in prison or killed. Or banished. Some of them didn’t even know themselves. And anyone that visited the outer palace, like, for parties, wasn't allowed to mention the war. No one was.”

“That’s wild…” Zuko exhaled a line of gray smoke, his gaze drifting as he thought back. “But I remember a little of that from when I was a refugee in the city. One time I mentioned the war and everyone gave me really weird looks, like I had just said the Earth was flat or something. I never mentioned it again."

“People gave us weird looks when we mentioned it, too. Long Feng and the Dai Li had a really tight grip on people during the end of the war. Everyone was terrified of going against them. So they stayed quiet.”

"I still don’t understand how Keui wouldn’t know that he wasn’t a real king, though. How’s that possible? You go to plays,” he scoffed, gesticulating with his hand, "You see great kings in the theater, you see them lead armies into battle. And you see how they’re supposed to lead. Even peasants know that stuff."

“Keui didn’t go to the theater then. He never left the palace.”

Zuko narrowed his eyes. “...And he didn't think that was strange?" He asked slowly.

Aang knew where Zuko's snideness was coming from. He understood his disbelief, but Aang empathized with Kuei. The man had been treated like a prisoner and a child, and it made Aang sad for him because, despite being nearly forty years old, Kuei had just recently stopped being a little boy inside. 

“You didn't live the life that he lived, Zuko. He was told by everyone around him it was inappropriate for an Earth King to leave the palace grounds. He thought everyone should come to him, and he shouldn’t have to go anywhere.”

“That’s not true. Even I knew that growing up here. The Earth Kings used to travel all over, fight in battles, and even visit the Fire Nation, long ago. We used to have a guest room in the Annex just for the Earth King, for when he would visit, before the war."

“Sure, but Keui never knew that. The only plays he saw were the ones approved by Long Feng, put on in the palace itself, with a script that Long Feng pre-approved. This guy was psychotic," Aang emphasized, "He did crazy stuff to prevent Keui from knowing the truth about the world, and about history.”

Zuko sighed. “It’s a little hard to believe. But, I guess it’s possible.”

“People only know what they're told. Kuei was told he was supposed to be a model to the people. A kind and loving husband and father. To set an example in his household for people in the Earth Kingdom to follow. And everything else was for the government workers. The ministers, or— whatever. Not him. He thought government work was beneath him.”

“Agni.”

“And he didn’t understand that he should’ve had control over them. He was told a well-run kingdom in modern times runs itself. And the king shouldn’t be involved— that that was a thing of the past— the Earth King running the government, I mean. Long Feng found some old lines in a book written by this great philosopher that said a king doesn’t need to manage the affairs of the kingdom, because, if he’s a good king, and it’s a good kingdom, then it should run itself, and there would be no need for him to interfere. By acting perfect, and acting with wuwei, the government would just… run itself, without him needing to order anything. And Kuei believed it.”

Zuko raised his good brow, still incredulous. “Is he stupid?”

“No,” Aang answered, his voice a little high. “I don’t think he’s stupid. He was just brought up in a really weird way. He was so manipulated; they didn’t even let him read normal books. They only let him read things that wouldn’t let him know the reality of the outside world. And how an Earth King should be. He never even left the palace grounds! I mean, his palace is enormous. It's called the Royal Palace, but really it's a bunch of palaces and gardens inside the gates."

"I know what it is, Aang," Zuko droned.

"They never let him leave. He's nearly forty, and before we came he never left..." Aang drifted off.

The air-nomad inside him was itching to run away just at the thought. The concept of staying in one place that long and not being able to leave made him feel physically uncomfortable, like he wanted to reach for his glider and fly away.

“That’s— hard to believe.”

“It’s true. We showed him that there was a war, and that Long Feng was lying to him. It was so hard for him to accept. They made sure of everything to keep him out of the loop. He’s not really stupid. But he was gullible. Back then,” he clarified, “Back then, he was. He trusted people. Now? Not at all.”

Zuko sat back in his chair. “Oh, that’s what you meant… when you said he changed.”

“Yeah. It’s— he really doesn’t trust people now. Except his family. He’s very serious. He’s taken control. Actually. Not just of Ba Sing Se, but of most of the Earth Kingdom. The other major kings are falling in line with him, like they used to before the war. He wants to restore the Earth Kingdom to what it was. He wants the other kingdoms to follow Ba Sing Se again."

“I know. He wants vassal kingdoms, like the Earth Kings used to have a long time ago.”

“Yeah, and he's doing it. And he didn’t have to send out a single soldier. He convinced them to follow him, without any fighting. Did you read the statement he put out about unifying the Earth Kingdom?”

Zuko nodded. “Of course, I did. It was persuasive. He seems very passionate. And he’s still angry about the war, that's for sure.”

“Obviously, yeah, he was, but now he’s mainly just—” Aang’s face scrunched up, regretting his words, “well, he’s still angry. He’s gotten kind of sad and… serious. I don’t know how to put it, exactly. But he’s—” he drew in a breath, “he’s determined, that’s for sure.”

“Determined,” Zuko repeated, thinking it over, “to take charge, you mean?”

“Yeah, but he already has. It’s more than that. He’s determined to be a great king.”

“So am I. What’s wrong with that?” Zuko wondered aloud.

Aang raised his hands up. “Nothing. And it’s right that he’s taken charge. He is the Earth King. I’m just warning you that he’s an actual king now, making his own decisions on all kinds of things, including trade and the military. And he doesn’t have any real experience. I mean, he knew some from Long Feng or sitting in on meetings, but he hasn’t had experience actually making government decisions himself.”

Zuko scoffed. “And people are still following him? Even though they know he wasn’t actually running things?”

“Some people know that. But the people love him in Ba Sing Se; they don't really care. And it’s not like you had any experience running a country, either, Zuko.”

“No. But I watched my father run this country for a few years. I studied for it. I know how things work, generally. From what you’re saying, it sounds like Kuei had no idea how to actually rule, because of Long Feng manipulating him.”

“He just knew the basics. But, either way, he’s doing it now. He disbanded the Dai Li, because of how corrupt they were. He took the colonies back. And he’s not using advisors.”

Zuko’s gold eyes blew wide. “He’s not using advisors?!”

Aang pursed his lips. “Nope. He has court meetings, and meetings with the Council of Five, and he listens to them, but he doesn’t have any real advisors anymore. He doesn’t trust people. He reads reports and things himself. Or he goes out and supervises things himself. And he’s working round-the-clock. He works so much that his wives and his daughters are worried about him.”

Zuko wondered about the man, this stranger he had never met but heard so much about.

“Really?”

“He’s determined to be a real king now. I think what happened before really embarrassed him.” Aang looked up at the ceiling, sighing a little. “I know it did.”

“Of course, it embarrassed him," Zuko responded, "It made him look stupid and foolish.”

Aang nodded solemnly. “Yeah. And it hurt his feelings a lot. He feels really betrayed and manipulated. He’s over it some now, but it’s still bothering him.”

“Okay…” Zuko looked down at the desk, finally putting out his cigarette on the ashtray, and tried to consider how Earth King Kuei’s feelings would affect him. “Why are you telling me this, Aang?”

“You’re gonna have to start dealing with him soon. I know you two have never met, but the peace-talks are coming up soon, and I just wanted to warn you.”

“That he’d be in a bad mood?” Zuko huffed. “My sister kind of deposed him and took over his kingdom, I expected that.”

“No, I—” Aang cut himself off again, not sure how to phrase what he wanted to say. He looked at Zuko, catching his golden gaze. “Keui’s not a bad guy. I don’t think so. People really love him. He’s good to people. I’ve spoken to his kids a few times over the past few months. They really look up to him. I mean, he’s an icon in the Earth Kingdom. But discovering what happened during the war changed him a lot. And learning that people he trusted so much were lying to him and manipulating him his whole life.”

“That’s understandable,” Zuko replied. “I mean, it always hurts when people you trust lie to you and betray you. I get that.”

“Yeah. But, it’s different for Kuei. It was on a whole other level for him. Like, a world-altering level. He had no idea what the real world was like. He was... coddled, I guess that's the word. He had no idea what war was like, or how much people suffer out in the world. It’s been a rude awakening for him,” Aang whispered solemnly, thinking back on some of his hardest conversations with the Earth King. “That’s what I’m trying to say.”

Zuko nodded slowly. “Okay.”

“After learning what happened during the Hundred Years War, and how he was manipulated by his own government and the man who raised him… I don’t think it’s going to be easy to get things started,” he emphasized.

“It’s gonna be hard to work with him.”

“Oh, yeah. He might try to give the Fire Nation a bad deal or something, like undervalue your products or whatever. I don’t know.”

Zuko pinched his temple. “I get what you’re saying now. You don’t think he’d ever consider attacking, though?”

A dramatic sigh escaped Aang’s lips. “Oh, spirits, I hope not! If he does, he’s goin’ straight to prison, hope he knows that much. I don’t think he would do that, though. That would be crazy. He’s not crazy.”

“Sending away all his advisors sounds a little nuts, to be honest.”

“His advisors were Long Feng's advisors.”

Zuko scoffed. “And all the advisors I inherited were working for my dad. So, I fired them and hired new ones. You can’t run a kingdom by yourself. Especially not without real experience.”

“It’s—” he cringed, “it’s not ideal. That’s for sure. But, he’s doing pretty well so far. If it means anything, he did a good job running his palace and taking care of his family. They love him. And his kids are pretty amazing."

"So?"

"So, he seems like a great dad. He’ll probably be a good king, too. But— it might be hard to work with him, I’ll just say that much.”

“Got it. Thanks for the heads up.”

Aang pushed his chair back and stood suddenly, realizing everyone was waiting for them.

“We better get back. I’ve kept you long enough.”

Blinking, Zuko focused back on the present, watching Aang zoom effortlessly around the courtyard on an air scooter. Gone was the peacekeeping Avatar for the moment, replaced by the child he was when had the freedom to be. 

As Zuko turned his head he noticed Katara walking over to him. Her blue and white dress made her stick out starkly in the courtyard. She flicked her long braid behind her shoulder, tilting her head to look at his serious expression.

“Well, you’ve been staring off into space for a long time,” she teased, but when he didn’t smile, she scowled. “Are you okay?”

Zuko met her bright blue gaze. “I’m okay. Thanks. I just have a lot on my mind.”

“I’m sure you do.” She moved to stand beside him, watching the group play around. “I can’t even imagine the stresses you’re under."

“Well, I knew this job would be hard when I accepted it.”

Katara thought back for a moment, to when they were all talking about who would be the Firelord after the war. And how Zuko hadn’t really wanted it at the time; rather, he had accepted the responsibility when Iroh had passed it on to him.

She thought about Iroh for a moment, and why he had decided to have his then sixteen-year-old nephew take the throne (and all its burdens) while he went off to Ba Sing Se to play a board game and run a teashop. 

“Why doesn’t your uncle come out here and help you run the country?” Katara wondered. 

That made Zuko sigh. He continued staring straight ahead, his gaze on Aang playing with Appa and Toph in the courtyard. Katara took a moment to study the outline of his face— the straight bridge of his nose, the gentle curves of his lips. With his hair pulled back into a topknot, it was easy to see his stunning gold eye as well as his graceful cheekbone and jawline. She forgot how handsome he was sometimes.

But then, she supposed, with Zuko, it really depended which side of him one was standing on.

“I think he just doesn’t want to be here. He’s tired, Katara. Tired of everything. The war, being refugees, being a traitor, being in prison... Winning the city back from the Fire Nation. It took a lot out of him, and he’s kind of an old man, so he needed time to rest. I understood that. He said he wanted to relax in Ba Sing Se. Spend time in his tea shop.”

“I knew that much, but it’s been six months—” she cut herself off, “What does he say about coming back, once he’s rested?”

“He keeps delaying. Says there’s White Lotus meetings he can’t miss there. Or, ‘I can’t come back this week because it’s the orchid festival, and I agreed to help,’ or ‘I agreed to host my friend’s kid and his wife at my house while they look for a new apartment, so I can’t go back right now,’— that kind of thing.”

Katara crossed her arms, affecting a motherly gaze. “Those kind of sound like excuses.”

Zuko merely glanced over at her perturbed expression, not wanting to argue about it.  

“They kind of are. But, in another way, I get it. He’s tired. He doesn't like conflict. He doesn’t want to be in the Capital again, running from place to place, putting out fires with me. It feels like there’s always some kind of crisis here. Especially after something as damaging as us losing the war. Losing the colonies," he emphasized, "sometimes I still can’t believe it. Growing up, I never thought we would lose the colonies. We always depended on them for food and coal and so many things. It’s gonna be hard to get by now.”

“And that’s exactly why he should be here to help you. I mean, I knew he wanted to stay in Ba Sing Se for a little bit and rest after the war ended, but I didn’t think it would be for this long. You need him,” Katara insisted.

Zuko’s eye darkened just a shade, Katara noticed. Standing on his good side gave her a better idea of his emotions.

“I miss him. I don’t need him here, though. I can do this,” he stood up for himself, “Barely. But I can do it on my own. I don’t need a babysitter, or a supervisor.”

Katara exhaled, annoyed. “I didn’t mean that you need him because you’re incapable. I meant you need him because he’s your family. He’s more of a dad to you than your own father is. He can help you through this.”

“That would be great,” Zuko said, looking down at her feet, “But I don’t think it’s gonna happen. I have a sense of what he wants.”

Katara scowled. “And what’s that?”

“Retirement. He just wants to take things easy for the rest of his life. He was already doing that when he went out and set sail with me when I was banished, basically. Except, he was raising me. But there were three years in between me being banished and finding you all. For most of that time we were just out on my ship, going around the world. He spent most of his time drinking tea, playing Pai Sho, and… relaxing. Shopping. Doing calligraphy. I mean, he would teach me firebending, and talk to me, but he was more or less retired. Losing his son took everything out of him. It took the fire out of him.”

“Really?”

Zuko nodded sadly. “I remember him before his son died and after. Before, he was more active. More determined. He had a lot of things he wanted to do. But, after?” Zuko looked out at the setting sun, its red-orange hue washing over him. “He was super depressed for a while, and then he just wanted to rest. He lost his wife first, and then his son. It was a lot to deal with.”

“I’m sure it was.”

“The end of the war made him start trying again. But, now that the war’s over, I think he just wants to be at peace. Live a simple, carefree life, you know? And that kind of life can’t be found in the Palace. It’s impossible. Palace life here is full of conflicts and problems. It’s just never-ending issues and headaches.”

That response didn't sit well with Katara.

“But, you live here. You have to be here. When is he gonna see you, even?”

“He’ll come to see me,” Zuko responded quickly, “I’ll see him in Ba Sing Se when we go for the peace talks. Oh, I didn’t tell you all that. Sorry,” he waved his hand in the air, “I’ve had so much on my mind. My uncle invited us all to stay at his house in the Upper Ring.”

“Oh. He has a house there?” Katara was a little surprised by that. She knew how hard it was to get a house in the Upper Ring.

“Yeah. He had an apartment over the tea shop, but after we went back to the Fire Nation, the apartment was vacant, obviously. So, the owner sold it to someone. When he moved back, he had to buy a new house. It’s near the shop. There are a few bedrooms for guests, which is good. That’s what he wanted.”

“That’s nice of him to offer. We might be staying with the Earth King, though. I don’t know what we’re doing yet.”

“Right.”

“But it’s good that you’re gonna be able to see him. It’s been a while.”

“It sure has. It’s all been a blur, though, because there’s been so much going on. Everyday feels like a rush from start to finish. But, we’re finally here,” he sighed in relief, “Decolonization is done. We can finally all move forward."

“We can. Back to your uncle, though— are you mad at him at all?” She whispered.

Zuko turned to her fully.

“For staying in Ba Sing Se all this time?”

Katara nodded.

“I— not really, to be honest. I get it. And, he’s raised me for years. Pretty much since I was twelve. I’m seventeen now, I'm not a kid anymore. I don’t need him to hold my hand through this. I can do it on my own.”

“You can— okay, sure. But is it best for you to be alone here?”

“I’m not alone," he countered, frowning, "I have Mai. Mai talks to me everyday. We live together.”

Katara had somehow forgotten that, and nodded, thinking about it. They went to bed together and spent their nights together, so he wasn't really alone.

“Of course.”

“My uncle knows that. He knows I have her in my life. I think he maybe feels like I’m grown-up now. Ready to get married and run the country. Be a man, not a teenager. And a man doesn’t need his parents, or his uncle, in my case— he needs his wife.”

Katara pursed her lips. “But, you and Mai aren’t married.”

“Well, we will be, I hope. One day. We’re just too young right now.”

“You really don’t need him here?” She asked again.

“Look, I can’t force him to come here, or do anything,” Zuko snapped, losing his temper, “He’s a grown man. If he wants to stay in Ba Sing Se, then he can. It’s his decision.”

Katara cringed at the sudden anger in his voice.

“Okay. Sorry.”

Aang approached them, followed by the rest. Their group formed a loose circle in the center of the courtyard. The sound of Zuko raising his voice made Aang move towards Katara, a bit of concern on his face.

“What are you guys talking about?”

Zuko crossed his arms. “Just that my Uncle invited us all to stay at his house in the Upper Ring during the peace talks.”

Toph smiled. “Sweet!” 

“That’s great.”

“Won’t we stay with the Earth King, though?” Aang asked. “Or, I guess I could say no, if everyone is going to stay with Iroh. Hopefully that won’t offend the Earth King.”

“Let’s all stay with Iroh,” Toph suggested, tugging on Aang's sleeve, “Please. I like the Earth King and all, but his palace has a lot of rules, and I don’t wanna deal with all that.”

“I’m fine with staying with Iroh. But, is there room for all of us? I assume Mai’s coming, too.”

Zuko thought for a second. “It’ll be seven of us. Plus my uncle. He has his own bedroom. There are three downstairs, apparently, and one big attic bedroom. One can be for Sokka and Suki. One can be for Aang. And the rest of us could just sleep upstairs in the attic room. Uncle said there are three big futons that can be rolled out.”

Katara raised a brow at that. “Is that really dignified? For a Firelord to sleep on a floor mattress in an attic?"

"You know I'm not so particular about that kind of stuff."

"Really? " She asked, her voice high, "You're not?"

Zuko scowled at her oddly. "No. Not anymore, really."

"This morning you wanted us to get all fancy for breakfast," she countered.

"I wanted you to get fancy for breakfast? " Zuko repeated, confused.

"You sent those servants into our rooms. My servant tried to put makeup on me, do my hair, and get me all dolled up. Just for a breakfast. She was so pushy about it."

Zuko exhaled, annoyed. "She was just trying to be respectful. You don't get it. It's her job. I don't really care about any of that stuff. And I didn't send the servants to get you fixed up. The servants work for the head butler, who manages the Royal Palace and the Annex. All I said was that I was ready to eat breakfast, and that you all would be joining me. That pomp and stuff is old palace tradition. I didn't come up with that. It's what the servants are used to doing; they've been doing it for hundreds of years."

"Oh."

"Sweetness isn't used to rich people shenanigans," Toph commented, chuckling. 

"Anyway, what I was trying to say is, you're the Firelord now. Should you and Mai really sleep on a futon in an attic? Probably not. Won't the Earth King invite you to stay in his palace?"

Zuko made a face. "I doubt it. I don't think he'll be feeling that friendly after what happened with the coup."

"Oh, right," Katara thought back. "Well, if we're staying with Iroh, fine. But maybe you and Mai should take a bedroom.”

“Yeah, I’m fine with the futon on the floor. I don't need a room," Aang offered, "You know me, I usually just sleep on the grass.”

The Firelord shrugged. “Whatever works.”

“It’s a ways off,” Katara reminded them. “We can decide that later. Now that the Earth King knows we’re here, he can send us an invitation, if he wants to.”

“How were your meetings, Zuko? And when are we having dinner?” Sokka asked in the same breath.

Zuko let out an amused huff.

“Firelord Zuko,” Sokka corrected himself, tilting his head back in aggravation, “It’s gonna take me a while to get used to that.”

Katara explained for him. “Back home we don’t put titles in front of anyone’s name, so it’s hard for us to get used to thinking that way.”

Zuko waved his hand, dismissing it. “It’s not that. It’s just that it’s too early to eat. In the Fire Nation we eat dinner around eight or nine in the evening. But you can ask the servants to bring you a snack while you wait.”

"Nine? " He repeated, a comically disturbed expression on his handsome face. "As in nine o'clock at night? That's almost bedtime." 

“He’s fine,” Katara cut in, making her brother scowl, “He can wait for dinner.”

“Where’s Mai?” Ty Lee asked.

“In our rooms, probably," Zuko answered, "She doesn’t know we’re out here. I’m actually gonna go take a bath, but I'll come pick you all up for dinner a bit later.”

“Okay," Katara replied. "See you later. We'll just relax here 'till then.”

Zuko nodded and started walking away, his burgundy robes trailing behind him. 

“Bye, Mr. Firelord!” Sokka shouted, waving.

Zuko turned, making a peeved expression at him. “It’s not my last name.”

“Right, right. Goodbye, Mr. Zaodan!” He corrected himself, waving comically again.

Zuko cringed. “That’s my dad.”

“What?” 

“You only use that for the man of the house. Well," he stopped himself, "I guess ‘cause he’s in prison I am the man of the house now. So… guess that is me. Weird.” 

“Bye, sifu hotman!” Aang shouted, waving and giggling impishly.

Zuko just shook his head and walked away, smiling.

A couple hours later…

After a bath and responding to a few letters, Zuko stepped out of his office. While on his way to pick up Mai from the living room at the base of their chambers, he noticed Amara leaving her own office, books in hand.

She bowed at the waist, golden earrings swaying as she did so.

“Hello, Amara,” Zuko greeted her informally, “Are you done for the day?”

She rose. “No, sire. I’m just going to Advisor Xuan’s office now. The other advisors and I are going to stay late working on the proposed trade plans for the peace talks.”

“Oh, right, you said that,” he nodded, annoyed that he forgot so quickly. “It’s dinner time, though. Aren’t you going to eat?”

“I think we’re going to order some bentos, Your Majesty.”

Zuko cringed. “That’s no good. Why don’t you come eat with me? I’m gonna have dinner with my friends. You should come.”

Amara blinked, saying nothing for a moment before she smiled a little. Zuko could pick up on the hint; she wanted to refuse but felt she couldn’t due to his superior status. 

“Come on, Amara," he encouraged her, "You can’t work all the time. Why don’t you eat with us for half an hour before you go back?”

She bowed her head. “Of course. Thank you for the invitation, Your Majesty.”

Zuko pursed his lips, still a little uncomfortable with people addressing him so deferentially, but he made himself smile. He knew she was just trying to be respectful.

“Come with me. We have to pick up Mai first.” He turned to a servant. “Can you take those books to Xuan’s office, please?”

“Of course, Your Majesty.”

Amara handed the books to the servant and began following the Firelord as he walked off down the hall.

“What are the chefs making for dinner tonight?”

Zuko was glad she had asked something. It gave him an excuse to look at her again, turning his head and taking in her side profile as she walked beside him. His gaze caught on her perfect full lips for a moment before she met his gaze, waiting for him to answer the question.

“Roasted duck-swan, scallion vegetable pancakes, and some kind of soup, I think. And a bunch of vegetarian dishes for Avatar Aang.”

“That does sound good.”

“You should eat, you must be hungry,” Zuko urged, remembering how at lunch she had eaten only a few pieces of sashimi, being far too focused on the draft of the newest education plans and all her other work. 

Amara smiled. “I’ll eat, sire.”

Zuko led the way towards his living room, where he knew he would find Mai at that time in the evening. 

The Firelord’s chambers were situated in the axis of the palace, occupying the entire center tower, from the main level, up nine floors to the royal bedchambers. The high level made it much harder for assassins to enter the Firelord’s bedroom at night, and any people that entered the tower, either by the elevator or the stairs, were carefully examined and searched to ensure they carried no weapons.

Under Firelord Zuko’s own command, the only people allowed to climb the stairs or use the elevator that accessed his rooms were Mai, his three personal attendants, and four trusted guards. Even Mai had to be ritually searched by the palace guards when she went upstairs, and she had to leave her weapons downstairs in the lower living room before she entered his private spaces. 

When Zuko and Amara rounded the corner they caught a glimpse of Mai comfortably lounging on a Fire Nation couch by a large decorative andon light, one filled with writings from the great sagas on each of its four sides. She looked up from the book she was reading and sat up straight immediately.

“Hey, Mai,” Zuko greeted, coming up to her, “How are you?”

Mai bowed her head. “Hi. I’m fine, how are you?”

He leaned down to kiss her cheek. "I'm good."

When he straightened, Mai glanced over at Amara.

"Hello, Lady Mai. Good evening." She bowed her head.

"Good evening, Amara." Mai stood, bowing before she went to stand beside the Firelord. “You’re still working? I thought we were gonna have dinner.”

“We are. I invited her. She’s gonna stay late with the advisors and work on the trade deal, so I thought she should eat with us first.”

Mai had a blank expression for just a moment before she nodded. 

“Of course. It’ll be great to have you join us.”

Amara smiled a little. “Thank you again for the invitation.”

Zuko waved his hand, signaling for them to follow. “Let’s go. Sokka must be starving to death by this point,” he joked, remembering how hungry he always seemed to be.

When they reached the courtyard with the stables, it was clear that Appa had just landed after the group had taken a sunset ride on him around the city. Aang, Katara, Sokka, Suki, Ty Lee, and Toph were all getting off of his saddle, one by one.

“Zuko! Mai! Great to see you,” Sokka exclaimed, approaching them. In the rich golden glow of the end of the sunset, he could see Amara in her black-and-gold silk dress beside them, and wanted to welcome her, too. But after his fight with Suki that morning he was wary of even speaking to her, and did nothing but offer her a brief smile before looking away.

He watched his sister get off of Appa's saddle, lowering herself onto the polished courtyard below. “You’re saying that because that means it must be time for dinner, Sokka?” 

The boy pursed his lips. “Maybe… Or maybe I’m just happy to see them. Let me be, Katara.”

Mai, Amara, and Zuko all watched Appa turn around, the unusual animal huffing and moving towards the hay manger the servants had left for him. He began eating and they left him in peace for the moment.

Zuko wrapped his arm around his girlfriend's waist as the group gathered around them.

“Did you take a ride around the city?” He asked.

“Yeah. The Capital’s so massive. We wanted to get a better look around,” Sokka explained.

"People had some shocked looks on their faces, that’s for sure,” Katara chuckled.

“They’re not used to seeing a giant sky-bison flying around," Ty Lee chimed in.

"You probably freaked them out," Mai responded.

"That one kid was screaming," Toph laughed, "That was hilarious. He went, 'Mommy! Monst-aa!' "

Zuko pulled his gaze away from Toph to look over at Amara. She had broken off of the group to move towards Appa. He watched her awed expression as she took in the sight of Appa for the first time. She was walking around him, moving towards his face.

After the conversation in the group died down the rest of them followed Amara's lead and moved towards Appa, circling around him.

“How high in the sky does he fly?” She asked.

“Do you wanna find out?” Aang asked, smirking at her. “I can take you for a ride.”

“Can we eat first, please?” Sokka pleaded quietly.

“Yeah. Do you want to meet him quick, though?” Aang suggested, moving to stand beside her. “It’ll be better if he gets used to your smell. Come on, Appa.”

He touched Appa’s rear leg, trying to get his attention. The bison reluctantly stopped chomping on hay to turn his enormous body around to greet her.

Amara took a step back as he faced her.

“He won’t charge me, will he?”

“No,” Aang laughed, reaching a hand up to pet him. “If he’d charge anyone, it’d be Zuko, but Appa’s very forgiving. Now he just likes to lick him.” He smiled impishly at that.

“And what fun that is,” Zuko droned sarcastically. “I want to take another bath again just thinking about it.”

“Go on, boy, she’s friendly,” Aang encouraged his bison.

Appa stepped closer to her, slowly lowering his large head, and Amara’s amber eyes widened as she caught the animal’s gaze. 

“Wow,” she sighed, “When you look at him you can really tell there’s someone on the other side, considering you, too.”

“Oh, yeah,” Aang responded, smiling, “He’s just about as smart as a person. And he has emotions, just like we do.”

Appa let out a low groan, and lowered his head to the ground even more.

“He’s letting you touch him, if you want to,” Aang explained.

“He likes you,” Katara commented, crossing her arms and watching the scene appreciatively. 

Amara tentatively reached out her arm and gently touched him, placing her hand between his eyes, on the bridge of his wide nose. She closed her eyes and smiled, reaching up to pet his fur for a moment. He let out a relaxed huff.

“Can you imagine seeing a herd of these animals flying through the air? I would have loved to have seen that.”

Aang thought back. “It was amazing. Everyone would stop what they were doing just to look at them.”

“I bet. Hello, there, Appa,” she caught his gaze again, peeking down at his large eye. “You’re a beautiful bison. And almost the size of a dragon. I’m impressed.”

He let out a groan of thanks.

She scowled at that, turning to look at Aang over her shoulder.

“He doesn’t understand speech, does he?”

“A bit. I mean, he knows my name for sure, and some other things. I think he can tell a lot from people’s tone of voice.”

She turned back to Appa, awed by him. “Like the dragons do…”

“Do?” Zuko asked, raising his good brow.

Amara turned to him. “What?”

“Why did you say ‘do’? And not ‘did’? You used present tense.”

“You think the dragons are still alive?” Aang asked.

Amara was quiet for a moment. “...I think so, yes. I believe they are.”

Aang and Zuko looked at each other for a moment, very confused by that.

“What?” Mai huffed. “Of course they’re not still alive. Zuko’s uncle Iroh killed the last dragon years ago. They’re extinct.”

After a moment, Amara turned and eyed her with a mysterious gaze. “...Are they? ” She asked, her tone odd.

Mai scowled at her. “Yeah," she responded, thinking it obvious, "No one’s seen one or found one for over a dozen years, at least. You’re supposed to be a genius, and you don’t know that?” Mai asked, her tone somewhere between joking and mocking. 

“Mai,” Zuko scolded, narrowing his eyes at her. 

“I’ve heard that before, yes,” Amara responded to her, no indignation in her tone. “I suppose I just don’t believe it. I don’t believe he killed the last one.”

That made Mai's expression shift, and she resumed her usual apathy. “Oh.”

“It’s so weird to think that your uncle killed a dragon,” Katara muttered, "Doesn't seem like him at all."

"No, it doesn't," Toph agreed.

Zuko exhaled through his nose, wishing he could say that he hadn’t, and they were still alive, and Amara was right, but he had made a promise not to.

“I don’t know what to say about that.”

“Lots of the firebending masters have killed dragons," Mai explained, "It was a sign of being an expert firebender. General Shang killed one. Zuko’s dad killed several. And Iroh killed the last two.”

“That’s crazy.”

"Awful," Suki criticized. 

"Did they eat them?" Sokka asked.

Suki made a face at him. "What does that have to do with anything?"

"They did, but they didn't kill them for the meat, Sokka. They did it for the glory," Ty Lee explained.

"It's sick," Suki criticized. "Dragons are too smart to be killed and eaten— they were almost as smart as people."

After feeling Aang staring at her hard for well over a minute, Amara looked over at him. When she did, she found a strange expression on his young features, his eyes scrunched up a bit in contemplation.

“What?” She asked.

“I feel like I know you from somewhere, Amara.”

She started petting Appa again, running her hand through his freshly-washed fur.

“I feel the same about you, Avatar Aang.”

He stepped closer. “We’ve never met before, though.”

“No.” She smiled at him over her shoulder. "I don't think so."

“Hm. Maybe we were friends in a past life?” He tilted his head, trying to figure out the strange feeling of deja-vu. 

Amara simply shrugged.

Sokka sighed at them both. “Alright, Aang, that’s enough weird Avatar stuff, let’s go inside and have dinner, please.” 

Amara laughed. “Sorry.”

After washing their hands at a basin near the door, they all entered the palace. Once they were in the hallway, Katara decided to walk side-by-side with Amara.

“Sorry about my brother. He's as hungry as an orca whale.”

She smiled. “He’s a growing boy.”

“We could take a ride on Appa after dinner, if you want,” she offered. “We wanted to take him up to the mountain, that one to the north-west, but we didn’t have time.”

“That’s Mount Kitari. I don’t know how fast Appa flies, exactly, but I imagine that would take a while.”

“He’s really fast. I bet it wouldn’t take that long.”

“Sometime, I’d love to. But tonight I have plans with the Firelord and the other advisors. We’re preparing plans for the peace talks. My apologies.” She bowed her head towards Katara.

Katara waved it off. “No, of course, you’re busy. Some other time.”

“Have you found a mate for him yet?” Amara asked.

Aang turned around, walking backwards down the hallway. “Appa?”

“No, for Sokka,” Zuko teased, “Yes, Appa.”

Aang rolled his eyes. “She could have been referring to Momo.”

“Momo’s a male?” Zuko scowled, looking at the delicate creature perched on his shoulder. 

“Yeah. Wait, let me make sure,” Aang lifted his arm and peeked down, looking between the creature’s legs. “Yeah. He’s a male.” 

“Finding a mate for Momo won’t be that hard," Amara explained, "There are still ferret-lemurs and lemur-koalas that could mate with him, hopefully. Finding a female for Appa will be more of a challenge, because any bison found during the war were hunted to extinction. And his conspecifics in the Earth Kingdom were almost hunted to extinction as well, hundreds of years back.”

“Conspecifics?” Toph repeated.

“The other members of his species.”

“Why were they hunted so much?” Katara asked.

“For a starving group of humans, a bison confers a lot of meat, fur, and other valuable commodities. People made instruments from their horns, which are still used in the ceremonial practices of the sandbender tribes in the Si Wong desert, although they use bison-pronghorns now. Some of those horn instruments have been passed down for hundreds of years. And the precious few kudu-bison that remain moved out of the deserts and into the grasslands of the central Earth Kingdom long ago.”

Aang had barely ever seen a kudu-bison before, but he imagined that that breed might be too small for Appa to breed with, anyway. 

“Maybe I’ll find a mate for him there. But, I really don’t like to hear stories about the sandbenders killing and eating bison. It makes me sick to my stomach, and we’re about to eat.”

“I’m sorry,” Amara apologized.

“It’s fine. Not your fault. I just can’t stand to hear about it. Appa’s like a family member to me.”

“I understand.”

While walking, Katara once again became distracted by the sculptures and paintings in the palace, the sheer number and quality of them piquing her interest. Some of the paintings were detailed and masterful in a way she had never seen, except in the Earth King's Royal Palace in Ba Sing Se. 

As they passed down the hallway that led to the royal dining room, a painting on the wall in-between two hanging lanterns caught her eye. It was a framed portrait of a young teenage boy, wearing an official uniform of some kind, almost like a military uniform.

“Wait,” she told the group, pausing to look at it, walking closer. 

Everyone except Toph turned to look at the painting, gathering around it. 

When Katara got in close she really considered the drawing. The smiling boy looked familiar, but also somehow unknown to her. He was very cute, with a high ponytail, a symmetrical, happy face, and beautiful gold eyes. The portrait was done in black and white, but the eyes were painted in gold, making them pop on the portrait. Such a pleasant boy was sorely out of place in a location as serious and ominous as the Fire Nation Royal Palace, she felt.

"What are you all looking at, a painting?" Toph asked.

"Yeah."

“Who is that?” Katara asked, very curious to know. 

“Are you joking?” Zuko responded in disbelief.  

When Katara said nothing, he moved towards the painting and turned around, lowering himself to place his head right beside the frame, and smiled widely, artificially, trying to mimic the boy in the painting.

Katara’s face contorted in shock. “It’s you!”

She covered her mouth with her hand, finding it hard to believe. Zuko dropped the fake smile and stood upright, turning to look at the picture for a minute before turning back to her.

“That’s obviously him, Katara,” Sokka chuckled. 

Zuko felt sad for a moment. “You can’t even recognize me without the scar.”

Katara’s eyes filled with regret. “I’m sorry.”

He shook it off. “It’s okay.”

“I’ve just never seen you without it—”

He put up a hand to stop her. “I get it.”

“I didn’t know you ever smiled like that,” Sokka commented, glancing back at the painting, “You look so— happy.”

“That was before my life turned to shit.”

He turned on his heel, walking away quickly, making the group follow.

“How old were you when that was painted?” Suki asked.

Zuko exhaled. “Just turned thirteen. It was a few months before I got my scar. It was my head-boy portrait from the first year of prep school. When I became Firelord, one of the decorators must have put it back up, I guess.”

“Head-boy?” Katara asked.

“It’s like—” he faltered, “an elected leader of the class. It’s just a silly title. It’s hard to explain.”

Amara took it upon herself to answer. “The class— that is, the group of students who entered the preparatory school in the same year— elect a leader to represent them and their wishes to the school board, and to advocate on their behalf. But, the head-boy also has to make sure the class is following the rules of the school. It’s done in a mock-parliamentary procedure designed to give older students a chance to elect a representative and practice the basics of government while they’re still children. It’s analogous to people in the Fire Nation voting for their District Representative."

“But, usually, it’s just a popularity contest,” Zuko added, “I was crown prince at the time. Of course, they chose me.”

“Oh.” 

Amara turned to her. “They’re also supposed to be an example to the class as a whole and give public speeches, like at school events. To become one, a boy needs to be voted in by the majority of the class.”

“I got it. It’s democratic. I’m familiar with the concept.”

Amara nodded. “And sometimes democracy is a popularity contest, so Firelord Zuko has a point, although I’m guessing the class found him to be a natural leader, as well. But, don't be confused about the nature of the school. Really, it was a place to drill Fire Nation totalitarian dogma into the minds of the next generation."

Upon entering the lavish royal dining room, all of the party took their seats, with Zuko at the head of the table. The delicious, steaming dishes quickly captured their interest, and for a while the group was content to simply sit together and eat. After a while, Zuko poured shots of soju for the older members of the group. He handed one of the tiny stemmed cups to Katara, who smiled politely, not wanting to be rude, but wished she didn't have to drink it at all. She considered discreetly pouring it into the soup that was too spicy for her anyway, but knew the servants behind her would see it.

She looked up, watching Zuko pour her brother a shot.

"Why do you pour us a drink when the servants pour all the other drinks?" Sokka asked.

Firelord Zuko handed him the tiny cup and Sokka peered down at the clear liquid.

"It's tradition."

"It's considered a great honor to have the Firelord pour you a drink in our culture," Amara explained, "It's a sign of respect and favor."

"Oh, okay," Sokka nodded, understanding it better. "Well, thank you. Should we cheers?" 

Zuko gave him an odd look. "Our usual drinking cheer is 'To the Fire Nation', so I'm not sure how you would feel about that."

Despite the lack of offensiveness in that simple phrase on its surface, it was still heavily loaded with implications. The words suggested something beyond their actual meaning, connotatively promoting the Fire Nation totalitarian regime and its all-consuming subjugation of the world.

"I will not be cheering to that," Katara resisted, quietly, yet boldly.

"We could make a new one," Sokka offered tactfully.

Zuko looked down at the traditional red soju bottle, and a phrase written on it caught his eye: In loyalty to Fire Nation victory there is honor. 

As a boy, such a statement felt like nothing to him; it felt as normal as breathing air. But, as a young adult, the phrase stuck out to him much more, compounded by the comments from Sokka and Katara. After half a year as Firelord, Zuko was realizing how deeply embedded Fire Nation supremacy and obedience really was, not only in their culture and language, but also in paintings, written on buildings, and even on soju bottles, apparently. 

"How about 'to the future'?" Aang suggested, raising up his cup of water.

Katara smiled. "That's a good one."

Suki nodded. "I like it."

"Sure."

"You can't do a cheer with water," Zuko complained, looking at the water glass in Aang's hand. "That's bad luck."

Aang looked around the dishes and cups before him. "I have a tea." He raised the teacup up, ready to go.

Zuko shrugged. "Sure."

"Okay."

Everyone raised their glasses.

"Ready?" Aang looked around.

"To the future! " They shouted in unison.

Once everyone had taken their respective drinks, Katara recoiled at the taste in her mouth, feeling a slight burn in her throat that she wasn't accustomed to. She was surprised to see Amara holding out a piece of yuzu for her.

"Here, this will help," she offered, "Take a bite."

Katara accepted, grateful for anything that would get the taste of the liquor out of her mouth. She puckered her lips afterwards, setting the yuzu slice down on her plate.

"And this is the good stuff," she chuckled, "I suppose it still tastes bad to you, though."

"What?" Katara asked.

"This is really expensive, good-quality liquor," Amara explained quietly, "But, I guess, for someone who's not used to drinking, it'll taste bad no matter what."

"Yeah, I don't like drinking," she whispered, "I just didn't want to be rude."

"You can just drink some tea, like Avatar Aang did. If Zuko wants to do another round, I'm gonna switch to tea. I never do more than one shot anymore."

Katara nodded. "Thanks for the yuzu. That was a good idea."

"Of course."

“Amara, are you from the Capital?” Suki asked from across the table.

She turned her head towards the Earth Kingdom woman. “Yes. I was born here.”

“But she just moved back," Zuko explained for her.

“Where were you living?" Suki asked.

“Just after I left the Capital I was living in the mountains for a while in a town called Ikana, and then I was living on the West Coast in a city called Hai-Zan.”

"I've heard of that city. It's really big, isn't it?" Suki asked.

"It is a big city, yes."

“What were you doing there?” Katara asked.

“Working. I was an administrative assistant for Councilman Chu, then a speechwriter and campaign strategist, and his Chief of Staff, at the end.”

Katara raised her eyebrows. She didn't exactly know what it was that a Chief of Staff did, but from the words alone she could make an educated guess, and realized it was clearly an important position. She internally berated herself for judging Amara so harshly before. Her beauty and youth had confused Katara, making her wonder how the woman could ever be qualified, but then she reflected on herself. She realized it would hurt her feelings if someone would see her, just a teenage girl, and assume she couldn't fight because of it. Her own step-grandfather had greatly injured her feelings in the past in that regard. Katara looked down at the plates of elegant food in front of her, feeling a bit shameful. 

“That’s a lot of promotions in only a few years," Mai commented in her low tone. 

"I'll say."

“You’re so impressive," Ty Lee complemented.

"So, your husband moves with you, then?” Suki asked.

Amara glanced over at Suki at that. "My husband?"

Suki would have said something in response, but she was in the middle of chewing.

"I'm not married," Amara clarified.

Suki swallowed. “I'm sorry, I was assuming.”

“It’s alright," she responded, not sounding angry in the slightest, "Most women are married by twenty-three. It's very understandable that you'd assume I'd be married by this point.”

Suki cringed a little. “No, I just meant— you’re really, really beautiful, so I assumed you'd be married already. Because you're so pretty,” she added awkwardly.

"You are," Ty Lee sighed appreciatively, "Agni, you're like a model."

A dash of embarrassment appeared on Amara's flawless features at that, a light blush appearing on her cheeks.

“Thank you," she responded softly, "But you both flatter me too much.”

“So, do you have a boyfriend, then?” Katara asked.

Amara took a sip from her glass of water. She could feel everyone in the room staring at her, and tried not to let it make her uncomfortable.

“No, I don’t."

Katara tilted her head to the side, wondering about the woman. "You're still looking for the right guy?"

Amara took a moment to answer, deciding to pick up her chopsticks again and suddenly take an interest in her food.

"I’m single," she answered simply, "I work a lot.”

“Clearly," Zuko muttered, seeing as it was almost nine. After fourteen hours of working in the palace, she still hadn't gone home. He was glad that he had forced her to take a break.

“So, since you're single, what do you do with all your free time?” Aang asked, fully interested in Amara himself.

She smiled at him, grateful for the way he was changing the direction of the conversation.

“Well, I read, I go to lectures, I have friends over, I go on walks, I explore different places, I go to plays, and... I pray.”

“You pray?” Aang repeated.

That was so surprising to Zuko that he set down his chopsticks, abandoning his meal. “You’re religious? "

Amara felt a bit strange seeing the Firelord's shocked expression, his gold eyes blown wide. 

"You make it sound like it's a federal crime," Sokka chuckled, amused.

"It's very uncommon here in the Capital," Zuko explained, "And, for someone who's considered a genius, it's almost unheard of. You went to Akihara, and you're religious?"

Amara paused for a moment before answering. “I am."

"Do you go to the temple?"

"Sometimes. And there are other spiritual people who go to Akihara," she informed him, "Even a few professors there are practicing believers. They just don't talk about it often. But, I wasn't spiritual when I was a student there. I became religious around the time that I graduated."

"Oh." The shock still lingered on his face, even as he resumed eating and took a bite of duck-swan.

The admission wasn’t surprising to Aang.

“I thought you were probably spiritual when I met you,” he commented, his gaze calm and curious, searching hers for something that he barely understood himself. 

“Then your intuition was correct.”

“You’ve been touched by the spirits, haven’t you?” Aang theorized, or realized. He himself wasn’t sure, but it came to him all the same. “One in particular…”

“Yes."

Zuko, Sokka, and the others all scowled in confusion at their back-and-forth, feeling like they were missing something. Aang was clearly interested only in Amara for the moment, trying to figure her out. He leaned forward in his chair, his gray gaze acutely fixated on her.

Oddly, Amara wasn't looking at him. She was sitting back in her seat, arms resting comfortably in her lap, her head down, as if she was contemplating something.

“The Spirit of Light," he said, just as it occurred to him. 

Instead of being shocked, Amara stayed perfectly calm, as if it was obvious. As if she had somehow known that he would have guessed that. 

While staying still, face tilted slightly down, her upturned amber eyes suddenly flicked up to meet his gaze.

“He guides the Way of Light for us all.”

In a moment of realization, Aang shifted back in his chair, everything snapping into place suddenly. His brows drew up in shock, mouth falling open.

“I remember where you I know you from! I mean— how I know you!” He shouted out. 

“You were the woman in my dream! ”

Chapter Text

"The prescience, he realized, was an illumination that incorporated the limits of what it revealed— at once a source of accuracy and meaningful error. A kind of Heisenberg indeterminacy intervened: the expenditure of energy that revealed what he saw, changed what he saw. And what he saw was a time nexus within this cave, a boiling of possibilities focused here, wherein the most minute action— the wink of an eye, a careless word, a misplaced grain of sand— moved a gigantic lever across the known universe. He saw violence with the outcome subject to so many variables that his slightest movement created vast shiftings in the patterns."

—Frank Herbert, Dune

Fire Nation, Royal Palace

“You were the woman in my dream! ” 

That caught Toph’s attention, making her sit up straight. “Your dream about the desert?” 

“Yes. It was you,” Aang realized, relieved and confused all the same. “I couldn’t figure out how I knew you. But now I’m sure. That was your voice!” 

Amara’s oddly calm expression was offset by the emotions in her eyes, ones Aang knew but couldn’t name, exactly. It was the same swirl of emotions he imagined were in him, ones of something approximating relief mixed with bafflement. Of feeling like he was getting closer to some truth in the distance, gradually revealing itself to his awareness.

“You’re the Seer,” Aang whispered under his breath, his voice so quiet that only Zuko beside him could hear.

The Firelord snapped to look at him, struck to hear such a rare word come out of Aang's mouth, and out of nowhere.

“She’s what?” Toph asked. 

"What did you say?"

Aang shook it off. “Nothing. Nevermind.”

Zuko wanted to respond, but the comment was so peculiar it shocked him into silence. He knew Aang sometimes had spiritual and unusual states. Sometimes the boy would quite literally leave his body and have his spirit travel to another dimension, so Zuko knew strange metaphysical phenomena did happen to him, but he hadn’t expected the boy to say that. 

He had barely ever heard that title in his life. The Seer. It evoked fuzzy memories from childhood of going to see plays with his family. Plays based on the Fire Nation courts in olden times, hundreds of years back, even before Aang’s time. He vaguely remembered seeing a character on stage in such a play, one standing by the Firelord, or just behind him, called out at various points to interpret dreams, read people’s true motivations, and predict the future. 

Back then he had confused the character with a Fire Sage. He remembered, at intermission, asking his parents to explain why the Fire Sages didn’t predict more for Firelord Azulon. His father had told him that the character wasn’t a Fire Sage, but instead was a Seer. A true sage of old. One the Firelord would call on for guidance, clarity, and to sense what was coming. One who knew things the spirits did. Who unravelled the strings of fate in their mind, seeing to many ends.

The Fire Sages were trained to do what they did, and to try to divinate to the best of their abilities, but a Seer was different. They could never truly compete. A Seer had the talent deep within them, a gift from the gods, and had to choose their moments to share the truth with the commonwealth wisely. 

After the play, he remembered his parents disagreeing with one another during the carriage ride home about whether Seers were real, and what they truly were capable of. His father had said a rare few were real, long ago, but it was very hard to tell an authentic Seer from a fake one. And after one accurate prediction, Agni-given or not, Firelords would depend on their guidance and fortune-telling all the time, putting all their faith in the person even if they had only been right once, which may have been nothing but luck. Some Fire Lords relied on them heavily, and others totally denied them from court. It was only a rare few Fire Lords who paired with a Seer who truly knew the future, his father argued. The rest were just fooled by cons.

“What are you talking about?” Katara asked Aang, making Firelord Zuko snap back to reality.

Mai’s face contorted in confusion. “You had a dream about her? Amara? ”

“Yeah. Just a few days ago, before we left the Earth Kingdom. It wasn’t about her, exactly, but she was in it,” he explained. 

Zuko was just as confused as the rest of them. “Then how come you didn’t recognize her when you met her the first time?”

The young monk thought for a moment. 

“In my dream, she had a veil covering her face, like this,” he drew an imaginary line with his fingers from the bridge of his nose, under his eyes to the top of his ears. “I could only see her eyes. But," he looked over at her, "now that I hear your voice, I can put it together. And those were your eyes, for sure.” He studied her upturned amber eyes, ones that were far too familiar for a day-old acquaintance. “That’s how I knew you.” 

He had been waiting for some sign of shock or amazement on Amara’s face, but he was surprised to see that nothing had changed. Her placid expression remained virtually unchanged, only darkening a shade, her gaze holding some unknown solemness.

“You don’t look shocked at all.”

“Why isn’t that super weird to you?” Katara scoffed.

“Yeah,” Toph agreed, “Kinda freaked me out when Aang said he had a dream about me before he met me.”

Katara barely knew the woman, but her lack of a reaction to such a strange confession by Aang seemed bizarre. Just as bizarre as having dreams about a person before meeting them.

Amara sighed slowly.

The revelation that The Avatar experienced the same vision that she did wasn’t surprising to her in the slightest. Upon meeting him, she too had felt a sense of déjà vu. And his questions from before allowed her to guess that she wasn't the only one to receive the vision.

“What you describe has been shown to me already,” she explained.

Aang tilted his head. “The spirits gave you the same vision?” 

“They did.”

“Then why didn’t you say that when you met him?” Katara asked, scowling at her. “Why keep that to yourself?”

“Yeah, why not tell me?” Aang wondered aloud. “That’s weird. I just put it together.”

“I…” she drifted, trying to think about how to phrase her response, “Growing up in the Capital, spirituality was considered something strange and somehow low-class. Seeing omens or going to fortune tellers are what people here think of as practicing religion, and people have considered those activities to be foolish for quite a while. People who believe in spiritual influences or divination are generally considered naïve simpletons here. That’s partly why Firelord Zuko reacted the way he did when I said that I’m spiritual. It’s not something associated with intellectuals or educated people, by any means.”

Zuko cringed. “I’m sorry I offended you.”

“It’s fine,” Amara shrugged it off, “It’s just the way people think here. It’s how I grew up, too. People think practicing religion is almost primal or idiotic. Sozin and Azulon encouraged that way of thinking. And the experience of seeing events from the future has been corrupted heavily by fraudulent fortune tellers and palm readers, who fake everything and try to profit off their nonsense. Basically any act of divination here is considered low-class and contemptible. Personally, I never go to palm readers or fortune tellers, and that’s not how I practice religion, but firebenders usually group all spiritual people into one category now."

"What about Iroh?" Aang asked.

"General Iroh is a very rare example of a person from the Capital who is religious and admitted to seeing a vision from the future, but people made an exemption for him because it had to do with Fire Nation victory— and he’s never been known to be insane. But, telling the future still has a very bad connotation here. So, I was reluctant to believe I actually had a vision, and even more reluctant to share that with people.”

“You were worried people would judge you,” Katara realized.

“And I didn’t want people to think that I’m trying to get attention by saying that I had that vision, or trying to trick people. Least of all Firelord Zuko. For the last few hundred years here Firelords haven’t been using diviners; they don’t trust them. I didn’t exactly want to start my new job by talking about a strange vision I had that may or may not have been given to me by a spirit.”

“So, you didn’t want to be thought of as a liar. Or a fraud,” Katara thought aloud.

Amara nodded.

“I shouldn’t have reacted like that,” Zuko criticized himself, “It just shocked me. Like you said, university-types don’t really practice religion anymore. They say worshiping the spirits is a waste of time.”

“Don’t worry about it, Your Majesty.”

Aang tried to get her attention again. “Back to the dream— did we see the same thing? And were you inside your body in the dream?”

“Yes.”

“I could see you, and Firelord Zuko, and Sokka, and Toph, and Katara, and Chief Hakoda. And a couple other people. But I could barely see you at all with that veil on. Only your eyes.”

Sokka startled. “Wait, I was in this dream, too? So it's actually a vision of the future?”

“Considering he’s The Avatar, I'd say it’s a fair bet,” Toph groaned sarcastically at him.

“I think it’s real,” Aang responded, “We’re in the desert. Amara’s with us. And if she had the same dream, then, yeah, I'm sure it is."

The Firelord made a face at him. “What are you talking about? Why would we all be in the desert together?”

Aang opened his mouth, beginning to answer, but Amara cut in before he could.

“Perhaps it’s better if you don’t reveal anymore at this point, Avatar Aang. The gods chose us to receive this vision, and us alone. There may be a reason for that.”

Aang reluctantly shut his mouth, thinking. “Maybe... I want to talk to you about it, though. Later.”

“Of course.”

“Why won’t you tell me about this dream?” Firelord Zuko asked Amara. 

“You should tell them if they’re in it,” Mai urged. “It’s their future, too.”

“It wasn’t a dream for me,” Amara corrected, “It was a vision. I was awake.”

Zuko tried to imagine it. “So, it happened when you were just walking around? Randomly?”

“No.”

“What were you doing when you got it?”

She thought back. “I was at a temple, alone, praying.”

He scowled again. “To your ancestors?”

“I never pray to my ancestors," she replied quickly, "I was praying to the Spirit of Light.”

“When was this?”

“Five years ago, now. Just after your father took over.”

Zuko scowled. “And I was in your dream?”

“Yes, but in the vision you were an adult. I didn’t know the man would be you.”

“That’s why you came here,” Aang realized, eyes lighting up with understanding, “The spirits gave you that vision. They led you here.”

“It seems they did.”

“What are you talking about?”

“You saw Zuko as an adult, like I did.”

“I am an adult,” he grunted, annoyed.

“A grown man,” Aang clarified, “You’re seventeen, Zuko. You’re still a teenager.”

“And this was five years ago? Wow… I didn’t have my scar then.”

“No, you didn’t," Amara followed his train of thought, "So, the vision made less sense to me. And, at that time, standing beside three water-tribe members, an earthbender, and an airbender seemed completely improbable. I thought it was just a strange thing. A random figment of my imagination or something. I refused to believe it was true at that point, because it made no sense at all.”

“You actually saw the future," he mumbled, in awe.

She nodded. “It seems so. I didn't believe it then, but we’re approaching it. With every passing day we’re approaching it…”

“How could you have seen the future?” Mai scoffed. 

“The gods know things that have not yet come to pass.”

She barely resisted rolling her eyes at the beautiful woman. "I meant— why you? Why not Zuko?"

"That I don't know."

“What were you praying for when it happened?” Zuko asked.

Her eyes flicked up to meet his. “A vision. A purpose for my life,” she admitted, "I didn't realize I would be shown one so literally."

“Why pray for that?”

She took a sip of water. “I was pure chaos then. I didn’t know what to do with my life. I was lost and miserable, so I prayed for guidance. And I didn’t pray for a vision of the future, mind you. I just asked for the Spirit of Light to give me an idea of what to do with my life. And when I did— that’s when the vision came."

“The spirits led you here,” Aang pointed out, “That's why you applied for the job, even though you don't live here.”

Amara still felt strange speaking in such ways, as it was nothing she had grown up with, but she tried to accept it. Tried not to care how odd she would sound to the other Fire Nation members at the table.

“I don’t ignore their guidance anymore,” she answered. 

Aang laughed oddly, trying to wrap his mind around it. Trying to consider what it meant.

“I thought maybe it was just a weird dream. But, the fact that we both had it… And I saw you before I met you— yeah, I bet it is from the spirits. I had a vision of Toph before I met her. And some other people.”

Amara nodded. “You're a very spiritual person; I'm sure the spirits give you glimpses of the future often. Even the present, into spaces you cannot see.”

Aang made a face at that, thinking of his vision of Katara, held captive by Azula in Ba Sing Se.

"Yeah, they do. Sometimes."

Zuko finished off his sake, struggling to piece together what they had said. He hadn't grown up talking seriously about gods and visions. It all seemed so foreign to him, something his Uncle got into that everyone else made fun of. He remembered dinners from his childhood when Iroh would make a religious comment and his parents would laugh under their breath and exchange glances. A quirk, a bit of eccentric fantasy. But, he supposed, after all that had happened in the last few years, and with an all-powerful Avatar sitting beside him at the table, there was nothing to make fun of anymore. And, as odd as it felt, he knew he had to take it seriously. After all, his father had been wrong, and the spirits did still have some say in the ways of the world. 

They hadn't abandoned the Earth. 

They hadn't abandoned humans. 

He glanced up at his new advisor, seeing her in a different light. “Amara, you had that dream— er, vision, in ‘95? And I was in it?” 

She met his gaze. “Yes.”

“And you saw me as a grown man, in the future…” Zuko thought about it. He had only been eleven at the time. “So, when I got this scar, you were—?”

“Shocked and amazed," she answered earnestly, "I realized the young man I saw in my vision was you. And you would be Firelord one day. That itself wasn't odd, because you were crown prince at the time, but how could I have known that you would get that scar," she pointed, "that specific scar, and ally yourself with, of all people, a blind earthbender, and the family of Hakoda the Brave?” Her gaze moved around the table. “It seemed outrageous at the time, even when I understood it was you.”

“I bet it did.”

“But then…” her focus moved on to Aang, dressed in his yellow robes, the wooden necklace of a monk around his neck, “then you found The Avatar. The last airbender. Miraculously. And you found Hakoda the Brave’s children, who traveled with him. Still, I doubted a little. They were your enemies. And why would I be with you all? But then—" she paused, considering it all, "then you joined them. Allied yourself with them at the end, such an unpredictable decision. The vision was clearly manifesting... I stopped doubting the Spirit of Light completely at that point,” she explained, “There was nothing left to prove, in my mind. I asked for direction. I asked for a purpose and a purpose was thrust upon me,” she muttered, as much to herself as to the group. 

“What purpose?” Zuko asked. “To be my advisor?”

Amara didn’t answer at first. “It’s complicated. In a basic sense, yes.”

"More than that," Aang interjected, because he could tell from the vision alone, confusing as it had been.

"Don't reveal anymore now."

He shrugged. "Fine."

“What are we all doing in the desert?” Zuko asked, almost getting angry. “What sense does that make? That’s like halfway across the world. Why would I be there? The Fire Nation didn’t even have colonies there. What are you doing there?” He gestured at Katara. "And you?" He turned to Amara. "Who takes their advisor out into the desert?"

Aang looked up at Amara. “She—”

She raised her hand. “I’m very sorry to cut you off, Avatar Aang, and I mean no disrespect, truly, but I think it would be best if we leave it at that for now. Revealing too much at this point could cause confusion for them, which may not be helpful. I'm not saying this to try to be rude. Think of the consequences."

Zuko made an exasperated face at her. “What are you both talking about?”

She turned to the Firelord. “Do you remember your Uncle Iroh telling you he had a vision when he was a teenager?”

“Yeah," he answered quickly, because everyone knew that story, "He had a vision of himself conquering Ba Sing Se. He felt that it was a sign from the spirits. It was why he was so obsessed about taking over the city when he was General.”

“Exactly. And he did conquer the city of Ba Sing Se, didn’t he?” Amara challenged, brow quirked. “In the end, the vision wasn’t wrong.”

Zuko blinked languidly. “He did... Just not for the Fire Nation.”

“Visions are murky, like dreams," she replied, her voice far too silky and refined, years of acting experience clearly obvious, "And hard to comprehend in their entirety, especially years before they occur. He knew he would take the city, but the vision wasn’t clear. In his failure to understand, compounded by his desire to realize the vision, he spent tremendous time, effort, and money attempting to take the city from the outside, even though that was futile. His actions led to the deaths of over a thousand men and women, who died in vain in the battles for control of the Outer Ring. Including the death of his own son,” she added sadly. “He had no idea that his conquering of the city wouldn’t be for the Fire Nation; it would be to save the city from the Fire Nation at the war’s end.”

Understanding, Zuko’s gaze drifted. “You don’t want to tell me the whole vision in case I mess up my life trying to make it come true.”

“Well, you wouldn't—” Aang stopped himself, looking up at Amara’s careful gaze. He put his hands up. “Sorry. You’re right. We should keep it to ourselves. At least now. I’ll talk to you, one-on-one.”

“I wouldn’t want it to come true?” Zuko finished his thought. Then, a thought occurred to him. “Oh, do you know how I’m going to die?” He laughed darkly. “Is that it?"

Amara sighed.

"What age did I make it to? Twenty-five?" 

“It’s not about you dying. But, Amara’s right. It would be too confusing to reveal it now. I don’t even understand it all myself.”

When the dark humor wore off, reality set in. Zuko dropped his head, resting it in his hands.

“Are you alright?” Mai soothed, placing a hand on his shoulder.

His gaze flicked between Aang and Amara. “You’re both freaking me out tonight. The desert… I’m guessing you mean the Si Wong desert. That’s in the middle of the central Earth Kingdom... What, are we headed for another war or something? Am I going to have battles with the Earth King’s army, or something?”

"She just told you she doesn't want you to guess what it is," Katara chided quietly.

“I’m not going to say whether or not that’s the case,” Amara replied, “I need to give the vision more consideration before I reveal anymore. If I reveal anymore. What you’re doing right now, worrying about it, it’s exactly what I was trying to prevent. Don’t create a negative self-fulfilling prophecy, please.”

“What?”

“If you imagine yourself to be fighting a war with the Earth King, you might act in ways that would cause that to happen. Thinking about something happening in the future can cause you to change your behavior in the present. Like my vision caused me to come here.”

“Agni…” 

“Don’t be afraid,” she soothed him, confidence in her gentle tone, “You’ll be prepared.”

His eyes cried out for answers. “Prepared for what?”

“I can’t say. The Avatar and I will discuss it. I should leave now. The other advisors are expecting me. My apologies for leaving dinner early, Your Majesty.”

Without any more explanation, she bowed her head and stepped out of the dining hall, leaving them all in a fog of confusion.

Southern Water Tribe, Hall of the Elders

With all the men returned to the tribe, and even more of their northern brothers visiting, Hakoda finally felt like he was a chieftain again. 

After so many years at sea, he had been a ship captain more than anything else. It was a bit hard getting his land legs back, and it felt strange at first, but he knew it was home and home very much required his attention. There was no need to be away anymore and without the war, his mind struggled to shift from guerilla tactics and seafaring to igloo construction and fish exports. It had been so long since he really had to deal with such petty concerns, and they all seemed like issues from another age. After all, at the end of the war there was hardly anyone left to lead at all. There was hardly anyone alive, and the only focus was trying to keep them alive.

But that was changing. 

They no longer had to talk only of night raids and smoke-bombs. There were no more month-long high mourning periods and appeals to the spirits to bring peace. Everything was different. Survival mode had ended.

War had been all his life, whether in the background or right in front of his face. Always lurking, always present, creeping over his shoulder. When he was boy it was what he prepared for and when his father died it became all his responsibility. Lead the tribe. Keep them alive, these last few. 

Kya he couldn't save. And that haunted him; he knew it always would. And not just Kya, but his father, his brother, and many of his friends. Too many dead at the hands of the enemy. 

By the end it felt like the world truly was collapsing and the gods didn't care and life was just torture, bloody battlefields, and death. Prisons in the intermission. Hope had been reducing into a smaller and smaller sliver until he doubted it was there at all, and he nearly gave up, especially after his wife died. 

But his kids kept him going. He thanked Tui and La for them— without them, he wouldn't know how to carry on. But they had pulled him forward. After all, how could he die knowing he hadn't created a better tomorrow for them? Given them a chance at a peaceful life? 

And they would have one. That thought was still seeping in for him. He could hardly adjust to it. 

Hakoda let his eyes wander around the Great Hall as Ikasuk rambled on for the tenth time, just so he could think. His blue gaze slid over people in the crowd, because it was, at last, a crowded meeting. There were teenage boys from the Northern Tribe side by side with their fathers, elders from the south, and several newly pregnant wives, some already showing, the babes growing inside them. It made him want to smile. 

Finally, there was life and not just death and despair and decay. 

Finally, they were building things.

He fixed his attention back on Ikasuk, with his piercing light-blue eyes and his long, braided hair.

“And, when it’s finished, we can easily have all twenty-six rooms fully furnished and ready for travelers. I’ll be happy to run everything, as a kind of manager,” he paused, looking around, “if everyone is alright with that, of course,” he added meekly, like he hadn’t been dying for the opportunity to begin with.

“When could we have your project completed?” Chief Hakoda asked.

“Well, if we do make the decision to finish the inn before starting other projects, then we’ll need a few months. Maybe two. Construction of the healing center can start as soon as the inn is open for business.”

“It’s fine with me,” Hakoda replied. “With the storehouse completed, I think the inn is a logical next step. We can’t have people visiting and staying at night on their ships. We need to become a real city, like we once were.”

“Hear, hear,” an elder agreed.

“Let us be busy again,” another consented.

“The inn is going to be very important for the tribe going forward as we start having guests from the other nations, and as merchants come to trade with us.”

“It’s a sign that we’re ready to start being a part of this world, not just an isolated little town,” Bato chimed in. “A sign to all that we’re a destination. That we’re rising up out of this war, and we weren’t destroyed.”

“I think the Chieftain's trade deal with Firelord Zuko will already have people talking about us, and the value of this land,” Bato’s wife Sika continued. “It’ll get merchants to see us as a place to come for unique and valuable goods, and a legitimate trading partner going forward.”

Bato smiled at the sound of his wife saying ‘us’ in regards to the Southern Tribe, but, considering that they were married, she did belong to the Southern Tribe, and there was nothing strange in it. It was just odd for him to hear her speak that way. So much was changing, and so quickly.

Hakoda recognized the exchange of glances between them, pleased to see her reference the Southern Tribe as her home as well. It was just an unfamiliar idea to think of a Northern-Tribe bending woman as one of their own, but considering the wedding necklace proudly around her neck and the child clearly growing inside her, there was no other way to consider her but as one of their own. 

“Exactly, Sika,” Hakoda nodded, catching her gaze, “We need a place for foreigners to stay when they come. A professional place. Up to the standards of other cities, like Omashu or Ba Sing Se. I’ll help Ikasuk with that, and my children when they come home; they’re well-traveled.”

“Did we come to a decision about whether to run it at a profit?” Kanna asked.

“I was going to mention that as well,” another elder chimed in.

Hakoda sighed. He hated when the group disagreed, but it was impossible for everyone to come to a consensus all the time. 

“Let us take a vote. That would be the fairest option.”

Bato gave him an appreciative look. “Good idea.”

“Agreed.”

“First, I want to give an opportunity for anyone to speak out against the idea of having an inn in the first place, or against the idea of having Ikasuk run said inn, when the time comes.”

Silence carried on for a few moments as the tribe members and visitors looked around.

“No objections. Alright, before we vote, remember the rules: children and foreigners not married to Southerners do not get a vote. There are two options ahead of us: run the inn at a profit and charge visitors to stay here, to a nightly price we’ll agree on later, or to provide a place of lodging free of charge and only charge for meals or goods purchased, but not renting the rooms. For those who missed the previous meeting, the plan is to construct this inn adjacent to the marketplace and to build a smaller dining hall for visitors in the same building as the inn… First, the votes for running it at a profit,” he paused, counting the hands raised, “And second, providing lodging for free,” he paused again, but so few hands were raised he didn’t even need to count. “The tribe decides to run the inn for-profit.”

A mix of relief and annoyance were heard in the hall as people whispered their opinions to one another.

“You were going to talk about the healing center as well,” Bato reminded him from his right.

Hakoda nodded. “Right, right. So, with that in mind, the council for new business will start working on the plans and organizing a construction team. But we also must discuss the healing center and the workshop. Bato and Ikasuk are drawing up the plans. However, to me, it makes sense to put off this discussion of the construction of the healing center until Katara is back from the Fire Nation. Seeing as she’ll be the primary healer, she should have a say in its design.”

Words of agreement were heard around the hall at the decision, so Hakoda didn’t even feel like taking it to a vote.

“It’s a good start, Chief,” Bato said, smiling.

Hakoda stood, catching everyone’s attention and subtly signaling the end of the meeting. “Well, that’s enough for today. Great work, everyone.”

“Actually, Chief, there’s something else we’d like to discuss with you,” Ikasuk commented boldly. 

Hakoda raised a brow at the odd tone in Ikasuk’s voice, and the peculiar look in his eyes. He sat down again.

“Go on, then. What is it?”

He noticed some tribe members looking at one another, almost nervous. A strange energy began to fill the room.

“There’s something everyone's been talking about, but we haven’t brought it up as a group yet. We know it’ll be— difficult to discuss.”

“What’s that?” Hakoda asked, trying not to be nervous.

“I’ll say it, because I don’t mind speaking up. I’m not among those who actually had a problem with this, but because they might feel a bit afraid of mentioning it, I’ll say it on their behalf.”

He let out a huff. “Say it, then.”

“Not everyone was happy with your decision to let a Fire National into our town.”

Hakoda’s brows drew up quickly at that. Instinctively he looked around the group, checking their gazes, trying to see the reactions of his kinsmen. 

“Mai, you mean? The Firelord’s girlfriend? She knows Katara and Sokka," he tried to explain. "They became— almost friends, I suppose. Allies."

“Yes, Chief. I don’t personally take issue, but some were upset about it. I feel you should know that. They feel you didn’t consider the group’s opinion before opening the tribe up to a Fire National.”

“We know she can’t bend, but that’s not the point,” Kakei spoke up, catching everyone's attention. “I’ll admit it, I was among those who was concerned. I don’t understand why she was so brazenly allowed to enter when we never talked about it.”

Hakoda bristled a little. “I wasn’t aware there needed to be a discussion,” he answered quickly. “I took her into my home as a guest; she spoke with my children and my mother, quite amicably, I’ll say. She facilitated the first peaceful trade deal with this tribe since the beginning of the war.”

“They’re desperate,” Kakei contended. “They’d make a deal with anyone at this point. The Earth King is delaying and delaying with them. They’re a crippled nation— failures who need to deal with their lot. They deserve it. I understand your desire to start trading with the world again, Chief Hakoda, and it went well, I admit it," he put his hands up, "but I never liked it. Nor did my family. I should have said it then. And I wasn’t afraid to speak my mind,” he glared at Ikasuk a bit, “I just didn’t want there to be in-fighting in the tribe. But I’ll speak my mind now.”

Hakoda gave him a strange glance. “I’m sorry, but what exactly is it that you’re suggesting, Kakei? That we cut off trade with them?”

“Yes," he answered immediately, "And, like many others in the tribe, that they are denied entry to our town. The inn should be off-limits to them.”

He scowled fully at him then, too confused to care about causing discord. "You want their entire race banned from the inn? From the South Pole?"

"Yes. For obvious reasons," Kakei emphasized. "I'm not the only one. We don't just want them banned from the inn, but our village."

“I’ve heard others in the tribe speak about this,” Bato chimed in, turning to the Chieftain, “Many feel that trade with them would be alright, but only at a distance, and rarely. And they don’t want them admitted into the tribe. Even without weapons.”

“Some of us are literally still in mourning over the deaths of our friends and family in the January attack. We do not want them here,” a visitor from the north spoke out. “Back home we would never even consider giving them entry.”

Hakoda’s brow furrowed even more as he realized how serious his tribe was about the nature of this discussion.

“I didn’t realize you thought this way. Someone should have said something to me sooner.”

“You didn’t ask us!” Kakei countered boldly. “You made the decision. You wrote to Firelord Zuko.”

“I asked the elders," he snapped back, then tried to calm himself. "They agreed to trade with him.”

Kakei eyed the elders critically.

“We did," Tika'ik admitted. "That's true, Hakoda. But we didn’t agree to granting them entry to the town.”

Kanna sighed at them both. “Hakoda let a teenage girl into our Great Hall. She sat and talked with my grandchildren for an hour before leaving, and she did nothing bad other than refusing to try my octupus soup. Do not exaggerate what happened here. My son let in an unarmed teenager. Not an admiral.”

“Am I the only one here who knows who she is?" Kakei huffed, exasperated. "Mai Hasegawa is a little more than just a teenage girl, as you call her, Kanna. No disrespect to you; I doubt you know her story. I'm sure you don't.”

“What story?” Kanna asked, curious.

“She’s not just Firelord Zuko’s girlfriend,” he toyed with the word, making fun of it. “She was working for Firelord Ozai and Princess Azula during the war. She was a part of the Coup of Ba Sing Se; she helped Princess Azula."

Surprised gasps were heard around the Hall at that.

"Am I the only one who reads the newspapers we get from the Earth Kingdom?”

“Mai changed sides at the end of the war,” Hakoda responded. “She went against Azula and was prepared to fight her to the death. For which she was imprisoned in the Boiling Rock. Her change of heart came before the war’s end.”

Kakei’s eyes narrowed just a shade. “She was still an enemy.”

“She was," he agreed, pausing. "Was.”

"She's Fire Nation."

"The war is behind us, Kakei. We have no enemies anymore. Not really."

"What do you call people that are not our allies?"

"Strangers."

"How are they strangers?" His eyes blew wide with passion. "We saw their blades. We felt their fire, their chains. They are known, they are not strangers."

"Fine," Hakoda sighed, exhausted, "call them enemies, if that is what you want so badly, but I don't think it's productive."

"Yes, I know how you urge to move on," his tone soured at the end, and he exchanged glances with his wife.

"It's time, Kakei. If they're not strangers, then they can simply be fellow members of the world; you don't have to call them allies."

"Do you think of them as allies?" Kakei challenged, perplexed.

"No. But I think lingering on a war I was dying to be done with is futile. And counterproductive."

“Are you telling us that we don’t get a say in this, Chief Hakoda?” Kakai asked, the question deeply imbued with meaning.

Hakoda usually felt one-ness and unity with his tribe, but in that moment he felt like the Southern Tribe was just like everywhere else, and there was someone in the room eager to displace him as leader. 

“Of course I care what you all think,” he looked around the room, at all their kin, “and feel. I understand that some here are still in mourning. I lost my wife to them. My father. My brother. Don't imagine that I somehow don't understand the pain. And I do care what the group thinks. I want to think about this for a while before any decisions are made. I want to speak with people individually, get to know some different opinions. Talk this through. Some people aren’t comfortable voicing their concerns to the whole group like this. If any of you want to speak with me on the issue, we can meet privately. I vote that we table these decisions until I have time to speak with more people, and you all have time to consider the issue. Keep in mind that banning Fire Nationals from entering our land is a serious decision that has consequences for the future, as it would deeply insult Firelord Zuko, and refusing further trade would be problematic for both of our nations. But I’ll let you think on that. Let us leave this for now. Goodnight, everyone.”

He stood, and everyone else followed suit.

“Good night, Chief Hakoda.”

“Good night.”

“See you tomorrow.”

The chieftain watched for a second as everyone got up and started to make their ways out for the night. He gave his mother a hand, helping her to her feet. Seeing Pakku still sitting on the floor, his gaze drifting, Hakoda held out his hand for him as well, thinking he was just being too proud to admit he needed a hand up in his old age.

When Pakku saw his son-in-law’s hand he simply glared at it for a second and got up on his own.

“I’m not senile, Hakoda," he sighed.

Hakoda struggled to not make a face at him.

“You were just sitting on the floor— you can’t blame me for thinking you’re having trouble getting up,” he replied, annoyed for the thousandth time that month at his mother’s new husband. 

Starting to walk away, he startled when he felt Pakku’s hand on his shoulder, keeping him in place. He turned, seeing that his mother, Pakku, and Bato were all still lingering while the others cleared out.

“Can I have a minute to speak with you?” Pakku asked.

Kanna looked up at him. “Do you want to be alone?” 

“You can stay. You too, Bato.”

Bato was planning to stay to talk to Hakoda about the drama of their meeting but agreed, interested in listening-in. 

Pakku cleared his throat. “Hakoda, I’ve been meaning to speak with you about something.”

“More critiques of my behavior?” He teased, smirking, but then he saw his father-in-law’s expression and stopped, his face falling. “Oh. It is a critique of my behavior, isn’t it? Have I broken another one of your Northern customs?”

“Yes, but it’s not about that. I realize you have different rules,” he muttered, clearly indicating with his tone what he thought of Hakoda’s ‘rules’, or lack thereof. 

Hakoda closed his eyes for a brief moment, ready to get scolded yet again for not being up to Pakku's incredibly strict standards. Despite being a waterbending master, and only being the leader of the bending school, Pakku was always comfortable giving him advice on how to lead, even though it wasn't always appreciated. But Hakoda believed in respecting his elders, same as all his kin, and forced himself into calmness. He tried to remind himself that Pakku was a member of the White Lotus; he had redeeming qualities.

“Go on. You have my attention.”

Pakku pursed his lips, thinking, clearly not just trying to make trouble. There was something on his mind, that much was obvious. 

“...I worry about your children," he finally said.

Hakoda blinked a few times in confusion. “You worry about my children? ”

Pakku's wrinkled, expressionless face did little to clear up his lack of understanding.

“Yes. I know Sokka and Katara are very remarkable, and quite capable for their young age, but I feel that I should share my concerns with you.”

He waved his hand. “Speak freely, then.”

“Although Sokka and Katara are capable of a great deal, and they are brave, I don’t think— I don’t believe it’s appropriate that they’re staying in the Fire Nation on their own. The war is over. There’s no need for the family to be separated. As soon as they receive the repatriation payment, they should return. And Kanna agrees with me on this.”

Hakoda startled at that. “Mother?”

Kanna’s face showed equally little expression, but her eyes considered her son warmly. “I do.”

“You were the one to tell the kids to take off traveling in the first place. Katara told me you encouraged it.”

“I did. When the war was still upon us,” she explained, “They were helping The Avatar travel for training. And to save us all. So they did. I don’t regret that. They helped him save the world… but the world is saved, Hakoda.”

“Even with that wretch Ozai only in prison,” Pakku muttered angrily under his breath. 

“The world is free now,” Kanna ignored him, going on. “The Avatar returned to his strength, and the Southern Water Tribe is independent.”

Hakoda tried once more to respect his elder and not roll his eyes to the ceiling at that statement. “Yes, I do believe the war is behind us, mother.”

“As do I. So, the children should come back. Pakku is right. This is where they belong.” She gesticulated, indicating the Great Hall, the fire in the central hearth popping and crackling behind them. “This is their home.”

“They’re a little old for me to be bossing them around.”

“It’s not bossing them around,” Pakku criticized, “because you’re their father. Tell them it's your wish and they will obey you. They respect you, don’t they?”

Hakoda looked away. “Sokka does. And Katara loves me, but I don’t know how much she respects my authority over her life. Being away for so long made her learn how to live without me. It made her independent. It made her grow up fast.”

“Yes, she's mature for her age. But the Fire Nation is a dangerous place, war or no war,” Pakku warned, “She does not belong there. She's an innocent. We know that this Firelord Zuko claims to be a changed man now," he played with that phrase, indicating what little faith he had in the idea, "and his decision to risk his life for Katara’s is indeed a wonderful thing, but we don’t feel we trust him with the care of our grandchildren.”

“I can’t exactly forget the way he treated me when he raided our village, Hakoda,” Kanna sighed. “The way he treated all of us. He was just like the rest of them; he threatened us. He used his firebending. He disrespected me, pulling me forward by my hood.”

"Spirits," Pakku cursed.

Hakoda cringed. It was hard to stick up for the teen when his mother recounted a story like that.

Pakku exhaled in frustration. “Not to mention kidnapping the Avatar from the Oasis during the Winter Siege. And fighting with your own daughter on multiple occasions, something you’re conveniently forgetting.”

“Oh, he’s done a great many things, I don't forget them,” Hakoda almost groaned, exhausted and ready for bed. “I’m aware. And I’m sure I’ve only heard half of them.”

Pakku's narrow blue eyes were swimming, in a daze. “Then why would you trust him?”

“Unlike you, I actually know him a little. I’ve traveled with him. Why do I trust him?" He looked away, thinking. "Well, I trust him very little, but I do trust him enough to trade with him or let my children stay at his home. There are many reasons for that.”

“What made you trust him in the first place?” Kanna scowled. “He didn’t exactly make a good impression.”

“Of course. He never should have done that. I'm not making excuses for him. But I do think he is a changed young man now. Now. I spent weeks traveling alongside him. Last summer he had everything… he was the crown prince. He had his title back, the chance of controlling most of the world. Of helping his father win the war, getting all that glory. But he went against him," he met Pakku's gaze, trying to share his emotions. "It was an important choice, and an emotional one. He told me."

"You spoke of it?" Pakku wondered aloud.

"Yes. He left all of that behind. His crown, his wealth, his girlfriend. Any chance of a future with them, just to help the Avatar and us win the war. So he wouldn't be on the wrong side of history; so he would stop perpetuating their war. He went from living in palaces filled with servants to sleeping in a tent and living off the land with us. We had a few discussions together. I could tell he was earnest. He finally realized how evil his country and his family was— saw what they were doing and decided to go against it.”

"It was a bit late," Bato chimed in. "But he is only seventeen now. It's a little hard to judge him for following his father's orders when he was just thirteen or so. He was a child. At least he had a change of heart."

“I hope you’re right, and he is changed, because my grandkids are out there right now," Kanna sighed.

“Firelord Zuko is only one person there out of many,” Pakku went on. “Your children are spending time in the heart of the Fire Nation Caldera itself, a breeding ground of evil. The Capital is unstable, and full of untrustworthy characters. There was an assassination attempt on Firelord Zuko’s life just three months ago.”

“Someone could try to harm them, Hakoda. Think about how people there must view them: as the foreigners who helped The Avatar win the war, take down their leader, and turn their nation into a country of losers. They’re going to take their tax money back for our tribe," Kanna implored.

“Which is nothing but a drop in the bucket in terms of repayment for what they’ve done to our tribe,” he rebutted, “We started out with some five hundred thousand citizens at the beginning of the war, spread across five cities.”

“Do you think they care?” Pakku huffed. “They think of your people only as savage beasts," he nearly spat, "wild, primal hunters living off the land, too idiotic to do anything else.”

Hakoda stiffened, clenching his jaw. “They think? You’re sure it’s just them?” Hakoda probed. “Not you?”

Pakku gave him a disappointed, hurt expression. “Hakoda.”

He tilted his head, trying to exhale his anger. “Of course not. You’re above that.”

“Don't take this out on Pakku,” Kanna criticized. “He’s merely telling you what you already know.”

“I don’t know it because it’s not true. I’ve heard it, but the lies are prevented from entering my ears. And I don’t care if some Northern benders feel that way, either. Our people are not savage beasts. If anyone is, the Firebenders are, but I’m not going to drag myself into the Hells having that argument. The war is over and I agreed to let it be over. I gave my word. I’m doing deals with a teenage Firelord who claims to be a changed person. My children are helping me. What exactly is it that you think is going to happen to them over there? Assassination?” He raised his brows at them.

Pakku tilted his head. “That is just one possibility out of many. Consider their surroundings. You’re not obtuse, you’re a smart man— a worldly one. You know what the Fire Nation is like.”

He shook his head at that. “Not really. I haven’t spent much time there at all. I just hear things. You know I was on their top-ten most wanted list for over a decade, don't you? I didn't exactly relax on the beach at Ember Island in my downtime.” 

Pakku refused to change the topic of conversation. “It’s worse than Ba Sing Se. The things they’ll be exposed to there…”

Kanna tsked.

Hakoda crossed his arms. “I trust my children to know their own virtues.”

“And I hope they do, but that won’t stop others from trying to corrupt them.”

“I trust them," he repeated.

“Chief Hakoda, they’re teenagers in a city full of hate, political instability, debauchery, drunkenness, prostitution, gambling, murderers, and gangsters. Even if you trust them, why do you want them exposed to all that? To be around those types? They should come home.”

“That’s not the whole of it…” Kanna trailed off.

He looked down at his mother. “What do you mean?”

“The Fire Nation is more than that. Yes, that much is true, the prostitution and the drinking— but there are other things there that could turn their heads away from home…”

He raised a brow at her. “Such as?”

“They have schools. Busy cities. Engineering. Yes," she gave her son a look, "I know the word, don’t look so surprised, Hakoda. Even if they avoid all those pits, there are things Firelord Zuko can offer them that we never can.”

“With respect, mother, that’s not true. We can have schools. Soon. We can have engineering here, one day, everything you’re talking about. My son can do all that, he can bring it here. We can bring books here."

“Eventually, perhaps. But right now we’re struggling to build an inn and a healing center. We're probably years away from a basic children's school. By then the kids will be grown and married. Don’t you think there’s a possibility they'll be pulled in by the allure of that city? Think of how the children spoke of Ba Sing Se. How many hours did they go on about it— the university and the palace and the trains. All the things we don’t have here.”

Hakoda's brow furrowed, trying to figure out exactly what it was they wanted from him.

“So, you want me to have them come home because it’s both an evil cesspool and far better than anything I can offer? The two of you are making a very confusing argument.”

Pakku put his hand on Hakoda's shoulder. “You’re already going to Ba Sing Se for the peace-talks, son. I’m encouraging you to drop by. They wouldn’t be worse off with their father’s presence.”

Hakoda nearly clashed with him at the word 'son' but let it go.

“I’ll stop by because I love them. And I want to see them. Not because I’m worried about them.”

Pakku nodded.

“At least you’re agreeing. I just care about their wellbeing.”

“So do I!” He insisted emphatically. 

“You’ve been away for a long time," Kanna responded. "You’re not used to being a father again. Just because they’re teenagers doesn’t mean you’re done. I’m still parenting you and I’m older than a Humpback whale-shark.”

Hakoda chuckled at that.

“She’s right. Above anything, you should keep an eye on them because you love them. What if they need you?" Pakku asked. "All the way over here… you’d never know.”

Author's Notes

Inspiration for the Seer/Truthsayer archetype (for Amara):

-A light version of the truthsayer archetype (Galadriel) as seen in Lord of the Rings: The Fellowship of the Ring (2001), https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=qdD6Cte8HrU , and the Lord of the Rings (1978) https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jltwAEQ4kGg&t=83s , from the Fellowship of the Ring (1954).

-A dark version of the truthsayer archetype (Gaius Helen Mohiam) as seen in Dune (2021), https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=l9fvEDpub8M , from Dune (1965). Also, Paul (SPOILER! https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kVgxQJlgDAQ).

-Moses https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=i0PPMC97rpI  

-Merlin (Merlin and the Grail, 12th century)

-A light version of the truthsayer archetype (Joseph/Zaphnath-Paaneah) as seen in Joseph: King of Dreams (2000) https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QWiJ8VQXJzY , adapted from the Bible, the Book of Genesis, 41, https://www.biblegateway.com/passage/?search=Genesis%2041&version=NKJV . When Pharaoh promoted Joseph to be his right-hand, the second-most powerful man in Egypt, he gave him the name Zaphnath-Paaneah, meaning “the man to whom mysteries are revealed.”

—Aang has many dreams, visions, and hallucinations in A:TLA, some of which are prophetic in nature. He’s shown a vision of Toph before he meets her in “The Swamp” and he’s shown a vision of Firelord Ozai on the day of Sozin’s Comet in “The Spirit World” episode (if you watch carefully, he literally sees the future exactly... Ozai firebending in The Wulong Forest, something I didn’t notice when I was a kid). In “Nightmares and Daydreams,” one of his nightmares is a foreshadowing of the comet, mixed in with all the crazy nightmares.  https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Dl8c0ptUl_M  

—We also know that Chief Arnook, the leader of the Northern Water Tribe, had a vision when his baby Yue was born (that she would one day give up her life to become the Moon Spirit). He says this himself at the end of Season 1. 

So, basically, I had the idea to introduce a Seer character into A:TLA, one other than Aang himself. I've always loved these characters in stories and I've been dying to write one. So excited... 

Chapter Text

Haytham: “We worked to see this land united and at peace. Under our rule, all would be equal. Do the patriots promise the same?”

Ratonhnhaké:ton: “They offer freedom.”

Haytham: “Which I’ve told you, time and time again, is dangerous! There will never be consensus, son, amongst those you have helped to ascend. They will each differ in their views of what it means to be free. The peace you so desperately seek does not exist.”

Ratonhnhaké:ton: “No! Together they will forge something new— better than what came before.”

Haytham: “These men are united now by a common cause. But when this battle is finished, they will fall to fighting amongst themselves about how best to ensure control. In time, it will lead to war. You will see.”

Ratonhnhaké:ton: “The patriot leaders do not seek control. There will be no monarch here. The people will have the power, as they should.”

Haytham: “The people never have the power. Only the illusion of it! And here’s the real secret: they don’t want it. The responsibility is too great to bear. It’s why they’re so quick to fall in line as soon as someone takes charge. They want to be told what to do. They yearn for it! Little wonder, that, since all mankind was built to serve.”

—Assassin’s Creed III

Fire Nation, Royal Palace

Zuko started before he even knew what he was doing.

It was a compulsion. He made a request to the kitchen. He picked up the red lacquer bento box when it was ready. Then he left through the back entrance of the palace and walked out of the caldera towards the long, private road to the prison. 

The guards always said the same thing.

No activity. No movement. Nothing to report.

The high level of security he had been obsessed with implementing was doing as well as he had hoped. But he was always vigilant. 

He strolled past the terrorists and serial killers and assassins to his father’s own solitary cell. It was nighttime, but that didn’t matter much in a prison. It wasn’t like his father could go anywhere. Despite the odd hour, he played the same routine. He knocked. He asked for a chair. 

And he always waited for his father to speak first.

“Well, if it isn’t Fire Lord Zuko,” Ozai emphasized, as if the title was a joke, “it’s a surprise to see you again so soon. It’s only been, what, a day?”

He moved himself forward to sit cross-legged in front of the bars separating his side of the prison cell from Zuko’s. The guard walked in and placed the chair in front of the bars for the Fire Lord before walking out and closing the door behind him.

“Two. You can’t tell the days apart in here,” he noted, taking a seat and tucking his robes underneath him.

“Not easily. They all bleed together after a while. The man who used to scream every morning is gone, and now my routine is off,” he mused.

“Another prisoner?”

Ozai gave him a tired look that meant, ‘Obviously, you idiot.’

Zuko made a noise of exasperation. “Well, at least he’s not screaming anymore.” He looked down at the bento box he was holding. “I brought you something.”

His father lazily raised a brow at that, although it was not a surprise. “Did you, now? It doesn’t smell like dinner.”

“It’s not. It’s leftover wagashi, from New Year's. And obukucha tea.”

Ozai thought aloud for once. “I didn’t know the festivities had passed already.”

“Yeah. But the kitchen has food leftover, so I brought you some.”

“The new year is upon us already. And here I still am, rotting away in this freezing, gods-forsaken cell.”

Zuko paid the apt comment no mind and handed over the large bento box, which wasn’t designed to carry tea, cups, and desserts, but he had insisted the kitchen staff do it anyway. It was easy to carry. 

And bringing a picnic basket to a federal prison would have felt idiotic. Even more so than going to his horrendous father for advice.

Ozai took the handle, his hand barely brushing against his son’s, and he set it down on his side of the bars on the tile floor. Curiously, he opened the top compartment and found two small white and gold cups and a tightly closed metal thermos. After pouring some of the green sencha tea into a cup for himself he saw the dried plum and tied sea kelp popping up a little from the bottom of the cup, as expected— a custom for the new year.

“Do you really wish me good health and happiness this year? I find that doubtful.” 

His son didn’t answer, thinking for a moment. Ozai took a sip of the tea, enjoying the warmth and flavor. He never got tea in prison, and in mid-winter, his cell was too cold for comfort, even in the temperate climate of the Capital. It felt quite nice.

“Are you simply trying to cajole me into giving you more advice? These attempts are quite juvenile, you know.”

Zuko took another moment before he responded, trying to remember his uncle’s advice from years ago to be very careful when he said anything in the presence of his father or his sister. They remembered everything. And were smarter than him, although of course his uncle hadn't mentioned that bit. He wondered for a second why he had brought good-luck tea, really. He didn’t mean it that way. 

To him, it was simply the tea people drank around New Year’s Day, as per tradition. It occurred to him for a moment that his father considered the actual meanings of Fire Nation traditions, and the implications of Fire Nation cultural practices. Zuko wished he was as cognizant about the deeper purpose of such long-practiced traditions. His parents, his uncle, and schoolteachers had told him such things since he could walk, but Zuko had rarely paid attention enough to remember anything they said— only when it interested him greatly. Most of it he simply tuned out, finding it boring. But he realized how ironic it was that he was Fire Lord and yet he didn’t really know the basis for many of the traditions of his own country.

He watched his father take another sip from his cup. 

“...I don’t really wish anything for you anymore,” he finally answered, “good or bad. It’s just tea to me.”

That caught Ozai’s attention, and he locked eyes with his son, who was sitting still on his chair with no expression on his youthful, scarred face. It was unusual. 

Ozai sighed slowly. Sometimes Zuko could be surprising. 

He wondered if something of import had happened since last they spoke, because Zuko was rarely so contemplative. And when he was, something dire was often on the horizon. 

“Do you want a cup?” He asked his son, deciding to be equally surprising himself.

“Sure. Why not?”

Ozai poured him some tea, passed it over, and they drank in silence for a moment. 

Zuko couldn’t believe how quiet the prison was. It was quieter than the Boiling Rock. So much quieter. When the guards weren’t walking around or moving prisoners back and forth from the shower room there was nothing but thick, dead silence. Like being trapped in one’s own mind. Thoughts took over, with nothing to drown them out. In an effort to try to be a more mature ruler like his father had suggested, Zuko tried to be more conscious of what he was doing. 

He knew he often did things on gut impulse, without really thinking them through, and sometimes lied to himself or blocked his own thoughts so he wouldn’t consider the truth of a matter, even in his own mind. It drove him crazy. And he knew it was a part of the reason he couldn’t lightning-bend. He didn’t have full control of himself. But the heavy stillness of Ozai’s prison cell, coupled with the intense quietness of his father, made him consider his own mind for a moment. 

He wondered why he really did bring things to his father’s cell. Why he came back when he knew it was a bad idea. Even after being denigrated and denounced by him. And why he tried to bring things to make Ozai, of all people, feel better. A man who had abused and belittled him over the years, interspersed by such rare moments of parental love. 

Zuko stared down at his hands, wrung in his lap, struggling to understand his own emotions. Just six months prior he had been firmly in support of having his father killed. Executed in public. And just months before that, he had wanted nothing more than to go home and be embraced by the same hand that had burnt off almost half his face. 

And yet, there he was, sitting in the cell again. Wondering why he had come.

Zuko blinked, not fully knowing the answer, but after taking another second looking around the dismal, desolate room, and the iron bars separating them, he could think of one of the answers. And it wasn’t one he really wanted to think about.

He felt bad for his father, in a way.

The silence was deafening. In his chilly little cell, there was no escape. No release date. No hope on the horizon. No one to talk to. Nothing to pass the time with while waiting for death. Even the only window at the top was tiny, and heavily barred, barely letting any moonlight into the cell. Only in the upper quadrant, near the ceiling, or the far wall. The only things in the cell were a mattress on the floor with one bare pillow, and a metal toilet with toilet paper in the back corner. No comforter. Not even sheets. 

Guards had told him that prisoners in solitary would often hang themselves with the sheets.

Zuko looked at the pathetic excuse for a bed in the corner, and remembered the bed his father used to sleep in. Back when he was a child, and his father was actually a father, and not a stranger. 

It was a lovely bed. Large and very wide. A custom-built one, hand-carved, and passed down through generations. The tall four posters were  black wood, decorated with gold-painted scrolls. At the top there was expert latticework with depictions of dragons and deer-foxes in pastoral scenes. The wide expanse of the feather-down mattress had been covered in the nicest silks, or silk-covered down comforters in winter, and the colors changed throughout the year. Crimson red, midnight black, light gold, muted purple, and emerald green. Delicate embroidery of cranes or good luck tassels or phoenixes taking flight. There were always comfy pillows by the headboard. 

And, of course, his mother… usually curled up on her side, under the blanket. Beautiful and warm and always a relief to come home to after a terrible day. 

It was difficult to blink back to reality and take in the dingy, bare mattress sitting right on the rough tile floor. His father's new bed.

No sheets.

Then, another thought came out from the fog. Another emotion. And Zuko tried not to push it down, because he knew if he did that, it would just make things worse. He worried that his father would commit suicide. And, if he did, despite everything that Ozai had done to him, and to the world, Zuko worried that the guilt that would come after would be overwhelming.

With a shallow breath in, Zuko tried to accept the feeling. Then he let it out. He remembered that Uncle Iroh told him a way to get to a clearer qi space was to accept the feelings one was trying to deny. Then you can deal with them with your clearer qi-path, he remembered.

“My goodness. You’re really thinking about something,” Ozai muttered, breaking the silence after watching his son struggle for a full minute. “Worried The Avatar’s going to lock you in here, too?”

“No, I’m not. Just eat. Aren’t you going to open the other one?” 

Zuko gestured to the elaborate bento box, which looked very out of place in his cell.

Ozai opened the lid to the second compartment and peered inside at the elegant, expertly made New Year’s wagashi, which were quite familiar to him: flower petal mochi, steamed rice-flour cakes, dango, yokan, and an Earth-Kingdom-style mooncake. 

It felt strange to see the wagashi in such a desolate place. They were too pretty. Too perfect. They were meant for the sunny tea rooms of sophisticated wives and elegant palaces. Not solitary confinement. When Ozai picked up a piece of plum flower mochi and took a bite, a memory faded into his consciousness, one of another, far more pleasant New Year’s celebration, years ago. 

The Royal Annex, which was usually sparsely and elegantly decorated, had been filled with decor. Garish ornaments clashed with the understated artwork and gilded moldings of the Annex, clearly for the sake of the children living within its walls. That morning, Ozai and Ursa had helped their children hang red paper lanterns, paper cuttings, door couplets, kadomatsu bamboo shoots, and plum branch arrangements around their family's chambers, for the occasion of the new year. 

Once everything had been set up, the four of them sat down for tea service in their living room. It was much like a normal day, save for the court musician, plucking a zither in the corner. Ozai had never been very fond of court music in the background, preferring the sounds of the fountains in the gardens alone, but had acquiesced to his wife’s request given the holiday.

Also at her request, the chabudai table in their living room was filled with wagashi. The desserts, almost too beautiful to eat, were laid out in rows on black lacquer trays before them. No effort required. There were servants and master chefs to do all of that painstaking work. For Prince Ozai and his family, the wagashi simply arrived at the desired moment, along with matcha and servants, on standby in case they were needed. 

The Fire Prince simply looked at them for a moment, curious. The wagashi were in endless colors and combinations, some made to look like flowers, animals, and even spirits. There were orange peach-shaped mochi, cherry blossom nerikiri, red bean cakes, mandarin-shaped daifuku, Earth Kingdom mooncakes, and a white hanabira mochi shaped to look like what Ozai guessed was the rice spirit. 

“It’s hard to open these.”

He looked up at his young son, seated across from him at the table.

Despite the apparent difficulty, Zuko was smiling a little, his gold eyes twinkling as he opened his envelope, pulling on the shiny red and gold strings, trying to open it as fast as possible. Ursa had picked out traditional, elegant red envelopes, with white, gold, and red strings for decoration. And Ozai had written the children’s names on their envelopes, as was expected. They both knew Zuko and Azula looked forward to the tradition every year, even though they had no real need for money. They had everything they could ever want. 

Ozai supposed they cared more about the meaning of the money gifts: it meant that they were loved and cherished by their parents. 

Even though he had never been one for sentimentality, and the practice was quite indulgent, Ozai always gave his children plenty during New Year's, and their birthdays, and for the celebrations in midsummer. After all, he remembered being a child and never receiving anything, and the pain that had come from that. He watched Zuko slide the paper money out of the envelope, and Azula followed suit, her tiny hands working quickly. 

“Wow!”

For Zuko, there were four paper notes, worth four hundred gold coins in exchange, and for Azula, three notes, being the younger sibling. But she smirked nonetheless, looking at the exchange value and the image of a much younger Azulon on the paper note, her namesake. 

“Thank you, daddy.”

Zuko looked up with a pleased expression. “Thank you, dad.” 

“You’re welcome.”

Zuko’s gaze flicked back down to the money and the table between them. The arrangement of wagashi and the tea set took up all the space on its surface.

“Where should I put it?” 

Ursa extended her elegant hand. “I’ll put it away for you, dear. If you want something, just ask. I’ll take the money out for you then.” 

Zuko obliged easily, handing it all over to his mother right away. 

Azula wasn’t so sure. “I want to keep it!" She clutched it tightly. "It’s mine. Why do I have to give it back?”

“Let her keep it,” Ozai sighed.

Ursa looked over at her small daughter, fighting the urge to scold. “Fine, dear. You can keep it. Ask one of the servants to take the envelope to your room. Nicely,” she added, and Azula rose from the floor cushion to approach their servants on the other side of the grand room.

Zuko picked up a tiny green nerikiri, shaped like a leaf. “Can I put some money in the box at the temple when we go today?”

Despite the general lack of religiosity in the Capital, the royal family went to the temple on every New Year’s Day, in a show of thanking their ancestors and the spirits, and to pray for safety and good fortune in the coming year. It was the last religious tradition left, really, although pretty much void of meaning. Just a ritual. The meaning of common habits like leaving out mochi and daidai for the spirits was mostly forgotten, with only a select few remembering the actual meaning of the ancient traditions, and barely anyone remaining who really believed in it. 

“Sure. We’ll give you some coins to put in the box.” 

Ursa nodded, elegantly pouring matcha for her husband and then for herself and Zuko. Ozai watched his butler-manservant bow his head to Azula and hand her something. She came back to the table holding New Year’s Day cards and handed the stack to her father.

“Souzu gave me these. He said I could bring them to you.” 

She put them in his hands and went back to her seat, kneeling on the zabuton cushion.

Prince Ozai looked over the decorated cards, each with some form of a tiger on the front, the writing in gold-painted characters. He handed the first one to Ursa, immediately recognizing the address, and she opened them with excitement. 

“Oh, these are from your grandparents in Yamamachi!” She opened them and began to read, smiling as she did so, “‘Happy New Year, Zaodan family. Thank you for everything you’ve done for us in this past year. Please remember our heartfelt appreciation. We miss you all dearly during this winter season. We thank you for your visit this fall and wish to see you again soon. We are praying for good health and happiness for each of you. May good fortune fall upon you. May wealth and treasures fill your home. May the five blessings come to you.’” She stopped reading and looked up at her children. “Do you remember the five blessings?”

Azula answered right away. “Longevity, wealth, health, virtue, and a natural death.” 

“Very good, Azula. I’m going to keep reading. ‘We wish that you will all have a flourishing year. Prince Zuko and Princess Azula, we wish you good luck in school and at the Royal Firebending Academy. Honored Prince Ozai,’— they really wrote ‘honored’,” Ursa chuckled at the idea of her parents writing with such formality, “‘we wish you good luck in the competitions this year and in all your other endeavors. For dearest Princess Ursa, our beloved daughter, we pray that you will have another successful birth and a healthy baby boy.’” 

Ursa lowered a hand to her newly pregnant belly, thinking of the child growing inside her. “‘Congratulations again on the pregnancy. We look forward to celebrating another precious grandchild. Please write to us soon and let us know of your health and how the pregnancy is progressing. Cheers to the New Year of our Honorable Lord Sozin, ninety-three.’”

“How do they know it’s gonna be a boy?” Azula asked. 

“They don’t,” Zuko answered, “They’re just hoping, ‘cause it’s good luck to have a boy.” 

Azula scowled at him. “No, it’s not. It’s good luck to have a girl. I’ve always been luckier than you, dum-dum.” 

“No arguing,” Ursa stopped them, “Not today.”

She took out two pochibukuro envelopes from her parent’s package, more playful and childlike than the ones she had picked out. Cherry blossoms and red strings for Azula, and a cartoon-style tiger with gold strings for Zuko. 

Ursa looked over her children with a motherly gaze, perfectly plucked eyebrows slightly raised. “Are you going to be good now?”

“Yes, mom,” Azula forced out. She wanted the rest of her gifts.

Zuko's eyes beamed up at her sweetly. “Yes, mom! Promise.” 

She relaxed her face and held out the money envelopes for them. “Here, then. From your grandparents.”

“Yay!” 

“Sweet.”

Both children began opening the envelopes while Ozai filtered through the stack of nengajo cards to get to the one he wanted. Ursa placed her hand on his thigh in silent support and looked over to see what he was reading. He set the others down and opened the simple, blood-red one, with no decoration except for the character for the Year of the Tiger stamped in gold. He pulled out the note inside.

“From your father?” She asked gently, barely more than a whisper.

“Yes.”

________________________________________________________

恭贺新禧。 

祝您的家人過一個快樂和健康的一年。弄瓦之喜。願這孩子堅強。

蘇瑾新年賀詞九十三。

________________________________________________________

He frowned at the short and very formal card. Just long enough to not be completely improper, written with haste when Iroh had no doubt scolded him for not writing one for them.

“What does it say, dad?” Zuko asked. “Is it from Firelord Azulon?”

“Yes.” Ozai cleared his throat. “‘Happy New Year. I wish that you and your family will have good health and success this year. Congratulations on the pregnancy. I wish for your child to be healthy and strong. Cheers to the New Year of Sozin, ninety-three.’”

A silence passed among them. Zuko and Azula watched their father’s expression closely, because something was going unsaid; the tension in the air was strange, but clearly evident.

“It’s longer than last year’s,” Ursa whispered softly, so only Ozai could hear, and not the servants. 

He looked over at his wife, at her gentle gaze and the comforting expression on her beautiful features. She rubbed his knee affectionately, trying to soothe him.

“Aren’t we supposed to give good wishes to each other, too?” Zuko spoke up. He took a sip of matcha and winced at the slightly bitter flavor, not quite old enough to be used to the taste of it. 

Ozai just stared at his son in silence, still frowning.

“Of course, darling,” Ursa replied, “I think that’s a wonderful idea. What are some of your wishes?”

He thought for a moment. “I… I wish for father to be happy and healthy and have a long life, with many children and lots of grandchildren. And I wish for him to win all of his competitions this year. And I wish that Uncle Iroh and cousin Lu Ten will be happy this year, too. And I wish that Iroh and Lu Ten will do well in battle, and bring Fire Nation victory… Also, that mom’s baby will be strong and healthy. And a boy. And at the temple today I’m gonna wish that the new baby is a bender, too, because that’ll make dad really happy.”

Ursa’s amber eyes sparkled, radiating joy and pride. “That’s beautiful, Zuko.”

Prince Ozai kept silent, simply considering the innocent child across from him… his own creation. The boy’s charming face was full of earnestness, kindness, and conviction. 

Ozai wondered how long it could possibly last.

And he wondered why he couldn’t stand it.

It was a struggle to come back to the present. A part of him wanted to remain in his memories. In the past. Before everything had become so dark. Before he had become so dark. Before everyone had been lost. Before the death, the sadness, and the loneliness had come sweeping in like a great tsunami wave.

“Are you gonna say anything?”

Zuko sounded annoyed, and possibly concerned, but Ozai wasn’t sure. He was lost in his own thoughts, too distracted to care.

“Thank you for the wagashi.” The words barely sounded inauthentic. 

He picked out another one and ate it.

Zuko scowled. “You’re being really strange tonight, dad. Maybe you’re finally starting to lose your mind in here.”

“I could have done with something stronger than tea..."

“What were you thinking about before? You drifted off. You were somewhere else.”

Ozai took a sip from his cup and a thought briefly passed through his mind. 

“Time’s a strange thing, isn’t it?” You can only go forwards, he thought to himself, looking at his son. It was bizarre that for so long he had been in control of Zuko, but then, so suddenly, the tables had turned, and everything had reversed. And now his son was control of him. He couldn't go backwards, to live in what had been. Only forwards. Into a time during which Zuko was in control. Zuko, of all people.

Even Ozai knew that time wasn’t really to blame for his problems. Or even The Avatar, when it came down to it. He knew he was the main one responsible. The one to blame. He looked up at his son.

After all, he was the one who had ruined that beautiful face. He was the one who had crushed out the optimism and kindness in Zuko. He was the one who couldn’t bear to look at him, day after day. The earnestness and innocence and a gaze free of any pain at all. 

He was the one who couldn’t bear to be the only family member suffering.

And Ozai had fulfilled his own secret wish. He wasn’t the only one suffering anymore. Gone was the pure-hearted kindness and naïve joy in his son's gold eyes. Gone was the angelic handsomeness. 

Zuko’s eyes had nearly become a mirror, one with feelings quite familiar to him: sadness, indignation, anger, and angst. Frustration was set into the furrow of the one brow he had left. The scarred side simply wrinkled up, the slit of an eye narrowing. He glanced at the burnt fraction of an ear he had left and a slight wave of nausea rolled through Ozai, which he knew wasn’t from the sweetness of the mochi. It was one of those supremely rare moments during which he felt a little twinge of guilt. 

He considered himself for a moment. He wasn’t sure anymore why he thought this would be better— making everyone else suffer, too. It hadn’t given him the satisfaction he thought it would.

“What’s wrong with you? Why are you being so weird?” Zuko wondered what was bothering him so much. 

He watched his father look down at the tile floor. 

“...I don’t feel well.”

“You’re going crazy in here.”

Ozai made a noncommittal noise. “What do you want, Zuko?”

“I just wanted to have a conversation about life in court.”

He played with his nails. “To what end?”

“To ask if you have any advice for how to deal with the councilors and— change the opinion of the whole court, really.”

“If I explained those topics thoroughly to you, I think you’d miss bedtime with that girlfriend of yours. And you’d be here until the sun rises.”

“Give me the gist, then.”

“Why should I help you? You took my throne away from me, then you put me in this cell—”

“—actually the Avatar was the one who put you in prison, not me—”

“And now you’re coming to me as a Firelord, asking for help from the very man whom you usurped. The father you betrayed.”

“It wasn’t about betraying you. Not everything’s about you. It was about the war and the future. It was about supporting The Avatar. I didn’t do it to spite you. I did it because it was right... I suppose you never even think like that,” he muttered in frustration, “‘cause you never care about what’s right or wrong.”

Ozai’s expression was grim. “You’re not a martyr. You may have convinced yourself that you went against me and joined The Avatar for some lofty cause, but in reality you know you wanted my throne and you would do whatever it took to get it."

“You’re wrong. It wasn’t like that. I changed my beliefs. I thought Iroh would become Firelord, not me. I thought I was too young, anyway. I am too young. I just wanted— to be on the right side of history. I wanted to stop feeling so guilty about everything I was doing. I thought about my own karma. Not about getting some kind of personal revenge on you. If that was really how I felt, then why would I come to visit you like this? Bring you tea? And why would I have not killed you before? On the Day of Black Sun?”

Ozai looked down at the sweets in the bento box before him and felt nauseous again. 

“Why would I help you?”

“Because it’ll add a little spice to your otherwise boring life in here?” Zuko mused, shrugging. “It’s not like you have anyone else to talk to. I bring you food. And tea. That’s nice enough. I’m not going to negotiate with you. I’ll do whatever I want. If you don’t want to talk, then don’t. You don’t have the upper hand here.”

“I have the knowledge," Ozai countered. "And the experience."

Zuko huffed. “Will you help me, or not?”

“You don’t deserve it.”

“Fine. I’ll just go, then. Enjoy your dessert,” he huffed, setting the teacup on the ground. 

Ozai looked up at him, curious as he watched his son head towards the door. 

“Oh, wait— I have one question before I go. Not an advice question.”

“What?”

“Do you know a woman named Amara Miyazaki?”

Ozai’s gold eyes flicked up, searching his son’s expression. He hadn’t expected to hear Zuko mention her. “Amara Miyazaki? Where did you hear that name?”

“I’m asking you a question. Not the other way around. Do you know her or not?”

“I knew her. She was a friend. But I’m sure you already know that by now.”

Zuko said nothing.

“She moved back to the Capital then, didn’t she? Trying to come into power now that I’m gone? Smart girl…” he looked away, thinking about her. “She’s worked her way into your court already, hasn’t she?”

Zuko considered for a moment whether or not to answer him. “I hired her.”

“What title did she take?" He held his finger up. "Let me guess. Executive administrative officer? Head advisor?”

“Head advisor.”

“Hah. How was I able to guess that? I suppose my brain isn’t decaying as quickly as I thought. You hired her. Of course. That opportunistic woman wouldn’t shy away from your court. Not when you’re so desperately in need of help and leadership.”

“What’s your opinion of her?”

“She was a child prodigy here in the Capital. She’s a little older than you; you wouldn’t have known that.”

“Child prodigy for what?”

“That’s not the proper way to speak, Zuko.” He cringed. “You can say: ‘Why was she known for being a child prodigy?’ Spirits, you’re such a dimwit sometimes.”

Zuko bristled. “Answer my question—" he ordered harshly, "what’s your opinion of her?”

Ozai took a second to think back.

“She’s just as intelligent as she is beautiful. And very socially gifted. A natural problem solver. With her upbringing, she’s well-educated and well-suited to life in court. She skipped two grades in school and was top of her class at Akihara. She’s a very talented classical singer. A nonbender. And quite charming, too. But she’s… an opportunist. And a competent one. Gets it from her father,” he explained, meeting his son’s gaze. “He worked his way up from poverty to the Caldera itself— something most people considered impossible.”

Zuko's eyes narrowed at that.

“Why were you friends with her?”

“Why be friends with anyone? At the time, we shared common interests. We were interested in similar ideas. We’re both historians. We both earned degrees in history and political science at Akihara. So, we had plenty to talk about. Besides, she was dating my closest friend, Veras. We ran in similar circles.”

“I thought you didn’t have friends… I thought you said having friends was a waste of time.”

Ozai scowled, but then he remembered the conversation, many years back, and relaxed his face. “I didn’t say that. I said that your friends seemed like a waste of time. Not my friends.”

“A waste of time? Oh, you mean they couldn’t do anything for me... You’re so selfish,” he complained under his breath. “And why’d you say ‘opportunistic’ like it’s a bad thing? Who isn’t opportunistic in the Caldera? And in the whole Fire Nation? Maybe not Mai… but most people here are. Including you and me. Why do you think it’s so bad?”

“I don’t really believe in good or bad actions. I believe in useful and foolish actions. But don’t underestimate her, Zuko. Her lovely face and singing voice could fool you into thinking she’s not a threat. She can be. And she doesn’t pledge fealty.”

Zuko made a face at him. “You mean she didn’t pledge fealty to you. You’re just trying to paint her in a bad light ‘cause she stopped being friends with you. Maybe she just figured out that you’re an asshole and cut you off.”

Ozai tilted his head at him.

“You wonder why you have trouble getting people to support you when you address others like that?” 

Zuko exhaled in frustration. “You deserve it.”

Ozai rubbed his temple. “Nevermind. She’s fine. But she’s just here now because there’s a power vacuum in your court and head advisor is a very powerful position, second only to you, when wielded correctly. And she’s a talented woman. Ten times smarter than you. Don’t underestimate her. That’s all I’m saying.”

“I won’t. I should get going now. It’s late.” He stood, like he was going to walk out.

“Are you really going to go now after coming so far to see me?”

“It’s not that far. And you said you’re not going to help me. I’m not going to stay and try to convince you. I don’t need your help.”

Ozai raised his brows at that. “Really? Why'd you take a whole hour at the end of what was no doubt a busy, trying day to come visit me? You'd rather sit in this horrid little cell and shoot the breeze with your father than go have fun with your girlfriend?"

“I can do things on my own. I’m not going to negotiate with you.”

“Sit down, Zuko. I’ll talk to you. For a minute, at least. But you need to ask me something specific.”

He sat again. “How do you convince members of the court to come around to your way of thinking about something?”

“I’m assuming simple fear of you won’t be an effective motivator," he began, because Zuko wasn't as intimidating as a normal Firelord. "So, really, you’re asking me about the art of negotiation.”

“Sort of. Yeah.”

“You need to identify something they want and work with them so they’ll go along with your plan. Are you five years old?” He sounded genuinely annoyed at him. “You don’t understand how cooperation works? A quid pro quo?”

“Alright, I’m leaving. Man, you’re just—” he was going to swear again, but cut himself off, making a frustrated noise instead. 

Ozai laughed. “You’re such a child. Ridiculous... And you think you can run this country. What a joke. How complicated is it to find out something they want and negotiate with them so they’ll do what you want in exchange? Or, to find out something they don’t want and threaten them with it if they don’t do what you want? It’s as clear as the sky is blue. And yet you’re somehow perplexed by such ideas.”

“I’m going. I’m not asking you how to blackmail people, dad. You don’t understand what I’m saying, and I’m not going to sit here and waste my time listening to you talk down to me—”

“What did you mean, then?” Ozai interrupted.

“I don’t mean—” he paused, huffing. “I meant— how do you get people to come around to new ideas? New ways of acting? New ways of thinking? I didn’t mean they do something for me and I do something for them in return. I meant really convincing them to follow a different philosophy organically. With no need for a quid pro quo. Following a new ideal because they want to."

His father's gold eyes widened. “You mean your fantastical airbender utopia idea? An era of ‘peace and kindness’?” He mocked Zuko’s words from the Day of Black Sun.

“You're making a joke of it, because you’re a piece of shit, but— yeah, an era of peace and kindness. But not a utopia. Of course that doesn’t make any sense. I mean an era of cooperation and mutual hard-work. Working together instead of constantly trying to tear each other down. With compassion and… a focus on the non-war related aspects of the Fire Nation that used to make us so great."

He raised a brow. "Such as—?"

"The other things we used to be known for. Before Sozin was ever born. The way things used to be— I’ve heard about it. We used to be known for great art, great music, great food. Literature. Culture. Firebending arts. Worshiping the spirits in our ways. Having cultural celebrations that are about something other than the war. Honoring our ancestors. Trading with people of all races, not just taking from them. We could focus on promoting the better aspects of the Fire Nation. Innovation. And the good in our people. And push people to do what they’re called to do— whatever they’re good at," he started pacing, thinking out loud. "And the people who are good at those things will prosper, and we can be known for things other than the war. And we can start seeing firebending as a martial art and a practical skill instead of it just being about burning people to a crisp. I’m not talking about a utopia. I never was. I’m talking about a different, modern Fire Nation, inspired by the old one— long before Sozin. We used to be great in a different way."

Ozai stilled at that, considering his son's words carefully. "You're talking about a time before the industrial revolution, Zuko."

He looked over at him. "Yes. But we can still be inspired by those times."

"We were different then. And we were on a nearly level playing field, hundreds of years ago— with the Earth Kingdom, specifically. Not the other nations. But that dynamic changed long ago. We progressed."

"The other nations can get what we have. We can share our advancements. Not force it on them, but offer it up. For sale," he imagined. "Make money off it and be a valuable part of the world, in our own way. We have the technology. They have the food— more than us, anyway," he sighed, "We don't have to use our technology to oppress others. That's just what people did before. We can inspire others. And make wealth for ourselves, without need for the colonies."

His father scowled a little, but let it go. "Selling technology is all well and good. But how are people here supposed to eat in the meantime? They can't take a bite out of a tundra tank or an intercom. Are you quite sure foreign people will want these things as much as you think they do? They seem to be mostly happy with their ignorant, primitive ways of life. You're gambling. If you bet wrong, there won't be enough food here."

"I think they will."

"That's your bet. But what's your role in all this? Are you in business, now? Who's going to run these operations, you? Who's going to buy these pieces of technology? Are you going to sell them to middle merchants? Offer them up in international trade? What's the going rate for a jet ski? Five cows? Six? A bushel of wheat?" He toyed with him.

Zuko glared down at the floor, shoulders tense. "I don't have all the details worked out yet."

"Clearly. In the meantime, a human being starves to death in about two weeks. Eventually the reserves in the country are going to run dry. People in the ocean-side or river towns will fare better, because they have access to protein. But what about people in the cities? The suburbs? The mountains? While the price of a single cup of rice sky-rockets? I've noticed I don't get rice anymore. That wasn't a coincidence. It's too expensive now— too rare, isn't it?" Ozai mused. "That's not a good sign. That's really not a good sign. No wonder you came to me."

"The Earth King will cut a deal with me."

Ozai pondered that, and forced himself not to make a comment in response. "Hmph."

"We're all starting to get along, and you don't understand that. We're about to reach a peace-talk," he explained, "The first one in well over a century. All the major kings and lords. It's amazing. We're cooperating. Every nation. It's something you never could have imagined before."

The ex-Firelord raised a brow at that, but held his tongue. 

"We're about to reach total global cooperation. Once people can see I've helped achieve that, it'll be better here. Once the Earth Kingdom food comes in, things will get better. Besides— I'm giving people here lots of things. I'm not just criticizing them, like you said. I'm helping them."

"You're giving people things? What are you referring to?"

"Freedoms," he answered, meeting his father's curious expression. "Freedoms they didn't have before. Freedom of the press. Freedom to read whatever they want. Freedom to organize peacefully. Freedom to make their voices heard to government— we're taking comment cards from members of the public. Freedom of speech, in general. I always wanted that."

"You just say whatever you want without thinking," Ozai retorted. "That's just tactless. And counterproductive."

Zuko's face contorted in anger, thinking about the wrecked side of his face. Thinking about the Agni Kai.

"People deserve to speak their minds. That was something they could never do here during the war... without risking getting burned."

"And, how is this plan of yours working, son?"

He stiffened at the word 'son', sitting up straighter. "What do you mean?"

"How do people feel about this, then? Since you're apparently giving them what they want?"

"They're still upset. For now."

"Hmm," he pretended to be shocked in jest, "interesting..."

"Let's go back to my question. How do I get people in the court to come around to my way of thinking?"

"Do you mean fully embracing life here without the war? Without considering our country to be the best one? Considering other races as equals? Not enemies? Letting go of the past and looking forward to the future, one in which we are just another nation, and nothing special? Not in charge?"

Zuko nodded.

“You’re talking about a complete paradigm shift,” Ozai countered. “One that would take a tremendous amount of luck to pull off here. And you and I both know you weren’t born lucky."

“I don’t need luck," Zuko spat back. "I can do it on my own.”

“What makes you think people will want to give up conceptualizing the Fire Nation as the most powerful nation? The best race? And the country with the best military?”

“The military will never be what it had been. That’s over.” He waved his hand in the air, letting that idea go. 

“I’m sure The Avatar made you release entire regiments after he took control.” 

“I agreed to do it. We don’t need them. We’re not in a world war anymore. And he didn’t take control. We took control.”

Ozai shook his head at him. “How on Earth could the people here feel interested in the arts and building their businesses when they don’t even feel confident they’ll remain safe in the years ahead? That they’ll even be alive, with food in their pantry? I’m sure your economy is crashing for that very reason. Who wants to invest when they think you’ll be dead in a couple years at most, probably at the hand of your own citizens, and the entire country will be in upheaval... and will fracture into pieces? ” He emphasized slowly.

“That’s why you’re doing so well in here, isn’t it?” Zuko thought aloud. “You think everything’s about to fall apart, and you’ll get out? That’s why you keep on?”

He made an annoyed face at his son. “As opposed to what? Committing suicide? How?” He looked around his empty cell. “Shall I just bang my head against the wall until I crack my own skull open? They don’t even give me chopsticks in here...” he muttered.

“You think I’ll fail and the country will fall apart. And then someone will come in here and let you out.”

“I don’t know what will happen. This is all a strange dream for me. But it could be a possibility, yes. You’re obviously struggling quite terribly if you would come to me of all people. This must be embarrassing for you. And yet you come. Based on what you tell me, and what I can surmise on my own, I understand why. You have a complete philosophical separation from the people of this country. How do you think that could possibly go on for so long without them overthrowing you? Especially given your peculiar attitude about this ‘New Fire Nation’ that you envisage. This is a catastrophe waiting to happen. Your thinking is fundamentally different, down to the very core beliefs.”

“What do you think they think? Normal people here?”

“About your plan? ” He mocked the word ‘plan’ with his patronizing tone.

“Yes.”

Ozai’s sharp eyes held him in place. “That they don’t want to listen to the ramblings of a teenage ideologue. That you’re a moron. That you’re spinning childish fantasies,” he spat out quickly. “That they need their strong military and government back in place to protect them. And that they don’t want to work with boorish, brainless, backwater idiots from the swamps or the igloos of the tundra who still prefer to hunt with animal bones instead of actual weapons. That we are truly the superior race,” he placed a hand on his chest, “with a society hundreds of years more advanced, both technologically and socio-culturally. That we’re on another level, that we accomplished that ourselves, and we shouldn’t bow to those savages. Or even the educated foreigners in Ba Sing Se, our old oppressors, because they’re equally foolish and submit to a puppet king in an elaborate masquerade show, playing pretend that he knows what he’s doing and obsessing over him and his wives as if they’re actual royalty. They know what a real leader is,” he said through an exhale, "because they saw that in me, and in my father, and Sozin. Our people aren't going to play pretend that that spineless man-child Kuei, or even the Council of Five, are on the same level as us.”

Zuko lingered by the door, scowl firmly in place as he listened to his father’s racist rant. “Ba Sing Se is literally the biggest city in the world. Far bigger than any of ours. It’s gigantic. It doesn’t run itself.”

“Ba Sing Se itself is an impressive city, yes,” he conceded, “but the Earth Kingdom on the whole is agrarian. Urbanizing, sure, but agrarian. Almost everyone there are farmers, servants, or uneducated laborers of some kind. It’s not like the Fire Nation. We’re advanced. We educate our middle class. We have a true middle class, for one thing. We have a flourishing economic life and the arts and theaters and culture, these elements of our society that you’re so proud of. We’re not stuck in the rice paddies all our lives. We’re not out in fishing boats for weeks at a time, or out on the ice, barely able to find enough food to feed our families. We’ve moved past that. We’ve evolved. Almost all of our people have, except for the poorest five percent, a very small fraction. Although surely larger now that you're in charge."

His son nearly growled at that implication.

"Most people here have a standard of living that is so far beyond what anyone in any other country or throughout all of time has experienced. We’re so far past that kind of primitive existence that it’s laughable that you expect the people here to snap to your way of thinking in a heartbeat. Do you honestly think they want to consider themselves on the same level as simple hunter-gatherers, who can’t even build proper infrastructure, or aqueducts, or educate themselves? Most waterbenders don’t even use money with one another. They’re still on a trading system— a bartering system. We have investment bankers and lawyers and professors of economics... They have the man who steers the boat and the man who tries to stab the whale with a pointed stick.”

“They’re not stupid. Not at all. They just have a different way of life than us. And I’m sure a huge part of the reason for why they don’t have as sophisticated a country as ours is because the war has reduced their population down to almost nothing now. The Northern Water Tribe isn’t like that.”

Ozai laughed snidely. “Yes, it is. And that’s how the Southern Water Tribe was before. The beauty of the Northern Tribe's ice-city is just an illusion of success and progress. They have arranged marriages and an oral tradition, with almost no interest in technology or education. They focus on spirituality and waterbending and hunting rituals. Oh, and tug-of-war, that’s fun," he mocked sarcastically, "But that’s about it. They don’t know what’s going on in the world. They just focus on continuing on the same traditions. Time after time, generating after generation. Hunting in the same way, getting married the same way, and doing the same things. No forward progression. No advancement.”

He glared at his father. “Why automatically assume their way of life is worse than ours?”

“Why is their way of life worse than ours?” Ozai echoed back. “That’s what you want? You want to go backwards? Sure, why not?” He played pretend. “We’ll go back to the old ways. Get out the fishing boats and spears. Burn the books for kindling— who cares? Let’s just sing songs and dance around the fire together. Who needs medicine, and math, and dining tables, and government programs? Let’s all just get along, like one big, happy family,” he ridiculed. “Do you want that life? The Northern Tribe doesn’t even allow their women to fight or read. Or to leave their house when they’re menstruating. Good luck getting your girlfriend to follow those rules. Aren’t you supposed to be a progressive?” He raised a brow at him. “What’s progressive about that way of life?”

When Zuko said nothing for a moment, thinking, Ozai sighed at him.

“Why is their way of life worse than ours? Because we have more,” he answered himself, “and we can do more. These other cultures, they’re still almost entirely consumed with gathering enough food to feed their people. That takes the vast majority of their resources and time. They're simple. Very simple. Only in a select few areas have people moved beyond that, and been able to focus on more things than how to get dinner on the table. Or— on an animal skin on the ground, if you're water-tribe,” he muttered in condescension. “Our people have many privileges. We can reach levels we never could before. And you want to take us back to the dark ages? Is that what you’re saying?”

Zuko nearly growled in frustration.

“No. And you know that’s not what I’m saying. I’m still thinking about what I want the Fire Nation to be like. And I didn’t say I want to make the Fire Nation to be like the Northern Water Tribe. Or the Southern Tribe. I asked ‘why is their way of life worse than ours,’ which is different. And you're wrong, by the way. They're advanced, just in different ways. Ways you don't understand, or refuse to understand. Their boats, their technology— it's useful, too. Just not in ways you're used to. We're not better than them.”

“We have a better standard of living, a longer life expectancy, a better education system, better material output, better weaponry, better technology, and a much more prosperous and populous society. We have hospitals. Universities. We exceed fifty million. They barely cracked five-hundred-thousand at their prime, because the way of their society has limitations due to their ridiculous obsession with ritualistic tradition and cultural seasonality. That should be obvious, if you paid any attention in school, which you rarely did.”

“I’m done talking to you. Your advice, like usual, is just you criticizing me and being condescending instead of helping me.”

Ozai laced his fingers in his lap. “I’m trying to teach you. That is helping you. You rarely listen to me with open ears."

“It’s not helpful. Goodnight,” he opened the door to leave.

“I will say one thing before you leave. These fifty-nine million people, your citizens, now, Firelord Zuko— they will starve in agony and tear each other apart if you don’t get this country under control, in razor sharp time. Weeks. Maybe days. An impending collapse is nearing with each passing moment, which you will be unable to recover from if you allow it to occur. Once people are truly starving throughout the nation, and it spreads into the middle class, all notions of organized government essentially fall by the wayside, and people resort to whatever methods necessary to feed themselves and their family. They will start killing each other. They will tear down the government. They will kill you. And the Fire Nation, this glorious country of ours, will fracture completely. As a result, the global economy will fall apart. Chaos will spread. Thousands will die. And it will all be thanks to you…”

Zuko looked back at him over his shoulder, gold eyes clashing with gold.

"But, yes— goodnight, son."

Holding in a breath, he stepped out and shut the door behind him.

On the entire walk back to the palace, he felt himself filling up with dread. The emotion began to consume him, his father’s haunting words sinking into his very soul.

It will all be thanks to you…

A/N:

• The opening quote/dialogue is from the final fight to the death between father and son, Haytham Kenway and Ratonhnhaké:ton, in Assassin’s Creed III, set during the American Revolution (quote begins at 2:40 — https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iLAQLRB76Y8). BTW, not saying this relationship or situation is exactly like the one here, because it's not, but the core contention is. And, interestingly, the son's name, Ratonhnhaké:ton, means "he who struggles," which reminds me of another idealistic young man.
• I didn’t explicitly write this in the chapter, but I hope it was obvious that the pregnancy Ursa had in the flashback ended in a stillbirth. This can happen due to a virus, smoking/alcohol intake during pregnancy, the baby choking on its own umbilical cord, and other reasons. If you read biographies it’s pretty shocking how many women suffer with this, sometimes many times throughout their life.
• On Japanese New Year's traditions and tea: “Cleansing with Fire: Spiritual Bonfires during Japanese New Year‬‬‬‬‬‬” https://livejapan.com/en/in-tokyo/in-pref-tokyo/in-tokyo_train_station/article-a0000867/ + On Tea https://gjtea.org/obukucha/ 
• Chinese New Year’s red envelopes: https://www.allcolourenvelopes.co.uk/blogs/news/the-role-envelopes-play-in-chinese-new-year-celebrations#:~:text=Red%20envelopes%20are%20not%20just,as%20a%20gesture%20of%20goodwill. 

Chapter Text

"And then he realized everything he already had was not right either, and that was why it had happened at all,

and that his life with his family was some temporary bandage on a permanent wound."

—Mad Men (2012), "The Phantom"

Fire Nation, Capital City Prison

'It will all be thanks to you…'

The last Firelord, Zuko thought to himself.

He was so distracted and disturbed that he was barely paying attention to where he was walking, tripping a bit on a rock on the road. He righted himself quickly, starting to walk forward again, and tried to think as logically as he could about the situation ahead of him. Looking up, he felt both comforted and intimidated by the sight of the Caldera City ahead of him, with its dramatic, sloping walls and its lights, beckoning him closer. It was home and it was terrifying, all the same.

With his mind buzzing and his heart racing, the urge to talk to his Uncle Iroh was strong. He could barely wait to arrive at the Earth Kingdom to speak with him and then get the peace-time trade deal underway. His people needed a food delivery. They needed rice. Wheat. Tofu. And the written guarantee that more would be coming.

In the midst of his father's racist, profane rant, one thing had certainly been true: the fate of the country stood on a knife’s edge, and starving people en masse certainly would resist the government eventually. Especially when it got to the point that the guards themselves were hungry. Then they would no longer carry out his orders, he knew that much.

Although he had been trying hard for months not to let the weight of his responsibilities crush him, the pressure of the Firelord’s golden headpiece in his topknot finally got to him, and tears began to well up in his eyes as his heart started beating out of control. It was too much. Far too much. He was in an impossible position.

Eventually, after dread had filled his entire person, in every inch of him, and he had walked what felt like ten miles, he reached the double doors of his private bedroom. When he opened them and looked inside he found Mai sitting in the near-darkness, staring right at him.

It certainly didn't help his anxiety. She was strangely seated on top of the chabudai table, arms and legs crossed in front of her in anger, her narrow amber eyes practically glaring.

Zuko sucked in a sudden breath. "Mai. Hey." He let the breath out, trying to calm down. He had thought for a second that she was a stranger. "Didn’t think you’d still be up."

"Where were you? " 

With slightly trembling hands, Zuko closed the doors behind him and locked them. "Out."

Not about to let it go, Mai got up and walked forward to face him. "Out— where? "

Zuko lit the wall sconce near them, deciding just to tell her. He was too worried about the country to care about having a fight with his girlfriend.

"Talking to my father."

Mai made a noise of disappointment. "I thought so. Agni, Zuko."

"I’m sorry. But I can’t stand a whole lecture right now. I feel like I’m gonna throw up. Yell at me about it tomorrow."

He made his way into their walk-in closet to change out of his regalia, trying not to focus on the nervousness gnawing at his stomach.

Mai watched him take the golden headpiece out of his bun, let down his hair, and then lift the shoulder-piece, pulling it up over his head in the relative darkness and setting it on its stand on the dressing table.

"I wasn’t going to yell at you. I'm worried about you," she tried to explain. "And I didn't want you to lie."

"I just— I don’t even know what to do anymore."

She leaned against the doorway of the closet. "Clearly, if you’re going to him." 

Zuko pulled off his robes and threw them into the laundry bin. "You should be in bed. It’s late."

"You don’t tell me what to do."

"Fine." He quickly changed out of his under-clothes and into pajamas. "Do whatever you want."

"I was going to stay up to talk to you— because we need to talk, and then you didn’t come to bed, and I couldn't find you in the palace. You never told me where you went. Yet, somehow I had this sneaking suspicion you were with Ozai. I just felt it."

“Maybe the spirits are blessing you, too, Mai," he mocked, sounding a little too much like his father for a moment. "Maybe you have the third eye."

When he caught her expression she was glaring daggers.

"No. I just know you too well. Both of you. Do you know how it looks, Zuko? Do you know what people would say if they found out?"

"That I was going to do a security check at a prison? That I’m doing my job."

Mai closed her eyes in exhaustion. "The guard who unlocks that cell door knows you’re not doing a security check."

He ran a comb through his shoulder-length hair in front of their large mirror. Mai scowled when she realized his hands were slightly trembling.

"I actually do security checks at the prison. And the guards in his unit are paid off to be quiet. But please— please don’t yell at me or get after me tonight." He dropped the comb on the dresser and put up his hands, a signal that he didn't want to fight. "Do it tomorrow. I need a drink," he let out through a very labored exhale.

A concerned expression lingered on Mai's face at that while he went to their living area.

"Sit down. You’re exhausted. I’ll get you one."

Agreeing in silence, Zuko sat at the chabudai's zabuton cushion, nearly collapsing into the corner and resting his head against the wall. Mai handed him a shot of sake.

"Thanks." He tipped it back and finished it in one swift movement, setting the small cup down on the lacquer table beside him.

Mai moved to sit beside him. "What’s wrong with you tonight? You need a drink? That doesn’t sound good. That doesn’t sound like you…" 

He was staring at nothing in particular, a small furrow in his brow and his eyes so distant they were unreachable.

"Bring the bottle," he said, barely more than a whisper.

"You should drink some water. That would be better," she muttered to herself, because Zuko was clearly not in a good condition to take care of himself.

She fixed him a cup of water while he glared at a random spot on the wall. Sighing in concern, she placed it into his hand directly. Zuko idly took a sip, still saying nothing. Then he looked down at the water in the cup, tossed it onto the potted plant beside him, refilled it with a shot of sake himself and took it down without flinching. 

Mai pushed the bottle away and sat up on top of the chabudai table so she could look directly at him, because he wouldn't turn to her. As soon as she saw his whole face clearly she realized she knew that expression. It was one she had seen on him and many times on Azula. She let out a knowing exhale.

"What did he say to you?" She whispered. "He got in your head, didn’t he?"

Zuko visibly cringed, grimacing a little before he willed his expression to calm.

"I've been trying not to think about this, because I don't like to, but I need to be honest. It's time to be honest..." He forced himself to find the courage to meet her sharp gaze. "This country is on the verge of falling apart completely. What I’ve been able to do these last six months: buy a little food off some northern Earth Kingdom citadels, trade with middle merchants, increase the fishing here or there, barter with Hakoda— it’s just a drop in the bucket. It’s all just a bandage solution. We need to trade with the Earth King. Omashu. Ba Sing Se. This petty shit isn’t going to last even another month. We're about to run out of reserves. Storehouses are nearly empty. People on the outskirts are already getting hungry. Poor people, way out there— they’re eating fox-cats and ferrets. Eating their own horses. Making flower salads from stuff they find in the fields. I heard about it. If we don’t get a big grain import, and soon… people are really going to start starving to death. Under my leadership," he looked down at his hands for some reason unknown to him.

“My own people— they’ll kill me, Mai,” he looked over at his girlfriend, meeting her pained eyes. “They’ll execute me. Someone else will take over… Veras or Akihiko or Zendari. And, if they get the country, they’ll plunge everyone back into another world war; I know they will. They think the only way we can survive is with the colonies. With Earth Kingdom tribute. They’ll just start everything back up again, take the world back into darkness. That, or… or everything here will collapse. The citizens will revolt all over the place and we’ll have civil war. And it’ll be a gigantic mess, and things will get bloody too fast, and everything will fall apart. We won’t be a united nation anymore. So many people will die.”

“Or,” she put a hand on his shoulder, “everything will work out because we’ll get a trade deal with Kuei and bring a fuck-ton of grain back here. And everyone will have food. Enough not to starve. And we can work on doing more local production here. And more trade with Hakoda. And come up with solutions. Ozai’s trying to get into your mind, Zuko. Don’t listen. He wants you to be miserable. Do you understand that?” She stroked his non-scarred cheek with affection. 

Zuko said nothing, lost in his own agony.

“He wants you to think the world is ending. Or, the country is falling apart. And that it's your fault. It’s all the pleasure he can get from his prison cell— knowing he’s making you suffer and think these terrible things— he gets a sick pleasure out of it. I know that now. We can find a way out of this. You did what Kuei asked. He and Bumi should trade with you now. I know I’m not normally an optimist, but even I feel like things are going to start getting better soon.”

“Hopefully. Otherwise… Otherwise, I think I’ll be put to death. They won’t put up with me if I can’t feed them.”

“You’ll figure something out. We'll figure something out. I’ll help you. The Avatar will help you. And Hakoda, and Katara, and Sokka, and Suki, and other people. You’re not alone. We’ve got your back.” She squeezed his shoulder. “Not him.” 

Despite all the pain inside him, Zuko was thankful for Mai, at least. He angled his head up and gave her a tender kiss on the lips.

“Thank you... You're always on my side, Mai. Even if you're mad at me... I love you.”

“I love you, too,” she responded easily, cherishing the emotion she could see in his eyes at that moment.

He reached up and took her hands in his, resting them on her lap.

“If we get through this…” He paused, finding it hard to breathe. “If we get through this time and we make it out alive again somehow, do you want to marry me? When things cool down?”

She couldn't help but give him a shocked expression.

Mai had expected a public proposal, one with flowers or an engagement necklace or something along those lines. Not a few shots of sake in their dark bedroom at midnight after talking about being executed by their own people. But she supposed that was the nature of their relationship. And their situation. She looked down at their joined hands and then up into his gold eyes. 

He was in deep pain, clearly, but he also was grateful that she was by his side, she knew that much. Even if they were fighting.

“Of course, I will. Absolutely.”

Zuko tried to smile despite everything else.

“Good. I can’t even think about getting married yet, because everything’s so messed up, but— if things do work out, and we get the trade deal and all that, we could start planning the wedding.”

“Okay," she agreed tentatively, finding it all hard to process, "yeah. That would be great.”

Zuko reached out and pulled her down from the table onto his lap. She accepted, resting on him, draping her long legs out on the zabuton cushions and wrapping her arms around his shoulders. He moved his hands down to rest on her slim waist.

“I’ll get you an engagement necklace and all that. I'd like you to give me an idea of what kind you would want— at least a color. We can do a proper proposal if you want. I just wanted to ask you first—”

“Yeah, yeah.” She placed a hand on his chest, cuddling up against him. “We don’t have to do a public proposal. We can just tell people. That’s not really the atmosphere, anyway.”

Zuko blinked slowly, the heaviness of fatigue finally weighing on him. “We can wait for a happier time for the wedding."

She nodded, idly thinking about how the only person on her side of the wedding would probably be Ty Lee. She wondered if they should really even have sides, because hers would be laughable.

“Sure."

He rested his head back on the wall. “What were you going to talk to me about before? You said you needed to talk to me about something?”

“Oh…” she drifted, thinking back. It felt insignificant in comparison to what Zuko had brought home.

“You seemed pissed.”

“Yeah. I guess I was.”

He stroked her silky black hair. “About what?”

“Your new advisor,” she answered quietly.

He made an expression that said he knew she was going to say that. “You don’t like her. I picked up on that. It was pretty obvious.”

“It’s not that. I mean, I don't really like her, but that's not it."

“What, then?"

“It’s just—” she stopped herself, peeved. “You hired a twenty-three year old female opera singer to be your head advisor. That wasn’t the best of your impulsive decisions, honey. Do you even know who she is?”

He had closed his eyes and was relaxing his head back against the wall. “Some sort of prodigy, right? Graduated early. Got into Akihara pretty young.”

“She was a child prodigy in the opera, yes, but that’s not what I was referring to. Do you know that she’s a homewrecker?”

Zuko lifted his head and made a confused expression at that word. It wasn't one he was used to hearing.

“A homewrecker?”

“Yeah. Did you know that?"

He turned away. "...She mentioned something during the interview."

"She broke up Veras and Aiya’s marriage.”

That comment made him want to roll his eyes. “I’m pretty sure that Veras had a part in that as well."

“Of course he did," Mai shot back, annoyed, "but that doesn’t change the fact that she’s— a whore. I don’t know how else to put it. She slept with a married man, it’s a terrible thing. Their kids were so hurt. It broke up their family. Their younger girl was in my class in school. She was so devastated by it; she had to have two different graduation parties because her parents couldn't even be in the same room.”

“Veras broke up their family by having an affair with a teenage girl when he was forty. He’s the one who was messed up. Not that she should have done that, but still— Veras is…” he scowled at memories of the strange man, “fucked up. I’m sure he convinced her. She didn’t have a dad in her life. She was young. I bet he took advantage of that. Amara seems nice,” he tried to stick up for her. “She doesn’t seem like a homewrecker type. Besides, she said she’s changed. I’ve changed. Shouldn’t I give her the benefit of the doubt?”

“I don’t trust her. I don’t buy this spiritual awakening stuff, either.”

“What about the fact that Aang had the same vision that she did?”

Mai narrowed her eyes. “How do we really know she had that vision?”

“What?”

“Aang said everything," Mai argued. "He described this dream he had. Amara just said she had the same vision. She just confirmed what he was saying. She could have just been going along with it. To make us think she’s blessed by the spirits. Why would the spirits bless her? Aang’s The Avatar," she emphasized. "She’s just some pretty, tǔháo homewrecker.”

“Mai, can you please lay off her?” He sighed, closing his eyes, finally getting tired. “She was sixteen. It was a long time ago. And you don’t know she didn’t have that vision. I don’t know if she’s really—” he stopped himself from saying the word Seer to Mai, because he knew she would think he was crazy, “blessed by the Spirit of Light, or whatever. If she is, it’ll be obvious. We’ll see what happens.”

“I don’t want to see what happens. I don’t think you ever should have hired her. I wished you would have asked me,” she muttered. “I would have told you not to. She’s not old enough, she’s not actually qualified, and she has a bad reputation around town— it—” She closed her lips, stopping herself.

“What?”

Mai decided to say what had been bothering her all day, “It looks like you hired her because she’s hot. That’s seriously what it looks like.”

Zuko laughed harshly, the sound loud in their otherwise quiet bedroom.

She scowled at him. “You laugh, but it kind of makes you look ridiculous. Like something a teenage Firelord would do. Not a mature one. A mature Firelord would have picked some super-qualified old man with years of experience in government. Not a National Theater actress.”

“I look ridiculous? Thanks,” he replied sarcastically, rubbing his tired face. “Everybody just loves me, don’t they?” He sighed in self-deprecating humor. “I’m doing great.”

Mai felt bad for being so hard on him for a moment, resting her hand gently on his chest. “You are doing great, otherwise. But this was not a good decision. She's not qualified."

"She has two political degrees from Akihara, a few different highly-competitive internships under her belt, and she was a Chief of Staff."

"I don’t trust her judgement. I knew girls in grades above me who knew her— who went to school with her. She may be different now, but she was a party girl— getting drunk, going to fancy bars, sleeping with a married billionaire— living that whole tǔháo lifestyle. Why should someone like that be a head advisor?”

“I’m not exactly a monk," Zuko retorted. "We just had sex last night, and here I am, getting drunk." He reached for the bottle on the other side of the table.

Mai grabbed his wrist, stopping him. “Don’t.”

He let out an exhale, dropping his hand. “Do you want me to just fire her? I don’t even care. I'm tired."

“I think you do care… I think you think she’s hot,” she muttered.

Zuko's face contorted in annoyance. “Of course, she’s hot. That’s just a fact. So what? I love you.” He looked at her, trying to show her he meant it with his eyes. “And you're hot, too. Don't worry about her. I’ll just fire her. Do you want me to fire her?”

Mai considered it for a moment. “Probably. But you don’t really have anything to fire her over.”

“I can just say I changed my mind. It’s not her fault, but I want someone with lots of experience— nothing personal. I won’t bring up the homewrecker stuff— just use her age as an excuse.”

“Maybe… I’ll think about it. But if you do fire her, then that vision won’t come true."

“Fuck the vision. What sense does that make, anyway? What was that? I’m just getting torn to shreds today," he covered his face with his hands, "First Aang tells me the Earth King’s going crazy, or something—” 

That made her scowl. “What?”

“—and then Aang and Amara tell me they’re touched by the spirits and they have this vision that I’m gonna be fighting the Earth King in the desert or something like that? Who knows? They won’t tell me. She’s literally my advisor— supposed to advise me on stuff!” He complained, aggravated. “And Aang’s my spiritual advisor, but they don’t want to tell me, in case I kill the Earth King or something. Or start a war. Or kill myself. But why should I even kill myself, because my citizens are gonna do it for me? I can’t take this,” he collapsed, dropping his head into his hands, leaning forward on the table. 

Mai reached out a hand and stroked his back affectionately. 

“You don’t need to worry about firing her right now. I’ll help you figure out something. If I’m gonna be Firelady, I’ll have to help you make decisions like this..." She smoothed down his silky hair. "We’ll probably fire her, but let’s think it through. It’s really late. You need rest."

Zuko felt like he was barely able to keep himself from crying, but he really didn’t want to cry in front of her. He pinched the bridge of his nose.

“Come on.” She stood and then helped him up. “Just brush your teeth and come to bed. Please.”

“Okay.”

That night, despite how exhausted he was, the unbelievably comfortable silky bed beneath him, and Mai’s warm body right beside him, Zuko couldn’t sleep for hours.

A mile away, Ozai couldn’t sleep, either. He laid on his bare mattress, looking up at the dark ceiling and the fractured moonlight coming in between the bars of his cell’s tiny window, and tried to fade back into his memories once again.

For a moment, he thought about the child that he wished would visit him, but never did. Never could. The one who had really made him proud.

He thought about her beautiful blue firebending, her forms both graceful and powerful. Her quick wit and her lightning-fast reflexes. She was incredible, his daughter. 

Before she lost her mind…

Ozai usually tried not to think about that part. Zuko had told him what he had already been fearing: she had a mental breakdown at the end of the war. A bad one, ending in screaming and crying like a toddler throwing a tantrum. Dismissing her servants. Her mentors. Everyone. Paranoid and panicked, she had fallen apart on her very first day. It was all a sad joke.

Idly, Ozai realized it was all his fault, deep down. It was a miscalculation on his part. She was far, far too young to be Firelord. He had encouraged her acting like she was thirty at age fifteen, but she wasn’t really that mature. It was all an act. And he never should have given her the position after she started acting unstable around the end of the war. But it was too late. He had made the mistake. Put too much pressure on her too quickly. And she was in an asylum. His darling girl. 

It made him scowl. 

He didn’t like to think about that. He tried not to. Instead, he tried to retreat back into his memories. To a time when Azula was herself, and not insane. Just a small child, extremely bright and competitive and everything he had ever wanted. Back then, she had been concerned with school and petty family matters, not world domination.

“What will you wish for at the temple today, Azula?” Ursa asked her small daughter.

“I’m gonna wish for the new baby to be a girl!” She exclaimed, smiling. “I want a sister.”

“The baby’s going to be whatever it’s going to be,” Ursa chided, rubbing her belly, “so don’t worry about whether it’s a boy or a girl. You should think of a different wish.”

“Daddy, do you want another girl?” Azula asked, tilting her head to the side cutely.

Even as he looked at his adorable, favorite child, Ozai couldn’t bring himself to smile. He placed his father’s extremely curt letter on the table.

“Not necessarily. It doesn’t matter to me what the sex of the baby is, as long as the child can bend.”

“But even if the child isn’t a bender, we’ll still love him or her very much,” Ursa insisted, looking at her husband expectantly. 

He caught her gaze, but didn’t falter, saying nothing. His mind was on other matters.

“I’m not a bender and you love me, right?” Ursa tilted her head just like Azula had, instinctually, and it made Ozai’s heart warm just a tiny bit, seeing that.

His gaze flickered down from her doe eyes to her hand resting on her newly pregnant belly, the baby only a few months along. Her bright red ao dài dress, made for the auspicious day, was decorated with gold and white beadwork imitating flower blossoms that trailed down from her shoulder and curved around her stomach, accentuating the gentle baby-bump there. 

“Of course.”

Ursa leaned in to give him a gentle kiss on the lips and Azula groaned out loud.

She cringed. “Ew, mom.”

The couple ignored her and Ozai took a sip of his matcha, staring down at the frothy green liquid for a moment. The zither player in the corner plucked the strings deftly, quickly, creating a lovely melody. Under the table, Ursa took his hand in hers, rubbing his thumb with loving tenderness. 

It all did little to soothe him. 

A gentle touch from Ursa or a smile from one of his children wasn’t enough to placate him anymore. His soul was hurting just as much as it had been when he was single. The family ate their wagashi for a minute until Ozai’s manservant entered, and they all turned to look at him.

“You may approach.”

He neared the table, kneeled, and bowed his head. “Please pardon my interruption, Prince Ozai. Crown Prince Iroh is here to see you. May I let him in?”

“Yes, of course. Just him?”

“Just him and his manservant, Prince Ozai.”

A few moments later the guard opened the door to the hallway and Iroh walked into the room with a wide smile, followed by his personal attendant. The family stood, bowing, and Zuko came to him immediately, practically running into his arms. Iroh knelt down and gave him a warm hug as Azula, Ozai, and Ursa walked towards him.

“Hello, my nephew!” He lifted him up into the air affectionately. “Happy New Year!"

“Happy New Year, uncle!”

He giggled as Iroh set him down and ticked him a little. The scene made Ursa smile widely and Ozai wrapped an arm around her slim waist, pulling her in close.

“Happy New Year, brother,” Iroh greeted Ozai once he stood up straight. “And dearest Princess Ursa, Happy New Year to you— and the little one,” he teased, glancing down at Azula’s small form.

“Happy New Year,” they replied. 

Ursa stepped forward to hug him, escaping her husband’s embrace. 

“How are you?” She asked.

“Good, good.” He hugged her back, closing his eyes. “And yourself?”

“Wonderful. We had a nice time last night. And how about Lu Ten and his girlfriend? Did they enjoy the fireworks?”

“Yes, of course. Father even lit off a few himself! That was fun to watch.” He chuckled in his good-natured way.  

Ursa smiled politely, but she didn’t laugh. “So, everyone had a good time?”

“How could they not have? The music, the lights, the food! It’s the best time of the year. Isn't that right, Azula? I see you, little one,” he teased, in his raspy voice. She was hiding behind her father, partially in his robes, holding onto his much larger hand. “Come out and give your old uncle a hug, won’t you?”

Azula looked up at her father with a look that meant, ‘Do I have to?’ But Ozai’s face remained impassive, a silent confirmation. She went up to Iroh and let him hug her briefly while she cringed at his strange old man smell. 

“Good to see you, my niece,” he put a hand on her shoulder after she stopped the hug, holding her in place, “and Zuko,” he reached for his nephew, placing a hand on his shoulder as well. “Guess what? I have gifts for you both.”

From his inner sleeve, he produced two red envelopes with their names, wrapped in golden string. 

“Thank you, uncle!” Zuko took the money envelope with glee. 

Azula didn’t smile, but she took hers as well. “Thanks, uncle.”

He turned back to his manservant and held out his hands. The servant handed him a beautifully wrapped white and red gift box bearing his greeting card attached with some gold string. Iroh looked over at his brother and sister-in-law.

“This is for you two. I brought it back from the Earth Kingdom. It’s a bottle of choujiu— much like our own nigori, but this type is a little sweeter. And stronger.” He winked at them. “Fun in a bottle.”

Ozai bowed his head and refused the gift, as was custom. “Thank you, but we must refuse. It’s too gracious of you.”

“Please, take it.” He held it out again.

“No, thank you.”

“Take it. Take it. I insist.” He handed it to Ozai, who accepted it with both hands. 

He bowed again. “Thank you.” 

“Thank you very much,” Ursa repeated and bowed her head, too. “Can you bring another cushion for Prince Iroh, please?” She asked one of their servants. “And take the gift to the inner parlor.”

“Are you staying?” Ozai asked. 

Iroh nodded. “Yes! And I thought we could take Lu Ten and your kids and go to the shrine all together later. He’s taking a nap, but I’ll get him up soon.”

Ursa’s eyes perked up at that. “What a nice idea.”

“Thank you for the invitation,” Ozai replied, still too formally. “We’d be honored to go with you and your son.”

Iroh looked down at the children again. “Sounds like a plan, huh, kids? Maybe if you’re good, on the way back, I’ll get you some daifuku. You like the strawberry one, right, Azula?” 

“Oh, they’ve had enough sweets today already.” Ursa took the children’s gift money and handed it to a servant along with the rest. "Please put them all in our bedroom."

“Uncle Iroh, can I show you what we put up in the foyer? Mom taught me all about kadomatsu. She said it’s for the spirits! And we made the mochi and dai dai ornament and we put it in the living room—”

“The kagamimochi,” Ursa explained, laughing at Zuko’s obvious joy. He was practically bouncing with energy and excitement. “I told him a little about the spirit Inari and now he wants to know more. But, you’re the expert, of course.”

Crown Prince Iroh kneeled down to be eye-to-eye with his nephew. “What do you want to know?”

“Is Inari a male or a female spirit?” Zuko asked.

“It doesn’t really matter. Spirits are all a bit androgynous; they’re not like people. They can be male or female. Or neither.”

“Oh," he scowled in confusion, "okay. We made the fire altar outside. Come and look,” he took his uncle’s hand, pulling him along, and Iroh laughed in his raspy voice, following him out.  

“Alright, I’ll come and see… Inari is a very powerful spirit, you know. We will leave some rice out for him. He’s a god of prosperity, and also the patron spirit of swordsmiths, so you can ask Master Piandao about him sometime.” 

When Iroh, Ursa, and Zuko had left the room, little Azula looked up at her father. He was staring absently at the lantern-decorated archway they had walked through. He entered the hallway but paused, lingering. Azula approached him again and stood by his side, resting her small head on his hip. Ozai placed a hand on her head and stroked her silky hair, which her mother had insisted that she wear down for the occasion. 

She could tell, despite her young age, and despite the lack of commentary from her father, exactly what was bothering him.

“Why didn’t we get invited to the New Year’s Eve dinner last night? Why didn’t we get to watch the fireworks at the palace with grandfather and Crown Prince Iroh?”

“Because we’re not welcome there, Azula,” he answered quietly. “We’re not welcome at the palace. We were not invited.”

“Why not?”

“Your grandfather insists that the Royal Palace is for members of the immediate Royal Family only. Iroh is his heir. And then Iroh will be Firelord, and he will no doubt name Lu Ten as his successor. After that, Lu Ten’s children, once he has them. We’re secondary members of the Royal Family. We’re not in the direct bloodline, not really— and thus, not welcome. Don't talk to others about that."

Azula looked up at him with concern. “It’s not fair. The Fire Lord should invite us, too. You’re his son.”

“Fairness isn’t a concern,” he replied sharply, frightening her a little. “There are rules. Hierarchies. Order. Don’t concern yourself with what’s fair. That doesn’t matter. Things simply are the way that they are. It’s the Firelord’s decision not to invite us, so we must abide by it. His word is law. Crown Prince Iroh is gracing us with his presence. He doesn’t have to come here to see us.”

She made a face. “Grandfather never does.”

“Never speak ill of the Firelord,” Ozai whispered harshly, looking down at her. “You know that’s not allowed. Respect your elders.”

She looked down at her shoes. “Yes, dad. I’m sorry.”

“It's okay. Just don't do it again. That's inappropriate. Come,” he took Azula’s small hand in his and led her out of the room. “Your mother will think it’s strange if we don’t join them.” 

While Ursa showed her children how to write their wishes on sheets of paper and cast them into the fire altar, Iroh took a cup of tea from a servant and stood beside his much taller brother. 

“And, how are you this New Year, Ozai?” He asked slowly.

“Fine. Just fine,” he lied easily, making himself smile gently, something he had done ten thousand times before. “And yourself?”

“I'm well.” 

Iroh took a sip of tea and looked up at his illustrious younger brother, considering him. Despite the happy occasion, his perfect children, the splendor he lived in, and his gorgeous, charming, newly pregnant wife, his aura was off.

Very off.

It was barely perceptible, because Ozai was trying to hide it, but Iroh could read auras, and Ozai’s was dark. Like a sky, gray-blue and heavy with rain, before a thunderstorm erupts. The heaviness in the air before a lightning strike. His expressionless and supremely handsome face only faintly showed any sign of discontentment. It was something in his eyes, Iroh thought, but he didn’t understand it entirely. Ozai usually left him in the dark. Kept him at a distance. 

“So, are you excited about the new baby?” 

“Of course,” he replied quickly, “children are a blessing unto us all.”

“Absolutely.” Iroh watched Zuko smile as his wish-note rose up in the air, thinking of his own son. “I can’t wait to have grandchildren, myself.”

A moment passed while they watched Ursa and the children play.

“I’ve heard whispers that you’re planning a siege of Ba Sing Se.”

Iroh turned to him, eyes widening. “They’re really not supposed to be talking about that yet. Who told you? Qin?” He kept his voice quiet.

“It doesn’t matter, does it? People are starting to hear the rumors.”

“Well, yes, it’s true... But I’m sure you understand why I wish people wouldn’t talk about it yet. We wish to catch the enemy off-guard.”

“I’m pretty sure they’re always on guard, Prince Iroh,” he teased dryly, drinking his tea. “It’s called the ‘impenetrable city’ for a reason.”

“Just because no one has ever broken through the walls of Ba Sing Se doesn’t mean it’s impossible. Everything that hasn’t been done yet is thought to be impossible. Lightning-bending was once thought to be impossible, and now we can both do that,” he chuckled, bumping his brother’s arm. “Besides, I told you. I had a vision.”

“I know, I know," he sighed knowingly. "You will be at the gates of the palace.”

“And then I will conquer Ba Sing Se. I can feel it. I can feel it in my bones.”

“I’m sure you will. I don’t doubt your abilities, brother.”

“Changing the subject,” he held out his teacup while a servant came over to refill it, “I have some other news.”

Ozai feigned polite interest. “Oh, really? Pray tell.”

“My Lu Ten is going to get married soon. He proposed last night. With the fireworks above and everything.” 

He turned to look at his much older brother, with his graying hair and his wide, aging face. His wrinkled amber eyes were sparkling with joy.

“That’s great news,” he replied, making himself smile again. “Congratulations, Prince Iroh.”

“Indeed, it is. Thank you.” He sipped his tea, the smile not fading from his face. “In time, you’ll know this joy, too. It’s wonderful to see your child find love. It makes your heart full knowing that they'll be happy with someone.”

Ozai didn’t comment. He hadn’t thought a lot about Zuko and Azula marrying yet, as it was many years off. And when he did, it only soured his mood further. There weren’t any royals left for them to marry. Lu Ten was marrying the last non-related royal available. They’d have to marry upper-class commoners. Children of merchants or mayors or petty councilmen. Only moving his family further away from royalty. They were practically wealthy commoners already.

Ursa walked over to join them, leaving Azula and Zuko by the fire as they played. “What are you two talking about?”

“Lu Ten is to be married,” Iroh explained. “He proposed to Sachiko last night. She said yes, of course. She’s so crazy about him.” 

Ursa looked genuinely pleased for him. “Oh, that’s lovely, you must be so excited!” She touched his shoulder briefly, giving him a squeeze.

“I am.” 

"We can start planning the wedding. I'll help Sachiko."

"Indeed. It's a ways off, though. We're headed back to the front very soon."

"Is there going to be an engagement party before you leave? I can talk to Sachiko and Lu Ten; we can throw something together."

"I'll ask him about that. I'm not sure what they're planning, exactly."

The memory started fading at that point as Ozai began to tune out their voices. He remembered staring at the fire altar as they carried on the conversation without him, watching the flames flicker and rise, getting lost in the depths of his own mind. He thought about his brother's vision for a moment. Conquering Ba Sing Se. Setting foot at the gates of the Forbidden City and walking right in— taking charge. No one had ever accomplished it.

Taking over the greatest city on Earth. 

Imagining the feeling of power that would come from that experience was so alluring, so addictive, that he couldn't help but fantasize about it. He sometimes doubted his brother's vision had really come from the spirits, but he didn't doubt his own abilities. Ozai felt, deep down, if given the opportunity, he would be the one who could really do it. 

Do the impossible: bring Ba Sing Se to its knees. 

For a moment, he considered that very soon his brother really would make his way to the Earth Kingdom capital and try to achieve that same end. Push his way in. Assert Fire Nation dominance— witness the thrilling sight of those earthbenders cowering and squirming under their control. Take the puppet-king off his throne and pull his head back by the braid, able to do whatever he wanted to him. To make the Earth Kingdom nothing. After that, no one would stand in their way. It would be a victory too wonderful for any words, too awe-inspiring. The water tribes would even lose hope after that.

He imagined being in his brother's place. Being the one to really kill the Earth King, to kill Long Feng. To watch from some upper rooftop as rows of Fire Nation tundra tanks rolled in, terrifying everyone. To order his troops forward, confidently marching through the streets that they had been dying to set foot in for nearly a hundred years. To watch everyone look at him, astonished and afraid of his power.

The jealousy was overwhelming.

The desire in him overpowering.

Watching white bits of paper burn up as flames rose from the fire altar, Ozai felt the flames in his own soul grow stronger as his resolve to stand back and do nothing became weaker and weaker with every passing day.

A/N:

• Japanese gift-giving customs: https://www.bokksu.com/blogs/news/gift-giving-in-japan 
• On succession: Considering that Iroh doesn't have a good opinion of Ozai, and doesn't seem to like him, I think it's pretty obvious if he had become Firelord that he would have named his son to be his successor, not Ozai. In my story, Ozai and Zuko both think of the succession that way. Even though, on paper, Ozai *was* technically the second heir after Iroh, once Iroh was in power it would only make sense to choose his own son as Prince Regent, cutting his brother out. Ozai just jumps to that conclusion in the flashback. Yes, Azula acknowledges the technical succession pattern in 'Zuko Alone' but that sequence of events doesn't make sense in reality. She likes the idea of her father being second-in-line to the throne, because it elevates their status, but Ozai understands that Iroh would choose Lu Ten to be his heir, not him. Iroh makes it clear in more than one episode that he doesn't like Ozai's personality and finds him to be unethical; I don't think he would actually let Ozai have the throne.
• The term tǔháo (土豪) is a Chinese term that means nouveau riche (new money), tacky, extravagant, and over-the-top. 
• A Japanese New Year's fire ritual: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7zP9rTW46AY 
• Opening quote is from this scene: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FFYjbM9KZsY